Home

Honeywell VRX180 User's Manual

1. eene nre 217 Figure 7 1 Data Storage Status Display nnne 226 Figure 7 2 Control Loop Tuning Display esses enne 237 Figure 8 1 AO Module Jumper ST1 ou eeeccecesecsseseseeeesescsceceseseseeecseeeeaeecsececseeeaeecsececaeeeeateeeeeeeaeeeeateeeees 246 xii Video Recorder User Manual Introduction 1 Introduction 1 1 Video Recorder Overview The Video Recorde Figure 141 is part of the family of multi point multi function video products The instrument offers display versatility flexible data storage up to 8 control loops each one can run its own profile and advanced math functions This integration of several functions eliminates the need for multiple devices and reduces installation costs The instrument features a high resolution LCD display which is capable of displaying up to 16 different colors simultaneously The front door opens to allow access to a 100MB ZIP disk drive A mini DIN connector can be used on the front door for connecting a PC keyboard or barcode reader for easy labeling of parameters Barcode reader also stores Event Records to disk Sixteen panel keys control all functions of the instrument including configuration The instrument will accept thermocouple RTD pyrometer milliamp millivolt and volt inputs Up to eight analog outputs are available for retransmission or control Data can be directed to various display formats stored o
2. 204 Table 5 18 Event Viewing Procedure ener tren enne enne 205 Table 5 19 Details Viewing 205 Table 5 20 Summary Viewing nennen trennen eren innen 206 Table 5 21 Segment Editing Procedure sess nennen eren rennen ens 207 Table 6 1 Displays Accessed With Display Button sesseeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeen nennen nennen nennen eene ene 209 Table 6 2 Point Detail Menu Prompts trennen ene enne tene teee trennen trennen eren enne 211 Table 6 3 Stop Panel 4 Display Rotation Procedure nennen nennen renes 214 Table 6 4 Resume Panel 4 Display Rotation Procedure sese nne 214 Table 6 5 Interacting With Loop Displays eesessesseseseeeeeeene enne nennen nennen nein rennen ene 216 Table 6 6 Messages and Symbols at Bottom of Display sese eene 218 Table 6 7 Messages and Symbols Elsewhere on Display seen eene 219 Table 7 Online Mam Menu ett ER RH EE PUR ertet ton Diets eub ee toe 221 Table 7 2 Floppy Disk Insertion Removal 222 Table 723 DISK Status pss tereti tecto teet enu cnt teu U ee ehe Manian ER eee 223 Table 7 4 Storage Start Stop Controls e ten
3. 232 7 5 Setpoint Profiles monre scent EU Ete T Urn ib rU m E aee 234 7 6 eie recht ete ee e e b ee ep ea bee E e 235 Ted Tee PUE 242 7 9 Review Programlimirig Reed n er Ree edet bee 242 Sh IAIN EIN tec 243 B OVEA EN a Re IRURE grs REN 243 8 2 Routine 245 8 8 EIN e Antonie Mies 245 8 4 Calibrate Analog e etm etre te Pet dne ie e e Ed ee te Pagus 245 8 5 AO MODULE calibration sit De deeded 246 8 6 Off line Diagnostics anie cis enar ende e deduce diuo ed ue teo Deo DR Do 247 8 7 uDatabase Services aune eater t te ed te ubt deis 248 dive teinte dtt dr Me 248 8 9 Product Information 5 ride ottico rane iere ane e Poen EE PH 248 8 107 Mains Frequency potete rre Eee tere npe Be eee Pise eter iv e B e D ov e Er dnce a NER 248 8 14 Wam Star ree arte e Dro e Page re e de e B b aie E EE dne E YA 249 8 12 DEMO tsi E 250 9 DIAGNOSTIC AND ERROR MESSAGES essen nnn 251 Diagnostic Messages eee ele an oi ee ie et 251 9 2 Error MGICALOlS n eri eh e e E e Rh E ERE 254 9
4. 62 Labels For Internal Function Block Parameters sse 63 Interconnections Between Function Blocks essere 62 Complete Function Block Diagram Of Figure 3 11 sss 64 Control Of Wastewater pH Using A Time Proportioning DAT Control Signal 65 Function Block Diagram Of Figure 3 17 sss 65 Temperature Control Of Water Using Split Output Or Duplex Control 66 Function Block Diagram Of Figure 3 19 sss 67 Temperature Control Of An Oil Heated Chemical Reaction 68 Function Block Diagram Of The Cascade Control 69 Example Set Point Profile senii ve reenen esr e a a nnne enne 70 Function Block Diagram Of Set Point Profile Control Of Figure 3 16 71 Discrete Inputs Controlling Execution Of Set Point Profiler Function Block 71 Up To 16 Discrete Events Be Programmed Per Step Of A Set Point Profile 72 Tying A Profile Function Block s Discrete Events With Discrete Output Hardware 73 Categories of Stored Data sse entere nennen nennen 74 Function Block Configuration of a Typical Ratio Control Loop 100 Compare Signal FOW ssnst teer a eene e ve eR eae v
5. oO e E v o xpnoiporroin8e rp rro Trou Sev TIPOBAETTETAI ATTO TOV KOTAOKEUGOTN SIAKIVOUVEUETAI TIAPEXOUEVN arr rov amp orrAiop Mnv Kav va amp amp prnpa rou orro ou n avrikar oraon SEV TIPOBAETTETAI ATT TOV KATAOKEUGOTH e NAEKTPIKEG yKaraor oeig TIPETTE va EiVAI CUUPWVEG pe TOTTIK KAI TIPAYHATOTTOIOUVTA EUTTEIDOUG TEXVIKOUG e TIPETTE va ouv erai ATTO KGBE GAAN o v sor Kal va ATTOOUVOEETAI TEAEUTOIO e Atraiteital vag IAK TTNG OTNV NAEKTPIKH EYKATAOTAON NAEKTPIKOU KOVT OTN OUOKEUN XYNOHKEX AEITOYPTIAX ioxtog 100 we 240 V ac dc ZuUXVOTNTA 50 60 Hz lox g 100 VA HAektpikn aopdAgia 3 15 A 250 V ac dc ZYNOHKEX ATropeuyete Aerroupy a TOU KOVTG oe EUMAEKTA UYPG Aerroupy a orroiac rjrrore NAEKTPIKNG OUOKEUNS oe TETOIO TIEPIBGAAOV OE KivOUVO yia rrjv aoq Aeia 5 ws 40 C ArroOrkeuong 20 w 60 Yypao a 10 90 RH cuyrrukvooiun 40 A vnor 10 40 Hz c0 oue 0 07 AA 40 60 Hz 0 2 g EL KATAXTAXH EZ ONAIZMOY aut rrp rrei
6. Os OY O 1415 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 987 6 DB25 male connector face view DB9 female connector face view RECORDER PC Pin n Pin n 2 2 3 5 7 20 20 oloa AI Note Check compatibility with your PC as far as no standard for DB9 connector exists yet VIDEO RECORDER PC 1DCD 2 lt 2RD 3 lt lt 3TD lt 4DTR 7 lt lt 58 6 eDSR m lt TRTS lt 8CTS 28 Video Recorder User Manual Installation e With DB25 connector Interface cable connectors pin arrangement and signal functions VIDEO RECORDER SIDE PC SIDE 12 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 65 4 3 2 1 0000000000000 0000000000 9 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2425 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 DB25 male connector face view DB25 female connector face view VIDEO RECORDER Pinne Pinm X Direction Description transmitted DATA received DATA o 7 from TE request to send ground VIDEO RECORDER PC A lt 2TD 3 lt gt lt 3RD m lt ARTS hs GTS _ lt 6DSR 7 lt lt 78 6 8DCD lt 20DTR Video Recorder User Manual 29 Installation 2 5 7 2 RS422 wiring configuration PC OR SERIAL PRINTER SOFTWARE RS422 APPLICATION 4 wires m T VIDEO RECORDER VIDEO RECORDER VIDEO RECORDER F
7. 106 Program Control Loops 90 Program Discrete 104 Program Discrete 105 Program mode defined eere 35 Program mode menu eee 91 Programming and Operating Concepts and Procedures ee ementi 35 Programming Procedure 91 Programming tips esseeenn 80 Proportional 96 R Replaying stored 226 Reset Input ie emt 107 Reset 248 Resetting 203 Review 242 Routine 245 Index S Scam Rate eiie usps 164 Security program reU 160 Select Language 165 Serial 161 Set Clock a i RO Re Ie Rice ds 162 Set Mode nom tbe en fos 242 245 Set Up New 167 Setpoint SOUCO npud eiie eter 235 toggle use e 235 Setpoint Profiler sesessesesss 175 Setpoint Trend Display interacting with
8. Figure 5 8 Activating Events In Mid Segment Video Recorder User Manual 183 Setpoint Profiler Segment Loops You can program up to four segment loops within a profile A segment loop is one or more consecutive segments which must repeat a selected number of times before proceeding to the next segment outside of the loop Segment loops are specified by the parameters REPEAT COUNT FROM SEGMENT and TO SEGMENT Loops are reset when Auto Cycle is reset and when the profile is reset Loops can contain other loops but cannot overlap Segment 5 Segment 1 8 amp r r4__ Loop 1 Repeated segments From Segment 2 To Segment 3 Repeat Count 1 Figure 5 9 Example Of A Segment Loop Examples of valid loops Loop 1 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 1 LOOP TO SEGMENT 10 Loop 2 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 1 LOOP TO SEGMENT 9 Loop 1 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 1 LOOP TO SEGMENT 10 Loop 2 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 2 LOOP TO SEGMENT 10 Loop 1 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 1 LOOP TO SEGMENT 10 Loop 2 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 2 LOOP TO SEGMENT 9 Example of invalid overlapping loops Loop 1 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 1 LOOP TO SEGMENT 9 Loop 2 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 2 LOOP TO SEGMENT 10 184 Video Recorder User Manual Setpoint Profiler 5 3 Parameters that control a profile s execution Coordinating operation of multiple profilers In a multi profiler instrument the profiles in a program can be totally unrel
9. Number of live screens lt 6 Associated sample rate Video Recorder User Manual 77 Programming and Operating Concepts EXAMPLES Example 1 4 Live Trends all having 1 Hour Screens 1 Data Storage Trend at 5 Seconds 1 Data Storage Trend at 10 Seconds 1 Live Screen The result 1 12 4 1 5 1 10 1 1 6333 BELOW THE LIMIT Example 2 1 Live Trends with 5 Minute Screen 1 Data Storage Trend at 0 25 Seconds 1 Live Screen The result 1 1 1 0 25 1 6 AT THE LIMIT Example 3 2 Live Trends with 5 Minute Screen 1 Data Storage Trend at 0 25 Seconds 1 Live Screen The result 1 1 2 1 0 25 1 7 ABOVE THE LIMIT Process and Diagnostic Data Integrity The instrument is equipped with several features to ensure data integrity The instrument will not store data to disk if its front door is open A BEZEL OPEN message will appear on all displays and process and diagnostic data meant for disk storage will be kept in the instruments memory buffer Data corruption and loss are therefore not issues if someone walks up to the instrument and simply removes the Data Storage disk Note that when performing Data Storage the instrument writes to the disk only once a minute This ensures that the latest data is always on disk In the event of a power failure at most one minute of data would be lost Performing Configuration Storage Configuration storage is performed through a Progra
10. eese ie pP et P peii RU hei 252 Table 9 3 Abnormal Loop Conditions And Indicators eren 254 Table 9 4 Error Messages oerte HR UO RR e atv eie 255 Table 10 1 Parts ose e e HER E RU E HUI ca PERDERE 259 Table A 1 Security Bypass Procedure eseseeeseeseeeeeeee eene nennen trennen eene EEEE tenete trennen 263 x Video Recorder User Manual Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figures one tea eec cet e itii ed etit ee cede etico 1 Video Recorder Model 10 Al Board Terminal Block Connections seseeeeeeeeere nennen 22 10 ohni Copper Connections Ioue ON e e e RO NS 22 DI Board Terminal Block Connections sseeeeeee eren 23 AO Board Terminal Block Connections eeeeeeeeeeenen nennen enne 24 DO Board Terminal Block C
11. 4 TO 20 mA DAT CONTROL SIGNAL CAUSTIC REAGENT WASTE WATER TREATMENT VESSEL WITH IMMERSION STYLE pH ELECTRODE AND MIXING IMPELLER Figure 3 17 Control Of Wastewater pH Using A Time Proportioning DAT Control Signal This application requires a basic time proportioning control loop to monitor and control the pH of the wastewater to a local set point of 7 pH units That is the loop will neutralize the wastewater so that it can be safely released to the environment The wastewater pH which is assumed to be primarily acidic will be controlled by introducing a caustic reagent to the contents of the treatment vessel This will be done through use of a time proportioning relay signal that will pulse a pump connected to a caustic reagent source A function block diagram representing the control scheme of Figure 3 17 has been drawn in Figure 3 18 The same diagram method was used to produce Figure 3 16 AO1 BC CONNECT TO PUMP 4 TO 20 mA RANGE LOW 0 RANGE HIGH 14 CIRCUIT LOW 1 TYPE STANDARD CIRCUIT HIGH 5 SP1 7 00 OUTPUT TYPE DAT IN LOW LIMIT 0 IN HIGH LIMIT 100 IMPULSE TIME 150 Figure 3 18 Function Block Diagram Of Figure 3 17 This drawing is similar to the temperature control application The analog input control loop and analog output function blocks Al1 LP1 and AO1 have been used similarly The discrete output function block was added drawn as a circle
12. Figure 2 3 DI Board Terminal Block Connections 2 5 5 Analog Outputs The Analog Output AO board provides four outputs at 0 to 20 mA configurable for 4 to 20 mA or any span between 0 to 20 mA When not used for an analog output an output channel may be used to power a transmitter with 24 Vdc power The video recorder will support up to two AO boards for a total of eight outputs Figure 2 4 shows the terminal connections for the AO board See Section 1 for details on all I O board specifications Video Recorder User Manual 23 Installation 4 to 20 mA output Slot ID Ground Terminal NOTE Channels not used as analog outputs can be used to supply a transmitter with 24 Vdc power Figure 2 4 AO Board Terminal Block Connections 2 5 6 Digital Outputs There are three types of Digital Output DO boards which provide three types of Off On control 1 Relay alarm Output 2 DC Output 3 AC output Figure 2 4 shows the terminal block connections for the DC output and AC output DO boards See Section 1 for details on all I O board specifications 24 Video Recorder User Manual Installation Relay Alarm Output Module ID Figure 2 5 DO Board Terminal Block Connections The Digital Output board with relay outputs contain jumpers to set the de energized state of the relay contacts The relays are factory set to Normally Closed NC for each output on the relay output board To change the state of the cont
13. AO or if loop type is ON OFF then MAN will be steady not flashing Status from a downstream function block indicates that there is no path to final output element For example the secondary control loop of cascade configuration was changed to manual mode 254 Video Recorder User Manual Diagnostic and error messages 9 3 Error Messages Overview Sometimes errors occur while you are programming or loading a configuration into your instrument In most cases the instrument displays a descriptive error message For example if you try to program a function block incorrectly the instrument tells you the problem Table 944 lists these error messages along with a description of each one and what action to take Table 9 4 Error Messages m Alarm Event Diagnostic burst The instrument had an Inspect the Alarm Summary History and transitions lost Alarm Event Diagnostic burst in the controller and the Discrete Summary Screen to and some transitions were lost resolve any missing or unresolved alarms vs their current states If the state transition that was missing was an off state it will be matched and processed upon the next on off transition of the corresponding alarm Block Phase Greater Than Block In Periodic Timer CV the phase start time Change Period to greater than phase Period is greater than the period For example the Start Time or change Start Time to start time is 8 00 and the period is 4 00
14. TREND 1 LO RATE Seconds 25 5 1 2 3 4 5 This rate can be altered here or in the trend data setup see 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 Table 4 72 If the low storage rates are changed the disk capacity will reflect the new trend capacity Enter data Minutes 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 collection rate This is how often the data points are 30 40 50 sampled The 25 ms selection is only available for 2 input instruments with no more than 3 points total in Trends 1 3 Hours 1 The 5 sec rate cannot exceed 6 points total Trends 1 3 TREND 1 HI RATE Seconds 25 5 1 2 3 4 5 This rate can be altered here or in the trend data setup see 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 Table 4 72 If the hi storage rates are changed the disk capacity will reflect the new trend capacity Enter data Minutes 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 collection rate This is how often the data points are 30 40 50 sampled The 25 ms selection is only available for 2 input instruments with no more than 3 points total in Trends 1 3 The 5 sec rate cannot exceed 6 points total in Trends 1 3 Hours 1 172 Video Recorder User Manual The values shown below are for each Trend file POINTS PER FILE Table 4 76 Disk Storage Capacity of 100MB ZIP disk Programming Function Blocks and Features 24000000 bytes per file STORAGE RATE 1 sec 5 sec 10 sec 30sec 1min 10
15. Loop output ANALOG value OUTPUT 1 LP2 OV CONTROL LOOP 2 INPUT SOURCE FAILSAF Number 9 SETPOINT 2 Figure 3 8 Example Input Parameter Connection Assume we want to make the connections shown in Figure 3 8 We want Analog Output 1 a current output to get its input from Control Loop 2 s output value Therefore we must program Analog Output 1 s Input Source parameter with the output code that represents Control Loop 2 s output value The following procedure shows how Table 3 5 Output Code Connection Procedure In the Program Analog Output menu select ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Consult the Program Analog Output section of this manual to learn about the menu item you wish to change namely INPUT SOURCE Press Down Arrow button to move the cursor to the menu choice INPUT SOURCE Press Enter to move the cursor to the right side of the display where the choices for INPUT SOURCE are Press Up Arrow until PARM is displayed If you press too many times and a number is displayed continue pressing Up Arrow until PARM is displayed again If you press Down Arrow while the number is displayed the instrument assumes you want to enter a number not a parameter If you pressed Down Arrow you must press Menu then press Enter then Up Arrow until PARM is displayed Press Enter to select PARM which gives you choices for output codes to connect to Figure 3 9 shows the format for all output codes Press
16. Multiple Input Average Multiple Avg The output CVn A1 is the instantaneous average of the assigned input points The average is calculated every scan cycle Table 4 47 describes the Multiple Average prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 47 Multiple Average Prompts OUT LOW LIMIT OFF or number Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when these limits are exceeded OUT HIGH LIMIT INPUT 1 INPUT 8 OFF analog parameter Enter up to 8 inputs to be averaged number 140 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features CEMS Block Average Outputs a block mean average CVn OV over the specified Average Period The average is calculated from input samples taken at equally spaced Sample Periods All samples are discarded at the end of the Average Period and the Average Period begins again Samples are ignored when Calibrate Hold is ON 1 After the Average Period the new average is calculated using only the samples taken before and after the Hold If no valid samples are taken the output maintains its previous value Table 4 48 describes the CEMS Block Average prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 48 CEMS Block Average Prompts RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGE HIGH HIGH ET OFF analog parameter number Input to be averaged NEM OFF discrete parameter O
17. 2 Input 1 gt Hysteresis Result switches OFF Figure 4 3 Compare s Greater Than Result With Hysteresis 110 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 20 Compare s Condition Type and Condition Time Prompts NONE D Result Result Condition type Application thisistue then CVn OS is Filters short pulses Result switches ON 1 for n ON n seconds minus Delays rising edge of Result for seconds 2 CONDITION TIME CONDITION TIME CONDITION TIME Result switches OFF 0 OFF 0 Condition Type Delay Condition Time 3 seconds If Result is 1 Onat least 3 sec Not on at least 3 sec EE 2 Then CVn OS is 3 sec dela 2 sec Condition type Application then CVn OS is EXTEND Used for interfacing with slower Result switches ON 1 for n ON 1 for n seconds plus circuits seconds then OFF 0 CONDITION TIME then OFF 0 Extends falling edge of Result Result switches ON 1 ON with no delay for CONDITION TIME Condition Type Extend Condition Time 3 seconds If Result is Then CVn OS is 3 sec extend Time Video Recorder User Manual 111 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 20 Compare s Condition Type and Condition Time Prompts continued Condition type Application Mthisistue then CVn OS is PULSE Used for interfacing with slower Result switches ON
18. 41 Guaranteed Soak High Limit Hysteresis A a es Ds Ey Setpoint VALUE of profile a p i CE al i Process Variable 1 Hysteresis 41 Guaranteed Soak Low Limit Returned below limit and hysteresis Profile resumes RUN Setpoint deviation still within hysteresis still on HOLD Excessive deviation Profile changes to HOLD State Figure 5 7 Guaranteed Soak and Hysteresis Video Recorder User Manual Setpoint Profiler Segment Events Each segment contains 16 programmable discrete event outputs whose ON OFF states specified by you can be used to trigger other discrete functions The segment s event states are activated at the beginning of the segment and are maintained unless changed by the next segment in the profile See Table 541 The last segment s event states are maintained after the profiler is ended Table 5 1 Example of Segment Events Eg Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 ES EM To activate events in the middle of a ramp segment replace the desired segment with 3 segments a ramp a very short soak and another ramp Program the second and third segment events as if they were the middle of the segment Ramp segment Same events as short soak 4 To activate events here Ramp segment Program this W Short soak segment with desired events Program both ramps with same slope
19. 41 to104 F Storage 20 to 60 C 4 to 158 F Relative Humidity 10 to 90 non condensing at 40 Altitude 2000 meters Installation Category Pollution Degree 2 Power Universal power supply 100 to 240 Vac dc 100 VA max Fuse Rating 3 15 Amps 250 Vac slow blow Display Type Color LCD active matrix Screen Size 10 4 diagonal Resolution 640 x 480 pixels Update Rate 1 second Trend Timebase 5 min to 24 hrs screen 0 5 cm hr to 154 cm hr vertical 0 2 hr to 61 hr vertical 0 8 cm hr to 250 cm hr horizontal 0 3 hr to 100 hr horizontal Data Archiving Media 100MB ZIP disk drive Data Types Analog points calculations discrete status alarms diagnostics Trends 4 max up to 12 points max per trend Unit Data 1 up to 12 points 10 000 records Alarm History Up to 1600 records Event History Up to 1600 records Diagnostic History Up to 1600 records Setpoint Programs 224 maximum on LS120 floppy disk Storage Rate Range 0 25 to 3600 sec Capacity Automatically calculates storage time based on storage rate Setpoint Up to 4 programmers 2 Video recorder User Manual Introduction Table 1 1 Specifications continued Program Capability Number of Memory can store 96 programs for a single channel programmer 48 programs for a dual Programs channel programmer 32 programs for a three channel programmer and 24 for a four channel programmer Programs can also be stored to floppy disk
20. 7 Online Operation Using Menus 7 1 Overview Online operation involves interacting with displays and with menus This section describes how to interact with the online menus The Online Menu is accessed by pressing the Display button then the Menu button Or you can choose SET MODE from any menu to change the mode ATTENTION Switching to the Online mode from the Program or Maintenance modes by pressing the Display button sometimes displays incorrect data for a few seconds before the display data is refreshed You can avoid this distraction by selecting ONLINE from the SET MODE menu instead The top level of the menu structure is shown in Table 741 Your unit may have a reduced menu if options are not present or if features have been disabled through programming selections Table 7 1 Online Main Menu REVIEW PROGRAMMING View all programming read only Video Recorder User Manual 221 Online Operation Using Menus 7 2 Data Storage Overview Data Storage lets you store trend data unit data alarms events and diagnostics for later review onscreen or on a PC with SDA software or the TrendManager Pro V5 software suite Setup and configuration of Data Storage is described in Section 4 26 online operation is described here Typical online data storage tasks 1 Removing installing and labeling disks Pre initializing a disk on a PC see Section 3 15 Initializing new disk using the current Data Storage setup schedule
21. RESET LIMIT LATCHING Video Recorder User Manual 93 Programming Function Blocks and Features Loop Menu Items Table 4 10 alphabetically describes every loop menu item See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 10 Loop Prompts APPROACH HIGH Enter a value 0 1 to 100 or This function affects the process variable approach to set OFF point when the process variable value is less than the set point value The value entered is the percent of span deviation from set point at which a recalculation of the loop integral value will occur Enter a starting value equal to the proportional band value 1 gain value x 100 if Gain is used or OFF at initial configuration The value may be altered Online for final loop tuning This function is useful for batch startup from a cold condition to control excessive overshoot when set point is reached APPROACH LOW Enter a value 0 1 to 100 or Affects the process variable approach to set point when OFF the process variable value is greater than the set point value AUTO MAN SELECT OFF discrete parameter 0 1 This parameter takes the place of the Auto Man button when the DISCR VS KEY SEL discrete is ON 1 AUTO MAN SELECT ON 1 Manual mode AUTO MAN SELECT OFF 0 Automatic mode When DISCR VS KEY SEL is OFF 0 AUTO MAN SEL has no effect CHG ACTION INPUT OFF discrete parameter O 1 Change Action Input Selects the opposite control action from that selected for the cont
22. SAMPLE HOLD OFF discrete parameter O 1 Holds Input The input value is measured normally when this discrete is OFF 0 and holds its last value when the discrete is ON 1 Hold appears on menu only if EXPANDED INPUT is enabled under Enable Features in the Program menu Press Menu when entries are complete At the prompt PRESS ENTER TO SAVE press Enter to save your changes or press Menu again to exit the session without saving the changes Video Recorder User Manual 89 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 8 Program Control Loops Control Loop Programming Structure Programming a control loop requires configuring at least 3 function blocks an Analog Input Al a loop algorithm and an Analog Output AO The term AO is applied to any type of control output current CAT or time proportioning DAT The structure of the instrument permits many variations on this concept by allowing Calculated Values CVs both digital and analog to be used as inputs to the different parameters within the control algorithms It also allows a single parameter to be read by any number of function blocks in the unit Loop Characteristics Table 4 8 lists loop characteristics to be aware of when configuring your instrument Table 4 8 Loop Characteristics Characteristic What to be aware of Choice of algorithm type Two PID algorithm types interactive and noninteractive Noninteractive is the default type however this may be cha
23. Table 4 17 describes the Peak Picking prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 17 Peak Picking Prompts RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGEHIGH HIGH OFF analog parameter Input source whose peak is picked number RESET OFF discrete parameter 0 Holds output and restarts time interval 1 ACTION NONE MIN MAX AVG Type of peak pick MIN selects the minimum MAX selects STDDEV the maximum AVG selects the mean average STDDEV selects the standard deviation over the time interval PERIOD MINUTES 0 999 999 9 Number of minutes in time interval Video Recorder User Manual 107 Programming Function Blocks and Features Signal Select Selects one of 48 inputs based on the action and outputs it as CVn OV Table 4 18 describes the Signal Select prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 18 Signal Select Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition OUTPUT LOW LIMIT OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT OFF or number Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when these limits are exceeded INPUT 1 INPUT 48 OFF analog parameter number Up to 48 input sources to be selected from according to the ACTION ACTION HIGH Selects the highest value input LOW Selects the lowest value input AVG Averages the input values MIDDLE Selects the middle median
24. Table 7 8 Delete All Diagnostics Procedure Select ACCESS SUMMARIES from the Main On Line Menu Select DELETE ALL DIAGNOSTICS and press Enter to delete all diagnostics from the summary Press Menu or Display buttons to exit the menu Product Information Select this item to display the logo screen which includes the product identification software version number part number of the PROM and serial number Video Recorder User Manual 231 Online Operation Using Menus 7 4 Data Entry Data Entry lets you enter or revise data online Choices available depend on installed options and enabled features see Enable Features in Section 4 19 Edit Alarm Setpoints Select this item to display a list of alarms and their setpoints If the setpoint is a numeric value it can be changed on this display using the Up Arrow Down Arrow and Left Arrow buttons If it is programmed as a parameter it cannot be changed here Edit Constants Select this item to display or change a list of all constants in the instrument To change a value use the Up Arrow Down Arrow and Left Arrow buttons Force Discrete Inputs Outputs Select either of these items to display or force the status of any discrete The STATE indicates ON or OFF FORCE RELEASE indicates if the discrete is forced or released unforced To force a discrete select FORCE ON or FORCE OFF To release a forced discrete select RELEASE Adjust with Up Arrow and Down Arrow Press Enter t
25. rm REPLAY FROM SET UP NEW REVIEW CURRENT WARNING DISK p gt INITIALIZE DISK Dp LISTDISKFILES SCHEDULES SCHEDULES p LEVEL y DATA STORAGE STORAGE DATA STORAGE STATUS p Y BATCH NUMBER BATCH STATE ACCESS SUMMARIES DISPLAY ALARM DISPLAY ALARM DISPLAY DISPLAY ALL DISPLAY ALL DELETE ALL PRODUCT SUMMARY HISTORY DIAGNOSTICS ANALOGS DISCRETES DIAGNOSTICS INFORMATION EDIT ALARM FORCE DISCRETE FORCE DISCRETE ADJUST ANALOG RESET RESETALL p SET ANALOG DATA ENTRI P sErPomrs P EPIT CONSTANTS Ha INPUTS I oureurs INPUTS rorauzems 0 rorauzERs OUTPUTS STORE PROGRAM STORE PROGRAM LOAD PROGRAM SETPOINT PROFILES EDIT PROFILE 1 EDIT PROFILE 2 gt EDIT PROFILE 3 gt EDIT PROFILE 4 TODISK H gt TO MEMORY JA FROM DISK Y LOAD PROGRAM FROM MEMORY TUNE LOOP H Loops H gt Loop 2 H Loop l gt LOOP 4 p o o 9 LOOP 8 SET ANALOG OUTPUTS gt OUTPUT 1 H gt OUTPUT 2 gt OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 p e e OUTPUT 8 REVIEW PROGRAMMING H ANALOG INPUTS CONTROL LOOPS DISCRETE INPUTS CALCULATED DISCRETE OUTPUTS PROFILES TOTALIZERS VALUES CONSTANTS H DISPLAYS H FEATURES SECURITY gt SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Y SCANRATE Figure 3 3 ON LINE mode MAIN MENU V
26. then to the setpoint value then to the loop output value if loop is in Manual mode Toggle the loop between Press Auto Manual button Auto and Manual modes To use the Auto Manual button all of the following conditions must be met 1 Loop must be in Local mode which means FORCE REMOTE MAN discrete parameter must be OFF 2 DISCR VS KEY SEL discrete parameter must be OFF 3 If security is active for AUTO MAN changes the security code must be entered first For a description of the loop parameters FORCE REMOTE MAN and DISCR VS KEY SEL see Table 4 10 Lower or raise the loop Press Tab key to move cursor to loop output To change the output the loop output displayed as must be in manual mode initiated by front panel key or by external discrete signal not in Remote Manual mode Increase or decrease Press Tab key until cursor is on the setpoint value Press Increment and Setpoint value Decrement to adjust value Only numerically assigned setpoint values can be changed online Setpoint 2 cannot be changed if it is acting as a remote setpoint e g running a profile You can also change the setpoint value by accessing the Tune Loop menu as described in the next row Access the loop tuning Press Tab key until the cursor is on the loop tag at the top of the display parameters Press Enter to access the Tune Loop menu for that loop Adjust desired parameters To return to the loop display press Menu See Section 7 6 Tu
27. these Profiles Profiles Profiles E 2 2 3 3 122 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Function Generator This CV type can be used to characterize a valve Figure 4 8 or an input signal Figure 4 9 You enter a custom curve of up to 19 segments 20 X Y coordinates The input is compared with the X values and its corresponding Y value becomes the output CVn OV Interpolation between coordinates is straight line See Figure 4 7 If the input value is outside the range of X values the nearest X value is used the output will be clamped to the corresponding Y value and the displayed output value will flash Figure 4 7 Function Generator Curve Table 4 33 describes the Function Generator prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 33 Function Generator Prompts RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s lower display limit Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds this limit Default value is Y1 value RANGE HIGH OFF or number Enter the output s lower display limit Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds this limit Default value is Y1 value INPUT OFF analog parameter This value will be compared with the X values of the curve number The corresponding Y value will be the CV output X1 Y1 X2 Y2 X20 OFF or number Use these prompts to plot a curve using 2 to 20 X Y Y20 coordinates X values must increase as Xn increases FEEDB
28. 165 Load progratm 2 eite tete 201 Loop changing between Auto amp Manual modes 216 changing output 216 changing setpoint 216 changing tuning parameters 216 Loop 90 Loop displays interacting 215 Loop error 254 Loop Menu 94 M Mains Frequency eese 248 2 2 2 243 Maintenance mode detined iride ec EUR ao 35 Math Operator ioo eI RE sheets 114 Menu 36 5 0 5 217 location edt n 217 Messages and Symbols description 218 Minimum On and Off Time 101 Model Selection Guide 10 Modes of 35 N Number h w to entep 56 Off line Diagnostics 247 Online mode RR Ee eek 35 Online Operation Using Menus 221 Online Operations Using Primary Displays 209 Online summaries ACCESSING mter de ped pis
29. 210 Shutting down 204 Signal select 106 Software Version Number 248 Specifications 2 5 ingentes ite 2 Split Output 90 91 Starting profile 202 Storage Rate 172 Storage Rate 41 173 T Text enttyss recieved 45 Totalizer reset by pressing a 50 Totalizer 233 Changing timebase 212 detail adie net DRE etes 211 TING C ede 212 Eee 211 AQUA IRI C EE 212 isi rRNA MR ie 211 vem M c 212 Trend interacting with 211 U Upgrade nene 248 V Viewing profile 205 Viewing profile 205 Viewing profile 5 206 WwW Warm Start aeaa eer ERR US 249 Warm Start Time see 249 Video Recorder User Manual 279 Sales and Service For application assistance current specifications pricing or name of the nearest Authorize
30. 30 mir 1 hour 2 18 5 2 2 4 5 1 1 2 2 22 2 66 8 133 7 days months months years years years years years 4 8 1 1 3 2 7 8 1 1 3 13 3 40 1 80 2 days months months months years years years years 6 5 9 29 8 1 9 5 9 11 9 9 8 29 4 58 8 days days months months months years years years 8 4 8 24 4 1 6 4 8 9 7 8 0 24 0 48 1 days days months months months years years years 10 3 7 18 9 1 2 3 7 7 5 6 2 18 7 37 4 days days months months months years years years 12 3 2 16 2 1 0 3 2 6 5 5 3 16 0 32 1 days days month months months years years years Video Recorder User Manual 173 Programming Function Blocks and Features Batch Control Specify a discrete parameter as the START STOP switch for all data types whose storage mode is set to BATCH ATTENTION If no BATCH CONTROL parameter is defined here batch storage is started stopped instead through the menu item BATCH STATE If a parameter is defined here BATCH STATE menu item is disabled Initializing a disk Select INITIALIZE DISK from DATA STORAGE Initialization activates storage and creates a file for each data set Trends 1 4 alarms events unit data diagnostics Filename extensions are as follows Table 4 77 Filename Extensions Of Data Storage Types est Eh Trend data Alarms LNA Events LNE Unit Data LNU Diagnostics LND Select USE NEW SCHEDULES to store the new storage schedules If you choose USE CURRENT SCHEDULES the disk is initialized usin
31. 634 634 2 1268 4 2536 3 5073 8 15 221 3 423 422 8 8456 1691 3 3382 5 10 147 5 317 317 1 634 2 1268 4 2536 7610 6 254 253 7 507 4 1014 3 2029 5 6088 5 211 2114 422 8 8456 1691 3 5073 8 181 181 2 362 4 724 8 14496 4348 9 159 158 6 317 1 634 2 12684 3805 3 141 140 9 281 9 563 8 1127 5 3382 5 127 126 8 253 7 507 4 10148 3044 3 115 115 3 230 6 461 3 922 5 2 767 5 106 105 7 211 4 422 8 845 6 2 536 9 98 97 6 195 1 390 3 780 6 2 341 7 Buffer Size in hours 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table 4 58 2 trend group live buffer size Number of Number of Display length p T d de 30min ihr 2hrs X 4hr 24hrs 2536 9 7610 6 1691 3 5073 8 1268 4 3 805 3 10148 3044 3 845 0 2536 9 724 8 2174 5 634 2 1 902 7 563 8 1 691 3 507 4 1 522 1 461 3 1 383 8 422 8 1 268 4 390 3 1 170 9 Buffer Size in hours 154 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 59 4 trend group live buffer size 4 Trend Groups Number of Number of Display length points in the pages in the trend buffer 5 min 15 min 30 min 1hr 2 hrs 8 hrs 24 hrs 634 2 3 805 3 422 8 2 536 9 317 1 1 902 7 253 7 1 522 1 211 4 1 268 4 181 2 1 087 2 158 6 951 3 140 9 845 6 126 8 761 1 115 3 691 9 105 7 634 2 97 6 585 4 Buffer Size in hours 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Video Recorder User Manual 155 Programming Function Blocks and Features Set Up Bar Graph 1 Table 4 60 describes the prompts for setting up Bar G
32. AND OR XOR Inverter Flip Flop One Shot Inverter algorithms Advanced Math package includes 64 Calculated Values with the functions from Standard Math along with the following types of pre packaged algorithms Signal Select Compare Signal Clamp Periodic Timer Interval Timer Counter Relative Humidity Standard Splitter Scaling ams Auto Tune Each loop can be pre tuned automatically to establish acceptable tuning parameters On line fuzzy overshoot suppression Primary Displays Up to 10 displays may be assigned from the 32 formats selected among trend screens Bargraph screens Panel screens Summary screens loop screens Setpoint profiler Screens Communications Type RS 422 485 Modbus RTU protocol optional Connection 2 or 4 wire RS485 Distance 600 meters 2000 feet Number of links Up to 30 Baud Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K Parity Selectable odd even none 6 Video recorder User Manual Introduction Table 1 1 Specifications continued Analog input accuracy and rated limits Accuracy Reference conditions Temperature 23 C 2 C 73 F 3 F Humidity 65 RH 5 Line voltage Nominal 1 Source resistance 0 ohm Series mode and common mode 0 V Frequency Nominal 1 Accuracy Field calibration accuracy 0 05 of the selected range IEC 873 Factory calibration 0 1 Cold junction accuracy 0 5 C Rated limits and Parameters
33. BATCH or Continuous storage becomes active immediately upon ON COMMAND initialization Batch storage is controlled by a discrete parameter see BATCH CONTROL page 174 or by start stop batch menu item Batch data may be started and Stopped several times in a single file until the file is full Batch start increments a batch number that is stored along with the data The batch number may be used for data retrieval and analysis using SDA data analysis software ON COMMAND storage collects a single sample of data whenever the EXTERNAL ENABLE discrete makes an off to on transition If this mode is used then SET UP SCHEDULE is ignored COPY DISPLAY Copies the data point list already set up for a currently SETUP active Unit Data display ROLLOVER ON OFF Select ON to continue gathering and storing trend data after the Unit data file becomes full The new data will replace the oldest data on the disk as it is collected No warning will be given Select OFF to stop trend storage when trend space becomes full A DISK FULL message will then appear Data is buffered until a new disk is inserted and initialized UNIT DATA Enter a value from 0 1600 Number of samples SAMPLES EXTERNAL ENABLE OFF discrete parameter 0 1 This discrete parameter will allow Unit data storage when ON 1 and will stop Unit data storage when OFF 0 This enable is independent of the storage mode it does not control batch start stop 170 Video Recorder
34. Back Calculation Value BC of an analog output module Feedback inputs must have a span equal to the loop output span when they are not pointed directly to analog output modules FEEDFORWARD OFF analog parameter Modifies the control loop output independent of the PID number calculation The range of the value should not exceed 0 to 100 units Feedforward is typically used to provide an output change in anticipation of a change to the loop process variable FEEDFORWARD 10 00 to 10 00 Applies gain to the feedforward input value GAIN FORCE REMOTE OFF discrete parameter 0 When discrete is ON 1 forces loop from automatic mode to MAN 1 remote manual bp remote manual loop output is determined by the OUTPUT TRACKING value and the local Down Arrow and Up Arrow buttons for manual output adjustment are disabled In remote manual the automatic indicator AUTO of the display will flash Selecting Manual mode from the Auto Manual button will override remote manual operation When the loop s Set point 42 is programmed as the Set point Profiler SPn OV Force Remote manual should be programmed as OFF GAIN PROP BAND PB or GAIN Select whether gain or proportional band will be used for tuning the control loop GAIN 1 OR GAINZ2 Enter a value of 0 1 to 200 Gain is the proportional gain entry for the control loop The for Gain or 0 5 to 1000 0 for value entered here is the gain applied to the error signal to Proportional Band Enter d
35. FEEDBACK 2 AOn BC LPn BC CVn BC Enter an AO LP or CV for the back calculation value BC of the analog output assigned to the A2 output OUTPUT OFF or number Deadband up to 10 of the input span In this range both DEADBAND split outputs will remain at zero Video Recorder User Manual 135 Programming Function Blocks and Features Scaling The output CVn OV is a linear scaling of the input using the specified limits Table 4 43 describes the Scaling prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 43 Scaling Prompts Pomp Range Selections Definition IN LOW LIMIT OFF or number Enter limits of input to be scaled IN HIGH LIMIT RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s scaling values and display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGEHIGH HIGH RANE HIGH OFF analog parameter Input to be scaled according to the limits number 136 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Signal Clamp If input is between Low Select and High Select the output CVn OV equals the input If the input exceeds these two limits the output equals the preset value Table 4 44 describes the Signal Clamp prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 44 Signal Clamp Prompts OUT LOW LIMIT OFF or number Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when these limits are exceeded OUTHIGHLIMIT HIGH LIMIT SELECT OFF analog par
36. If the failsafe value is set to off the output will go to 0 Impulse Time For DAT outputs use the Up Arrow Down Arrow and Enter buttons to adjust the impulse time Impulse time must be gt 1 second Impulse time is the cycle time for on and off cycling of the output For example an impulse time of 150 seconds will cause the output to be on for 75 seconds and off for 75 seconds when the input source is at 50 e Reset totalizers 232 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operation Using Menus Select this item to display a list of all resettable Totalizers and their current values If the Totalizer is non resettable it will not appear You may use this display to reset one Totalizer or all at once Note that some or all Totalizers may be configured to be non resettable Use the Up Arrow Down Arrow and Enter buttons to select an item from the list At the prompt RESET press Enter to reset the Totalizer To reset all Totalizers select the menu line RESET ALL TOTALIZERS and press Enter at the prompt All resettable Totalizers will be reset Video Recorder User Manual 233 Online Operation Using Menus 7 5 Setpoint Profiles For instructions on this menu see Section 5 4 How to set up a profiler Tables 5 4 and 5 5 For instructions on common operator tasks with the Setpoint Profiler see Section 5 5 234 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operation Using Menus 7 6 Tune Loop This option lets you tune change v
37. Set Point select key while viewing the loop s ON LINE display Refer to Figure 4 1 Video Recorder User Manual 97 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 10 Loop Prompts continued Promp Range Selections RATIO SETPOINT Enter a number will equal the ratio that the ratio control loop will maintain between its process variable and a wild variable The wild variable may be the Output Value of any analog input or calculated value function block over which the ration loop will have no control The RATIO SETPOINT menu choice is essentially a multiplier applied to the wild variable s value This multiplication s result will be a working set point for the loop that will ensure the desired process variable to wild variable ratio For example suppose you intend to use the ratio control loop to maintain a 50 fuel air ratio in the operation of a furnace If the loop will be directly controlling air flow i e air flow will be the loop s process variable and fuel flow will be used as a wild variable to generate the ratio loop s working set point the RATIO SETPOINT menu choice will have to be set to 0 50 Hence if fuel flow is measured to be 60 the working set point that will be used in the ratio loop s control of air flow will be 60 x 0 50 30 To make a ratio control loop s working set point equal to the product of RATIO SETPOINT and a specific wild variable value the loop s working set point must be toggled
38. configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file function block Invalid Channel in Point Invalid channel has been found Verify programming of affected spec function block Invalid Equation Invalid Equation Free form math equation is invalid form math Free form math equation is invalid is invalid Check equation Check equation Invalid Function Block Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the Verify programming of affected Request configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file function block Invalid Index code Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the Verify programming of affected configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file function block Invalid Input Connection Function block is programmed with wrong input type Verify programming of affected Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the function block configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file Invalid Machine Update Bad machine scan rate Re enter machine scan rate Rate Invalid Parameter Code Bad parameter code has been found Generally Verify programming of affected caused by transferring configurations between function block instruments with different software versions Invalid Parameter for Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the Verify programming of affected Data Type configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file function block Invalid Tag Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the Verify programming
39. e Wire RS232 serial port of the computer to an RS232 to RS485 converter The RS485 port of the converter should be wired to the Communications port of the VRX recorder Arrangement Description ICS plug in I O board Wired directly to the RS422 485 port in your computer using an ICS plug in I O board which is specifically designed to interface with the IBM or IBM compatible PC PC XT or PC AT computer This board is available from ICS Computer Products Inc 5466 Complex Street Suite 208 San Diego California 92123 Burr Brown Converter Using the RS232 port a Burr Brown RS232 to RS422 485 converter installed between the RS232 port and the video recorder This converter is available from Burr Brown International Airport Industrial Park P O Box 11400 Tucson Arizona 85734 Part number LDM485ST limited distance modem Westermo converter The Westermo MA44 converts RS232 to RS422 485 It is installed between the RS232 port and the video recorder 2 5 7 5 Rear connection The video recorder has built in circuits to reduce the effects of most electrical noise We recommend that you review the following guidelines to minimize the noise effects 1 Separate the communication leadwires from the line voltage the alarm output contactors motors etc 2 For a communication distance over 1 5 meters use a separate metal tray or metal conduit 3 Use wiring cable composed of twisted pair wirings with a shield for 5485
40. eoo imo o 2600 4 2 95 1 wexooya 80 to a0 4m w 9 ws 7 9s _ 100w 2900 604 0 1260 3 17 95 _ 188900075 150 w 2000 8160 i5 6 3 ia _ 200 1900 6 15 98 _ e0026 H0 w 4600 T5525 8 44 18 _ 188900472 e icones 1850 t 4000 1010 w 2204 8 44 1 05 _ 18690 1720 s os ieoaor 750 to 1600 39 t Sn 6 18890 5423 188920579 18899 8614 o o 32 to 3272 0 to 1800 o 0 to 3210 1766 cas Alo 18894 9014 Spectray 18885 Spectray 18885 1 Spectray 18885 2 Spectray 18886 Spectray 18886 1 18874 0578 18875 0579 NOTES 1 The accuracy will be the larger value between Min Value and range of the selected limits 2 Reference range operating range when blank 3 IPTS 68 4 T influence 0 5 per 10 C on Cu 10 ohms 0 3 per 10 C on Pt 100 lt 200 C 5 For Pyrometry the worst accuracy Max value is at the low range limit the best Min value is at the high limit For non linear temperature transmitter the transmitter range MUST be identical to the input range of the recorder 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 ak N 3 2 a 3 3 10 3 1 4 4 2 2 8 Video recorder User Manual Introduction Table 1 4 Standards This product is designed and manufactured to be in conformity with applicable U S Canadian and Inter
41. falling edge The changing status is what triggers the action not the status itself Some discretes such as START are rising edge sensitive only and are not affected by a falling edge When START s discrete goes ON the profiler starts to run when the discrete goes OFF the profiler continues running Level sensitive means that one action occurs while the discrete is ON and another action occurs while the discrete is OFF The status is what causes the action not the changing status Fast forward s discrete is level sensitive that is the profiler will run in fast forward while the discrete is ON but not while it is OFF Lo E 5 2 Parameters That Control Profiler Execution er nam by present START Starts Profiler from Ready Hold or End state Rising Profiler in Ready or Profiler m Activated by operator menu or by discrete input starts to May be connected to the F1 key SY1F1 Run RESET The behavior of this parameter depends on START Rising Start is Profiler RUN If the START discrete input is programmed with a edge programmed with a changes to discrete then switching RESET RUN from OFF to discrete parameter Ready and ON resets an Ended Hold or Ready profiler to the amp profiler is in goes to starting value of segment 1 Ready or Hold or Segment End 1 Hold or Ready program to the starting value of amp profiler is in goes to segment 1 and to the profiles Ready state On a Ready or Hold or Segment trans
42. it is referred to as a ramp The term soak is used to describe a segment when the process value is made to stay constant In Figure 3 23 segments 1 3 and 5 are ramps while segments 2 and 4 are soaks PROCESS VALUE IN ENGINEERING UNITS Figure 3 23 Example Set Point Profile To force a process value to vary linearly with time at various rates within successive time intervals is the job of a set point profiler another class of function blocks available within the instrument Be advised that use of set point profilers is typically observed in thermal or heat treat applications For example being able to vary temperature in accordance with a set point profile is vital in the tempering of metal or ceramic parts Refer to the application of Figure 3 11 discussed at the beginning of this section This application dealt with controlling a furnace zone s temperature by means of a 4 to 20 mA gas valve actuator If the furnace zone temperature were to be manipulated so that it followed the ramps and soaks of a set point profile the first step would be to implement the function block diagram established in Figure 3 16In general the control configuration that holds a process value to a local set point must be programmed and on line before allowing the process value to be characterized by a profile With regard to the application at hand a set point profiler function block programmed with a user defined set point profile may be brought into the
43. less than Period Channel Does Not Exist A channel was loaded that does not exist Verify programming of affected For example you loaded a dual loop function block configuration into a single loop instrument Circuit Limits Equal Indirect circuit low circuit high limits must be Change to unequal limits unequal Condition Type Out of Range Condition Type Compare Logic Free form Verify programming of affected Logic is out of range Probably caused by function block someone incorrectly editing the configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file Desired FO Value Not In the F Sterilization CV desired F is not Change F value to greater than zero Programmed or Less Than Zero programmed or is less than zero High Limit Outside of circuit Al circuit high limit is gt voltage limit of 5200 Change limit to within specified limits mV for that type High Output Limit Greater than A current output CAT high output limit Decrease high limit 20 cannot be greater than 20 Hysteresis Less Than Zero Alarm Hysteresis parameter should be Increase Hysteresis greater than or equal to zero Impulse Time less than or Equal Impulse time on a time Increase impulse time to 0 proportioning duration adjusting output DAT cannot be less than or equal to zero Incompatible Curve Type Al is custom type thermocouple class Reprogram curve so that for all n Y reference junction enabled but Y values gt Y or Y Y not always incr
44. menus and displays Table 3 1 describes each panel button and its functions Table 3 1 Button Functions Operating mode in which function applies ewes Video Recorder User Manual 41 Accesses Online Mode Menu from online primary display Backs cursor out of a menu to next higher menu level Use when finished looking at or changing menu items If changes were made and you are prompted to PRESS ENTER TO SAVE press to exit menu without saving changes A Z 0 9 period hyphen slash plus asterisk blank In loop display increases loop s setpoint value loop must be in Auto mode In loop display increases loop s output loop must be in Manual mode Scrolls a trend forward in time Up Arrow Moves cursor up a menu or list of Previous choices Immediately after selecting a menu item to change repeatedly scrolls through NONE or OFF PARM parameters 0 9 of most significant digit of a number minus sign Once you move the cursor off a number s most significant digit then only 0 9 are choices You can change a number to a parameter NONE or OFF only while the cursor is initially on the most significant digit When selecting most significant digit of a number scrolls through 0 9 minus sign and OFF or NONE if available For other digits scrolls through 0 9 When entering a label such as a DESCRIPTOR or TAG scrolls through Programming and
45. show a value of 1 when ON and 0 when OFF NORM TIME BASE 5 15 or 30 minutes or 1 2 Enter the trend display time base for Normal typically slow 4 8 24 hours 7 days or speed The time base is the time period shown for one full 31 days Equivalent paper Screen chart speeds are listed in Table 4 56 ALT TIME BASE 5 15 or 30 minutes or 1 2 Enter the trend display time base for Alternate typically fast 4 8 24 hours 7 days or 31 speed The time base is the time period shown for one full days Equivalent paper Screen chart speeds are listed in Table 4 56 SET DISPLAY OFF or number Set the high and low full scale display limits for each point If LIMITS you select OFF for a limit on this display the limits programmed for the analog point either RANGE LOW and RANGE HIGH or OUT LOW LIMIT and OUT HIGH LIMIT will be used as the trend limits for that point The accuracy of a trended point is determined only by the original output limits of the point not by setting wider or narrower limits here Setting excessively narrower limits here will result in a viewable trend with a high degree of inaccuracy when viewed as a of the screen To increase accuracy over a narrower range decrease the programmed output range limits of the point itself TIMEBASE OFF discrete parameter 0 Enter a discrete parameter which will cause trend to display SELECTOR 1 alternate timebase when ON and normal timebase when OFF 152 Video Rec
46. 01 60 19 80 00 From other countries 33 1 60 19 80 00 GERMANY HONEYWELL AG Kaiserleistrasse 39 D 63067 OFFENBACH GERMANY Tel 49 69 80 64444 HUNGARY HONEYWELL Kft Gogol u 13 H 1133 BUDAPEST HUNGARY Tel 36 1 451 43 00 ICELAND HONEYWELL Hataekni hf Armuli 26 PO Box 8336 128 reykjavik Iceland Tel 354 588 5000 ITALY HONEYWELL S p A Via P Gobetti 2 b 20063 Cernusco Sul Naviglio ITALY Tel 39 02 92146 1 MEXICO HONEYWELL S A DE CV AV CONSTITUYENTES 900 COL LOMAS ALTAS 11950 MEXICO CITY MEXICO Tel 52 5 259 1966 THE NETHERLANDS HONEYWELL BV Laaderhoogtweg 18 1101 EA AMSTERDAM ZO THE NETHERLANDS Tel 31 20 56 56 911 NORWAY HONEYWELL A S Askerveien 61 PO Box 263 N 1371 ASKER NORWAY Tel 47 66 76 20 00 POLAND HONEYWELL Sp z 0 0 UI Domainewksa 41 02 672 WARSAW POLAND Tel 48 22 606 09 00 PORTUGAL HONEYWELL PORTUGAL LDA Edificio Suecia II Av do Forte nr 3 Piso 3 2795 CARNAXIDE PORTUGAL Tel 351 1 424 50 00 REPUBLIC OF IRELAND HONEYWELL Unit 1 Robinhood Business Park Robinhood Road DUBLIN 22 Republic of Ireland Tel 353 1 4565944 REPUBLIC OF SINGAPORE HONEYWELL PTE LTD BLOCK 750E CHAI CHEE ROAD 06 01 CHAI CHEE IND PARK 1646 SINGAPORE REP OF SINGAPORE Tel 65 2490 100 REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA HONEYWELL Southern Africa PO BOX 138 Milnerton 7435 REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA Tel 27 11 805 12 01 ROMANIA HONEYWEL
47. 1 S Outputs logic of inputs 11 INVERTER S Inverts status ofinput_ 2o BOD S BinayCodedDecimalconversion 121 FUNCTION A Generates custom y f x curve 123 GENERATOR INTERVAL TIMER PERIODIC TIMER MASS FLOW CARBON POTENTIAL RELATIVE HUMIDITY STERILIZATION Counts time in minutes 125 Generates periodic pulse 126 Calculates mass flow with square root 128 Generates a value 129 wo Calculates relative humidity A A 132 ADV SPLITTER 133 STD SPLITTER 135 SCALING 136 SIGNAL CLAMP 137 1 PT BLOCK AVG 138 ROLLING AVG 139 MULTIPLE AVG CEM BLOCK AVG CEM ROLLING AVG Computes rolling average of one input over specified intervals 142 S Standard Math package A Advanced Math package ABER 10 Refer to the page shown for the desired CV programming procedures Press Enter when the PRESS ENTER TO SAVE prompt appears to save your entries made during the session 106 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Peak Picking This type monitors the input and determines a peak value reached during the specified time interval in minutes The peak can be chosen to be a maximum minimum average or standard deviation At the end of the time interval the output CVn OV steps to the value of the peak and holds this value until the end of the next time interval If the Reset Input turns ON 1 the output is held and the time interval restarts
48. 10 Mains Frequency Select either 50 Hz or 60 Hz Afterward you must select RESET UNIT to activate this change 248 Video Recorder User Manual Maintenance 8 11 Warm Start Time The instrument will start up in one of three modes based on the length of time power is off First Time Start First time start occurs when the unit is being powered up for the first time or when the memory clear services maintenance routing is executed All configuration and calibration is cleared and all parameters are set to factory defaults See DATABASE SERVICES Section 8 7 Cold Start Cold start occurs when the unit is without power for a period longer than 90 minutes or if the reset unit maintenance routine is executed See Section 8 8 Reset Unit In cold start operation all RAM buffers storage and display are cleared and accumulated values of some function blocks Calculated Value timers totalizers and control loop integral are reset to initial values The cold start operation retains the loop operating status of auto or manual and setpoint 1 or setpoint 2 The loop output will be set to zero 0 unless configured to use a Failsafe value for the analog output No Data collected and stored to floppy disk before the onset of cold Start is lost Data storage is automatically resumed after a Cold Start a maximum of 1 minute of buffered data will be lost due to a Cold Start If a new disk was inserted into the floppy drive while power was off you
49. 2 3 4 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 Hours 1 ROLLOVER ON OFF Select ON to continue gathering and storing data after the file becomes full The new data will replace the oldest data on the disk as it is collected No warning will be given Select OFF to stop storage of this data type when the disk space for it becomes full A DISK FULL message will then appear Data is buffered until a new disk is inserted and initialized SET DISPLAY OFF or number Enter upper and lower limit values for the trend display for LIMITS each point If OFF then the trend will use the programmed limits for each point HIGH RATE SELECTOR This discrete triggers the high storage rate when ON 1 and SELECTORS the low storage rate when OFF CHANGE WITH KEY This option enables disables storage rate changes from the Trend display Point Trend menu If YES storage Trend s high rate will be used when display Trend s alternate timebase is selected from the Online Point Trend menu Storage Trend s low rate will be used when display Trend s normal timebase is selected See Table 6 2 Point Detail Menu Prompts Timebase EXTERNAL OFF discrete parameter 0 1 When ON 1 this discrete parameter will allow storage of ENABLE the data type when off storage for the data type will stop This enable is independent of the storage mode it does not control batch start stop SELECT CYCLE DRYER Select a file name to identify the type of data to be stored FILENAME RECORD TAN
50. 250 V AC DC OMGIVELSER Instrumentet m ikke opereres i naerheten av lettantennelige veesker eller gasser Bruk av elektriske instrumenter i slike omgivelser utgj r en sikkerhetsrisiko Temperatur Omgivelse 5 til 40 C Lagring 20 til 60 C Fuktighet 10 til 90 HR ingen kondensering 40 C Vibrasjon 10 til 40 Hz amplitude 0 07 mm 40 til 60 Hz akselerasjon 0 2 g UTSTYRSINSTALLASJON Pass pa a montere panelene pa regulatoren slik at bergring av terminalene pa baksiden forhindres 272 Video Recorder User Manual Safety INSTRUGOES DE SEGURANCA PO21 6063 Para reduzir o risco de choque el ctrico que pode causar danos corporais seguir todas as normas de seguran a contidas nesta documenta o Este s mbolo avisa o utilizador sobre um eventual perigo de choque quando s o acess veis voltagens sob tens o perigosas Terminal de protec o de terra Fornecido para liga o do condutor do sistema da protec o de terra OAS e Se este equipamento for usado de modo n o especificado pelo fabricante a protec o fornecida pelo equipamento pode n o ser adequada e se deve substituir qualquer componente pe a que n o seja explicitamente especificado como substitu vel pelo nosso revendedor e Toda a cablagem deve estar de acordo com os c digos el ctricos locais e deve ser realizada por pessoal experiente devidamente autorizado e Oterminal de terra deve ser ligado antes de ser feita qualquer ou
51. 3 Emor Messages ui rein heic IEEE rond Ed emt e i Per e rer ide 255 10 Volpe 259 mer X 263 SAPE VY fete 265 pco m 277 SALES AND SERVICE Video Recorder User Manual vii TABLES Table 1 1 Specifications no sho Ree PIQUE de E E Read 2 Table 1 2 Analog Input Accuracy Linear types 2 2 nennen rennen tenen nns 7 Table 1 3 Analog Input Non linear types enne innen 8 Table 4 4 Standards one eee eut eee oe a ai 9 Table 2 1 Universal Analog Input Board Specifications sess 22 Table 3 1 Button Eunctions iet RR OR tete ete arise er re Ree 41 Table 3 2 QWERTY Key Equivalents essere nennen nennen trennen reete enne RE e EKERSEN 45 Table 3 3 Function Block Types eee ide eter teet He tet eter pner robert rN ESTEE 50 Table 3 4 Function Block Parameter Designators eese nennen eene enne enne 53 Table 3 5 Output Code Connection Procedure esesseeeeeeeeeeeeee 55 Table 3 6 Example Number Selection Procedure Using Front Panel Buttons see 57 Table 3 7 Example Programming Discrete Input Parameter with a Number see 57 Table 3 8
52. CALIBRATE REFERENCE JUNCTIONS for calibrating the two Cold Junction CJ references on Al module COPY ANALOG INPUT CALIBRATION for copying calibration values from one module channel to another RESET ANALOG INPUT CALIBRATION to restore Al module channels to their factory calibration RESET REF FUNCTION CALIBRATION to restore CJ reference to their factory calibration values 8 5 AO MODULE calibration Two calibration selections are accessible under the CALIBRATE AO menu selection CALIBRATE AO CHANNEL to calibrate the zero offset and span values of the AO module channels to user defined values RESTORE AO FACTORY CAL to restore factory calibrated to an AO module channel The AO module contains a wire jumper labeled ST1 on the PWA Cutting this jumper will prevent any changes to initial calibration values of the module and prevent any further field calibration See Figure 8 1 for the location of the jumper Wire Jumper ST1 Analog Output Module Figure 8 1 AO Module Jumper ST1 Calibrate Analog Outputs 246 For CAT calibration a precision milliammeter or a precision resistor and voltmeter is required Video Recorder User Manual Maintenance Disconnect power to all terminals before connecting or disconnecting calibration leads Hazardous voltage is present on the mains terminals and may be present on other terminals More than one switch may
53. Counter Prompts RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s trend display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGEHIGH HIGH OFF discrete parameter 0 When Resetis level high output state OS is ON and the 1 counter resets to zero if counting up or the Preset value if counting down from it When Reset is level low counter resumes counting PRESET OFF analog parameter The number of input transitions after which the CVn OS number output will go ON 1 To count forever set to OFF If OFF CVn OS will not be triggered COUNT DOWN YES or NO Select NO to count up from zero to the Preset value YES to count down from the Preset value to zero If Preset is OFF Count Down must be NO Video Recorder User Manual 113 Programming Function Blocks and Features Math Performs math on up to 8 inputs using a single operator Output is CVn OV Division by 0 is indicated by CVn OV s displayed value flashing 0 Table 4 22 describes the Math prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 22 Math Prompts INPUTA INPUTH OFF analog parameter Enter up to 8 input sources number If connecting to an upstream loop that loop output LP OV MUST be INPUT A see Feedback OUTPUT LOW LIMIT Enter limits Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT HIGH LIMIT these limits are exceeded EGET ADD SUBT MULT DIV 1 Input A OPERATOR Input B OPERATO
54. DATA STORAGE All aspects of preparing a DOS formatted disk to accept process and diagnostic data information are managed through this menu s selections Process and diagnostic data may be stored on the same disk but not along with other storage types i e configuration setpoint programs or calibration The four types of process data are Trends Data comprising the classic horizontal or vertically oriented time varying traces that represent process parameters Unit Data Process parameter information collected and displayed in tabular or datalog format Alarms A record of any alarms that activated while the instrument was monitoring and or controlling your process Events A record of any discrete events that might have occurred while the instrument was monitoring and or controlling your process Discrete events may occur for example in the instrument s execution of a set point profile When the instrument is On line and performing Data Storage a separate and distinct disk file will be established for each process data type along with a file for diagnostic errors Each file will be distinguished by a file extension as indicated in Table 3 11 Table 3 11 Data Storage File Extensions Data Type Unit Data Alarm History Discrete Event LND You can specify which process data types are written to disk and whether or not diagnostic errors are stored by setting up data storage schedules accessible under a prompt entitled SET U
55. Destination IMPORTANT Always be certain that the destination is compatible with its associated loop or analog output A mismatched destination can affect your output and can be difficult to diagnose Examples If destination is AO1 IT impulse time be sure that AO1 is programmed as a DAT If destination is LP2 IS be sure that Loop 2 is a type that has increased slew limit on its menu ATTENTION f the destination is used the parameter being overridden by the destination cannot be accessed or changed For example Loop Gain cannot be tuned Online in the TUNE LOOP menu f you reprogram destination to another parameter or NONE the original destination parameter maintains its last live value as determined by the constant s value If you want the destination s last live value to be zero or NONE 1 change the constant value to zero or NONE 2 change to Online mode for 5 seconds to override the previous live value with zero or NONE 3 change back to program mode 4 re program constant s destination to NONE f you program multiple constants with the same destination only the highest numbered constant s destination takes effect For example if Constant 1 and Constant 5 both have destination AO2 IT then only Constant 5 s value is used by AO2 IT 148 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 17 Copy Block Use Copy Block to copy the setup of any function block to another chann
56. ERR 81 4 4 Frequently used programming prompts nnne 82 4 5 Set Mode eec eee deett degraded ae eate dee ee pda 83 Video Recorder User Manual 4 vi HOW TO PROGRAM FUNCTION BLOCKS AND FEATURES CONT 4 6 Enter Labels ie e aede iie e 84 4 7 Program Analog Inputs nnne 87 4 8 Program Control ede E de 90 4 9 Program Analog Outputs iiia aeea 101 4 10 Program Discrete Inputs E ANAE E EA EEE EATS 104 4 11 Program Discrete Outputs sse ener en nennen trennt 105 4 12 Program Calculated Values sss enne ennt nennen 105 4 13 Program Alarms teneat nte ec n teet AE ETE EEE 143 4 14 Program Totalizers teh cette ite iet tee epa beide oe get etat get 144 4 15 Program Profiles acne cemetery deer coke eo ce ve 146 4 16 Program COonstants v ede pectet dee Eau pe eve t vas pei vo ge e usce eed dene o 147 AA BIOCK etre bastante tesi tum iet horae 149 4 18 ProgramDIsplays rte etie th bed ni bee e AEA 150 4 19 Eri ble Features i iie io ne ieget fa ep cete ede eet a iad 159 4 20 Program Security tct oett Gi nin endi et tiii eint etaed 160 4 24 Serial CommiuniCations iocari era tee ee tea at ettet
57. Kelvin R for thermocouple pyrometer and RTD input Rankine or NONE types The default setting is F If you change the default be sure to change the analog inputs RANGE LOW and RANGE HIGH values accordingly The instrument will not adjust these values by itself Ignore the TEMPERATURE UNIT prompt or set it to NONE if the analog input being programmed will not be used for temperature measurements DIRECT INDIRECT Select DIRECT for thermocouple Note that the term direct generally applies to pyrometer or RTD inputs Select INDIR input types where the sensors in direct Indirect for volt or millivolt signal inputs physical contact with the monitored process from linear or non linear transmitters are also in direct physical contact with the Select SQRT Square Root for extracting instrument terminal board The term indirect flow measurements from a voltage input applies to inputs from transmitters since the representing differential pressure sensors in direct physical contact with the measurements If SQRT is chosen the monitored process are indirectly connected to RANGE LOW and RANGE HIGH must be the instrument through the transmitter circuitry adjusted to specify the upper and lower and wiring limits of the flow units span CIRCUIT LOW OFF or number Appears only if INDIR or SQRT was previously selected Is the actual low end value of voltage to be used for Indirect measurements CIRCUIT HIGH OFF or number Appears on
58. NOT CURRENT setup CURRENT you must initialize the disk using new schedules Set up Trend Data 1 as described in Table 4 72 Video Recorder User Manual 167 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 72 Prompts For Storage Setup Of Trends Alarms Events Diagnostics _ Prompt Range Selections POINT 1 Analog or discrete parameter Select the data points for the trend POINT 12 STORAGE MODE CONTIN BATCH or NONE Continuous storage becomes active immediately upon initialization Batch storage is controlled by a discrete parameter see BATCH CONTROL or by start stop batch menu item Batch data may be started and stopped several times in a single file until the file is full Batch start increments a batch number that is stored along with the data The batch number may be used for data retrieval and analysis using SDA data analysis software COPY DISPLAY Select this to copy the following Trend 1 2 3 or 4 Display SETUP data to Trend 1 2 3 or 4 Storage data Point 1 12 set display limits timebase high rate selector Once setup is copied it can be altered LOW RATE Seconds 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Enter data collection rate This is how often the data points 9 10 20 30 40 50 are sampled Minutes 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 Hours 1 HIGH RATE Seconds 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Enter data collection rate This is how often the data points 9 10 20 30 40 50 are sampled Minutes 1
59. None Universal Analog Inputs Digital Inputs contact closure Digital Inputs 24 Vdc Digital Inputs 120 240 Vac Relays Outputs Digital Outputs 24 Vdc open collector Digital Outputs 120 240 Vac triac Universal Analog Inputs Digital Inputs contact closure Digital Inputs 24 Vdc Digital Inputs 120 240 Vac Relays Outputs Digital Outputs 24 Vdc open collector Digital Outputs 120 240 Vac triac TABLE Ill FIRMWARE DATA STORAGE Control Loops 1 Control Loop Notes 1 5 2 Control Loops 4 Control Loops 6 Control Loops Set Point Programs 1 Set Point Program Note 4 2 Set Point Programs 3 Set Point Programs 4 Set Point Programs Math Standard Math Note 2 Advance Math Advance Math and 4 Totalizers Advance Math and 48 Totalizers Communication RS485 Modbus RTU Ethernet Interface TABLE V OPTIONS Documentation prompts language manual Certificates Certificate of Conformance Certificate Note 3 Calibration and Conformance Certificates Video Recorder User Manual 11 Introduction Model Selection Guide cont VRX180 TABLE V OPTIONS continued Selection CSA NRTLC CE Mark Software None SDA and SCF SCF Configuration Software SDA Data Analysis Software Case Galvanized Case Grey Door Glass Window Latch Galvanized Case Grey Door Glass Window Key Lock Galvanized Case Grey Door Plastic Window Latch Galvanized Case Grey Door Plastic Window Key Lock Po
60. Operating Concepts Table 3 1 Button functions continued Symbol Operating mode in whicl function applies Progra Down Moves cursor down list menu Y Arrow Next When selecting a number letter or decimal Y point position moves cursor one character to the right then wraps around to leftmost character In loop display decreases loop s setpoint value In loop display decreases loop s output loop Y must be in Manual mode Scrolls a trend backward in time P v v v v Left Arrow Numeric entry moves one digit to left Text entry moves one character to right Enter Selects displayed menu item and either Y displays its submenu or moves cursor to the right for data entry Enters a changed value or parameter Y If prompted to SAVE CHANGES saves 4 changes made and returns to higher menu Tab When trend or panel display is on accesses Trend menu or panel display menu to adjust the appearance of the display When either above menu is shown advances display to next live point When Setpoint Profile Trend display is shown accesses a menu for viewing and controlling operation of the profile On Loop displays tabs cursor to next loop data field for adjustment Display From any display or menu pressing this button changes the instrument to online mode and accesses the display programmed as Display 4 Repeated presses accesses displays 5 through 10 then wr
61. Rated limits Influence on accuracy associated drifts Temperature 0 to 50 C 32 to 120 F 0 15 per 10 C of change See Note A Cold junction 0 3 C 10 C Source resistance 6 uV per 400 Ohms of line resistance max 1000 Ohms 0 1 C per Ohm in each wire balanced leads 40 Ohms max from 0 to 400 C Humidity 10 to 90 RH at 25 C 0 1 max Long term stability 0 1 per year Table 1 2 Analog Input Accuracy Linear types Mivots Vets Cure Ohms 0 to 10 mV 0 to 200 10 10 mV 0 to 2000 0 to 20 mV 20 0 20 mV 0 50 mV 50 0 50 mV 10 to 50 mV 0 to 100 mV 100 0 100 mV 10 0 10 V 0 to 500 mV 500 0 500 mV NOTE The mA inputs must be connected to a 250 ohms resistor across the input terminals Video Recorder User Manual 7 Introduction Table 1 3 Analog Input Non linear types Thermocouples ITS 90 except where noted Operating span Accuracy 1 Range Reference range 2 EN MEDIE E EG 18 to 1199 F O to 2190 18 to 1199 O to 2372 1 18 to 130 086 O03 752 to 3300 18 to 08 18 to _09 18 73 to 0 1 3 3 400 to 1816 0 to 3210 1766 W5 W26 3 0 to 4200 to 2316 09 PLAT II 3 100 to 2500 131 01 04 NI NIMO 32 2502 0 to 132 01 04 02 CEA RTD 4 PT100 IEC ELA to 854 0 5 Pyrometry Rayotube amp Spectray Types _Maxvalue Minvalue EJ EG END
62. Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 30 Inverter Prompts OFF discrete parameter O 1 Input source to be inverted 120 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features BCD Converts up to 8 discrete inputs binary coded decimal into an unsigned integer and output the integer as CVn OV For example 00000100 4 On the instrument when the enable is triggered the set point program specified by the value of CVn OV is copied from internal storage to the Profile function block s where the profile s can be programmed or executed Table 4 31 describes the BCD prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 31 BCD Prompts OUT LOW LIMIT OFF or number Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when these limits are exceeded OUTHIGHLIMIT HIGH LIMIT OFF discrete parameter 0 The binary coded decimal represented by the states of these 1 discretes will be converted into an unsigned integer BIT 7 is the most significant bit and BIT 0 is the least significant bit ENABLE OFF discrete parameter 0 On the instrument when this discrete transitions from off 0 1 to on 1 the specified program s profile s will be loaded from internal memory to the Profile function block s See Table 4 32 Example 1 loading a 2 profile program You are programming a 2 programmer instrument According to Table 4 32 a 2 programmer instrument can run 2 profiles at a time and can store in its
63. The ramp segment s VALUE prompt is not used 180 Video Recorder User Manual Setpoint Profiler Ramp Type External Features of this ramp type First and last segments must be soaks No consecutive ramps or soaks Ramp segments Time amount profile will change toward next soak Value when the Ramp Increment discrete switches on Value not used with ramp segment Soak segments Time duration of soak Segment 3 Value Segment 42 Time Segment 42 Time Segment 1 Segment 2 Time Value Segment 1 Segment 3 Time Time lag M Ramp Increment Off to On Segment 2 causes increme ntal value Flapsed time change toward next soak Value Figure 5 6 External Ramp Type ATTENTION e External ramp type s TIME prompt is in engineering units of the PV not in time units seconds minutes or hours e Toincrement toward a lower soak value enter a positive TIME amount The Setpoint Profiler knows to increment or decrement this amount toward the next soak value Video Recorder User Manual 181 Setpoint Profiler Soak segment All soak segments have a beginning VALUE and a TIME during which that value is maintained This is true regardless of the ramp type used Guaranteed Soak Guaranteed soak will Hold the profile value if either PV to the profile typically a Control Loop s PV deviates specified amounts above or below the profiler output See Figure 5 7 For a
64. Up Arrow or Down Arrow until LP is displayed From Table 3 4 we know LP is the designator for the Control Loop function block type Press Enter to select LP Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until 2 the Control Loop number we want is displayed Press Enter to select 2 Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until OV is displayed From Table 3 4 we know OV is the output code for the Control Loop s output value 2 Press Enter to select OV The cursor moves to the left and the connection from LP2 OV to Analog Output 1 s INPUT SOURCE has been made Video Recorder User Manual 55 Programming and Operating Concepts LP OV 2 character output code Type of Choices depend on type of function block function block Commonly used choices Choices Al Analog Input AL Alarm AO Analog Output CV Calculated Value CN Constant DI Discrete Input DO Discrete Output LP Loop control SP Setpoint Profiler SY System TL Totalizer See Table 3 4 for all choices Channel number of function block Choices vary depending on type of function block Figure 3 9 Function Block Connection Format Before programming a function block s input parameter with a CV s Calculated Value output code you must program the CV first Otherwise the CV s output parameter will not be available for programming The function block SY System Parameter operates intern
65. Vac 60 Hz 0 1 mA 40 1 2 mA 100 Vac 60 Hz 0 9 mA 100 Vac 50 Hz Maximum Inrush Current 10A for 10 ms 1A for 10 ms Minimum Load 0 5 mA Base Power required 20 mA ON pt 250 mA 120 mA maximum maximum OFF to ON Response 1 ms ON to OFF Response 1 ms 1 2 cycle 1ms Fuses European type 5 x 1 per output 1 0A slow blow 1 per output 20mm 1A fast blow Relay Alarm Outputs Number 6 per module up to 6 modules per video recorder Only 1 5 on each module can be configured as DAT outputs Contact Rating 2A 250 Vac on resistive load Isolation from ground 2300 Vac 1 min Isolation between outputs 2300 Vac 1 min Contact Type SPST normally open NO individually configurable to normally closed NC via jumper Operating Voltage pore Base Power Required is the power required to provided module operation within specifications Video Recorder User Manual 5 Introduction Table 1 1 Specifications continued Time Proportional Outputs TPO on digital output Time Resolution Equals the Scan Cycle time of the recorder Module Only Digital outputs 1 to 5 can be configured as DAT outputs Synchronization Individual TPOs are not synchronized with others Performance Capacities Math Calculations Standard Math package includes 24 Calculated Values along with the following Math functions Free Form Math Math Operators x Absolute Value Square Root Std Deviation Free Form Logic Logic Operators
66. and AO2 with usable input driving signals LP1 s output will be applied to a function called a standard splitter STD SPLITTER Made from one of the instrument s calculated value function blocks CV s the standard splitter will essentially be a mechanism that translates the 96 values of the split output control loop into two distinct O to 10096 signals They will be applied to the inputs of AO1 and AO2 and as such will drive and linearly correspond with AO1 and 2 4 to 20 mA outputs CV1 BC AO1BC 4 TO 20 mA INPUT TYPE PT100 4 TO 20 mA TYPE SPLIT 100 100 AO2 BC CV1A2 CV1 A1 0 ro 100 0 100 LP1 OV Figure 3 20 Function Block Diagram Of Figure 3 19 The two outputs on CV1 that will drive AO1 and AO2 are respectively labeled CV1 A1 and CV1 A2 CV1 s basic operation is described by a plot of these outputs versus LP1 OV Shown in the lower left of Figure 3 20 the plot demonstrates that CV1 will produce a 0 to 10096 value at its CV1 A1 output when LP1 calls for an output level between 0 and 100 CV1 A2 will remain at 0 When applied to AO1 the CV1 A1 value will activate the 4 to 20 mA signal needed at the hot water valve actuator to make the water temperature in the vessel rise Similarly when LP1 calls for an output level between 0 and 100 CV1 will produce a corresponding 0 to 100 value at CV1 A2 This time CV1 A1 will remain at 0 and the CV1 A2 value generated will induce th
67. and RS422 Use a shielded cable for RS232 4 Connect the shield wire to the ground at one end only preferably at the video recorder Use for example a wiring cable type Belden 9271 twinax or equivalent 5 We recommend to install a 120 ohms resistor between TXA and TXB on the last video recorder on communication link 6 The maximum capabilities are Type of communication Distances max of Unit RS232 15 meters 50 feet 1 RS422 1000 meters 3280 feet 15 RS485 1200 meters 4000 feet 31 Video Recorder User Manual 33 Installation 34 Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts 3 Programming and Operating Concepts and Procedures 3 1 Overview This section explains the instrument s programming and operating concepts and procedures Read and understand this section before attempting to program and operate your instrument 3 2 Quick Start Programming Use this section to quickly start up your instrument This section contains the basic concepts you should know for configuring the instrument For more details on specific topics you should refer to section 4 and 5 of this manual Ee s To program analog inputs Section 4 7 Program Analog Inputs To program control if your Section 3 14 How to program common configurations 4 application has control Section 4 8 Program Control Loops Section 5 Setpoint Profiler if your instrument has a setpoint profiler Section 4 9 Program Analog Outputs 4 To
68. any of the analog inputs control loops and analog outputs that your instrument has to the blocks comprising the function block diagram drawn For simplicity Al1 LP1 and AO1 will be used in this example Refer to Figure 3 13 Note that Al5 LP2 and AO2 could just as easily have been used Video Recorder User Manual 61 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 Label output parameters The second part in labeling each function block is to denote the blocks major input and output parameters Each of these parameters will correspond to actual menu settings that you program on the instrument As shown in Figure 3 13 the Al1 function block s input parameter will be the actual Type J thermocouple run from the furnace to the instrument s AI1 input terminals The Al1 block will process the thermocouple s millivolt signal to generate a temperature measurement Al s output value denoted 11 OV will essentially be the furnace zone temperature The LP1 function block is shown for now with one input denoted by PV Here the control loop block will expect to find the data comprising its process variable The LP1 block s single output is the loop s main control output Denoted LP1 OV Loop 1 s Output Value it will range between 0 and 100 The value of LP1 OV at any given instant will be determined by the control loop function block s PID algorithm The last block in the diagram is the analog output function block AO1 Drawn at thi
69. at AO1 s apex and named DO1 Recall that any analog input control loop analog output or discrete output available may be used Up to 36 discrete outputs DO1 through DO36 are potentially available depending on the instrument s model number Video Recorder User Manual 65 Programming and Operating Concepts From Figure 3 18 the instrument s AI1 function block will essentially process the 4 to 20 mA transmitter signal to generate a pH measurement This measurement will be 11 OV which in turn will be applied to LP1 s process variable input PV Before the 4 to 20 mA signal is applied to AI1 it will be converted to a 1 to 5 VDC signal with a 250 Q shunt resistor Al1 will be configured to generate a pH measurement in a range from 0 RANGE LOW 0 to 14 RANGE HIGH 14 in response to a voltage input between 1 CKT LOW 1 and 5 CKT HIGH 5 VDC The PID algorithm of the control loop function block will adjust the value assumed by LP1 OV between 0 and 100 This 0 to 100 signal will be applied to AO1 which will be configured as a DAT type analog output The internal parameter of IMPULSE TIME in AO1 is the DAT analog output s cycle time or period With a specified impulse time of 150 seconds an arbitrarily picked value the DAT output will be ON for 75 seconds and OFF for 75 seconds when the input from LP1 is set to 50 The ON and OFF times will be determined completely by the 96 output levels called for by LP1 Finally to
70. block Some function blocks namely Analog Input Analog Output Discrete Input and Discrete Output interface with the hardware that is they are the link between the instrument and the input or output hardware The Analog Input and Discrete Input function blocks convert the incoming process data like the process variable or any discrete on off signals from a switch into information usable by the instrument This incoming information is processed according to the entire function block configuration in the instrument and it is ultimately passed on to the output function blocks The Analog Output and Discrete Output function blocks convert this output information into a voltage or current which is fed to the corresponding output hardware like a current output or relay Other function blocks are not directly seen by the hardware they are purely software They can be thought of as the middle of the process described in the previous paragraph For example a Standard Splitter Calculated Value can split a control loop s output into 2 values one for heating and one for cooling These 2 values can be passed on to the Analog Output function block which ultimately controls the amount of output current or voltage Flow of information The flow of information from the input hardware to the input function blocks to the function block configuration to the output function blocks to the output hardware can be likened to a river flowing from
71. configuration once the furnace zone s basic temperature control loop is operational Note that the output of the profiler function block will essentially be the set point profile From the cascade control strategy s explanation recall that all control loop function blocks within the instrument have a Setpoint 2 parameter that may be used as a remote set point input for connecting to the profiler s output LP1 in the function block diagram of Figure 3 16 will make use of SP2 s remote set point functionality so that a set point profiler s time varying set point may be applied to it Refer to Figure 3 24 Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts AO1 BC TYPE J THERMOCOUPLE 4 TO 20 mA INPUT TYPE J RANGE LOW 0 RANGE HIGH 1000 TYPE STANDARD OUTPUT TYPE CAT SP1 500 IN LOW LIMIT 0 SP2 SP1 OV IN HIGH LIMIT 100 Qu ped RATE 0 B Figure 3 24 Function Block Diagram Of Set Point Profile Control Of Figure 3 16 Figure 3 24 basically depicts all the components of the Figure 3 16 s control configuration with a set point profiler function block denoted by SP1 The profilers output SP1 OV is connected to the remote set point input of LP1 Depending on the model number of the instrument up to four set point profiler function blocks SP1 through SP4 may be included within the instrument s feature capacities Note that while the profiler of SP1 was specified in Figure 3 2
72. configure data storage Section 4 26 Data Storage To program other functions Remaining sections in Section 4 How To Program Function Blocks and Features 3 3 Modes of Operation 1 3 To configure displays Section 4 18 Program Displays 5 The instrument has three modes of operation Program Online and Maintenance Each mode has its own menus Most menu items provide access to sub level menus The SET MODE item switches the instrument from one mode to another Your instrument may have reduced menus if options are not present Program mode Program Mode is an off line mode for programming configuring the instrument In this mode all inputs and outputs are frozen If any of the five relays are assigned as DAT outputs the recorder will stop pulsing them when it is placed into Program Mode The outputs will remain frozen in their present state either On or Off Online Mode Online Mode enables full use of the instrument with its inputs outputs and internal programming In this mode it is fully interactive with all externally connected elements Maintenance Mode Maintenance Mode is an off line mode for maintaining proper and complete functioning of the instrument Functions include calibration off line diagnostic testing and various setups for operation In Maintenance Mode all inputs and outputs are frozen If any of the five relays are assigned as DAT outputs the recorder will stop pulsing them when it is placed into Maintenance M
73. display in the time units of the profile The higher this number the more of a profile will fit on the screen at a time A value of zero means the entire profile will be displayed if the profile has no infinite segment loops no infinite auto cycling and no external ramp type 156 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Assign Displays to Keys Your instrument has 4 display keys You can assign a total of 10 displays to these keys Pressing the Display 1 key CO accesses the format you assign to Display 1 Display 2 key C22 accesses Display 2 and Display 3 key C2 accesses Display 3 The Display key CO accesses displays 4 10 Table 4 64 describes the prompts for assigning displays to keys Table 4 64 Assign Displays To Keys Prompts BLANKING TIME OFF 1 HOUR 30 MIN 15 This is a screen saver type function If enabled the screen MIN 5 MIN 1MIN will blank after time selected Screen will unblank if a key is pressed or an alarm diagnostic occurs DISPLAY KEY 0 1 OFF PARM By selecting PARM you can connect a discrete input parameter which will function as the Display key Each off to on transition of this discrete will behave as if the Display key were pressed Select 0 1 or OFF to disable this function BACKGROUND WHITE BLACK This sets the background color of displays to black or white COLOR Affects all Trend live and replay Bar Graph and Panel displays Does not affect Loop Unit D
74. error messages 9 Diagnostic and error messages 9 1 Diagnostic Messages The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start up and during maintenance procedures such as calibration It also monitors online operation for both process faults and instrument errors Error messages Table 9 1shows messages that may appear on the instrument displays if a diagnostic condition is detected along with the action you should take Table 9 1 Diagnostic Error Messages Wege eraen INPUT FAILURE The analog input is either open shorted Check input devices for open or short The analog input has been exposed to See Section 2 for proper wiring electromagnetic noise techniques The analog input is out of range Choose a higher range FLOAT PT ERROR A floating point calculation error has occurred Check Free Form Math and Math CV divide by zero underflow overflow inputs for division by O Also check for input values producing an underflow or overflow error that is calculation is not between 1 10 and 3x10 or is not between 1 10 and 3x10 CHECKSUM An error was detected in the database of Inspect entire instrument configuration ERROR or more function blocks The affected and reconfigure as needed function blocks are reset to their defaults ATTENTION Be advised that the INPUT FAILURE diagnostic will continue to be displayed even after its cause has disappeared After verifying th
75. ettet ete rien talestivuee p E RET e pe 225 Table 7 5 Data Storage Replay Procedure essere nennen rennen nenne enne 226 Table 7 6 Alarm Acknowledgment 229 Table 7 7 Diagnostic Acknowledgment Procedure eese eene nennen een rennen 230 Table 7 8 Delete All Diagnostics Procedure sese nennen nennen nennen enne 231 Table 7 9 Tune Loop Prompts Ote itm pe qp etae ire ee ets 235 Table 7 10 Stages OLPretune suena eo Rete RU Udo enit oui tem te quiim lese e 238 Table 7 11 Pretune STOPPED Prompts entere Unete m d eqnidem d tatu 238 Table 7 12 Pretune IDENTIFYING amp CALCULATING Prompts eese eene 239 Table 7 13 Pretune COMPLETE Prompts itt reine 240 Table 7214 Pr tune Abort Messages eet emet sous e PER PRESE PUE steps obitig ree E cerned RETE 241 Table 8 1 Maintenance Mode Menu entere erii eee tree petere preter 243 Table 8 2 Calibrate Analog Output Procedure sese entren nennen enne 247 Table 8 3 Offline Diagnostic Prompts etre iterat ri pA E eei E egere eerte 247 Table 8 4 Database Services Prompts eet heir erri t erii rere 248 Table 9 1 Diagnostic Error Messages tee tie rente 251 Table 9 2 Internal Error Messages
76. externalize the ON and OFF output states of AO1 to the outside world the DO1 output relay represented by the DO1 function block will be programmed for AO1 s exclusive use Hence as AO1 switches between ON and OFF states in response to LP1 OV s output levels so too will the DO1 output relay to generate the pulses required to drive the caustic reagent pump Split Output or Duplex Control 66 Split output or duplex control loops are typically used in heat cool applications Temperature is controlled through simultaneous use of both heating and cooling elements If the instrument was to support a heat cool control configuration an example of the control scheme that might be dealt with is illustrated in Figure 3 19 INSTRUMENT PV 85 SP 95 OUT 73 5 VALVE 4TO20mA ACTUATOR HOT WATER VALVE 4 TO 20 mA CAT Law n 1000 PLATINUM RTD VALVE ACTUATOR COLD WATER Ww uA VALVE WATER TANK Figure 3 19 Temperature Control Of Water Using Split Output Or Duplex Control The instrument must be set up to produce two 4 to 20 mA control signals By applying them to current controlled valve actuators coupled to hot and cold water valves these signals will regulate the amount of hot and cold water introduced to the vessel to maintain the water temperature at whatever set point will be programmed The temper
77. in setpoint or output After these new tuning values have been calculated you have the option of applying installing or not applying them to a preselected tune set of the loop You can pretune a loop while another loop is pretuning To use pretune your process time constant must be at least 60 seconds The process time constant is defined as the time needed for the PV to change by 6396 of a step change in the setpoint For example if the setpoint changes instantaneously by 100 degrees the time constant is the amount of time needed for the PV to change 63 degrees To pretune a loop select PRETUNE from the TUNE LOOP online menu Select a loop to tune Pretune occurs in 4 stages as indicated by the status Each status has its own menu Table 7 1D shows the stages of pretune Table 7 10 Stages Of Pretune STOPPED Pretuning not operating waiting to be started by operator See STOPPED menu 2 IDENTIFYING Pretune is identifying process dynamics as a result of a setpoint or output change This process may take up to 4 to 6 process time constants See Table 7 12 3 CALCULATING Identification is complete and calculation of new tuning parameters is in process See Table 7 12 4 COMPLETE Calculations are complete and new parameters are ready to replace the loop s tuning parameters if desired See Table 7 13 NOTE While using Pretune it is recommended that Overshoot Suppression is turned off With overshoot suppression on Pretune may not work or may
78. input value If the number of inputs is even selects the sum of the middle two input values divided by 2 F GOOD First Good If inputs fail selects the first good input to the function block For example if inputs 1 and 2 fail then input 3 is selected ANA SW Analog Switch Selects an input equal to the value of the ANALOG SELECT parameter DIS SW Discrete Switch Selects Input 1 or 2 according to state of DISCRETE SELECT ANALOG SELECT OFF analog parameter number Example if ASEL 3 then Input 3 is selected If ANALOG SELECT 1 Input 1 is selected The value of ANALOG SELECT is truncated to a whole number For example if ANALOG SELECT is 3 55 the value is truncated to 3 and Input 3 is selected DISCRETE SELECT OFF discrete parameter 0 1 Selects Input 1 when DISCRETE SELECT is off 0 selects Input 2 when DISCRETE SELECT is ON 1 Inputs 3 48 are unused 108 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Compare Compare can be used instead of an Alarm s output to control a relay It can also provide on off control with hysteresis Compares 2 inputs Call the result of this comparison Result Result is a pulse that goes ON 1 when comparison is true and OFF 0 when comparison is not true If hysteresis is given a value then Result will not go OFF 0 until hysteresis value is exceeded Result is then processed according to the specified cond
79. o CONSTANT 30 CONSTANT 31 CONSTANT 32 2 CN3 CN30 CN31 CN32 SET UP TREND SET UP UNIT SET UP PROFI ASSIGN DISPLAYS DISPLAYS DATA DISPLA DISPLAYS TO KEYS EXPANDEH AI VALUE DIDO DISK INPUT PYROMETR ADJUST FORCING ALARMS CONSTANTS gt LABELING REPLAY zoom CUSTOM TIMEBASE POINT INPUT SELECT DETAIL SETPOINT REVIEW PROFILE PROGRAM e e ISET UP PANE gt DISPLAY REVIEW PROGRAMI ENABLE SECURITY MASTER OPERATOR SEC CODE SEC CODE AUTO MANUAL SP1 SP2 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS COPY BLOCK CLOCK LOAD STORE CONFIG SCANRATE SELECT LANGUAGE DATA STORAGE BAUD DOWNLOAD UNIT ADDRESS LOCKOUT BLOCK FROM TO COPY TYPE NUMBER NUMBER BLOCK DATE Hours MINUTES MONTH YEAR FORMAT STORE CONFIG LOAD CONFIG TO DISK FROM DISK Figure 3 4 PROGRAM mode MAIN MENU Video Recorder User Manual 39 Programming and Operating Concepts MAIN MENU MAINTENANCE SETMODE MAINTENANCE INPUTS CALIBRATION CALIBRATION REFERENCE JUNCTION CALIBRATION OFF LINE DIAGNOSTICS SOFTWARE RESET UNIT UPGRADE DATABASE SERVICES PRODUCT INFORMATION MAINS FREQUENCY WARM START TIME Figure 3 5 MAINTENANCE mode MAIN MENU 40 Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts 3 5 Button functions In all modes the instrument is operated by using the front panel buttons to view and select items from
80. of Discrete Input 1 on or off Al1 OV is the output value of Analog Input 1 a voltage or temperature Therefore a discrete input parameter must be programmed with only a discrete output code and an analog input parameter must be programmed with only an analog output code ATTENTION The function block SYSTEM PARAMETER abbreviated SY does not have input parameters or function block parameters like the other function blocks SY produces output codes only These output codes shown in Table 3 4 are mostly values or states that indicate the status of system wide parameters For example if any Alarm function block s output status is ON the SY function block s AG alarm global output code is also ON Another example is the SY F1 output code which produces a quick ON to OFF discrete signal when the F1 key is pressed This SY F1 can be used as a trigger to another action For example to allow an operator to start the Profile or reset the Totalizer by pressing the F1 key you can program a Setpoint Profile s Start parameter or a Totalizer s Reset parameter with SY F1 Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 4 Function Block Parameter Designators Functio Function Block Output Parameter Name Paramete Block code Type RT System Parameter Reference Junction Temp Analog Alarm Global Discrete Alarm High Discrete Alarm Low Discrete Diagnostic failure Discrete Diagnostic General Discrete Storage Full Dis
81. of the LP1 control loop Based on the values of the loop s tuning constants and on how far Al1 OV deviates from the 500 F set point the control loop function block s PID algorithm will accordingly adjust LP1 OV to whatever value will be necessary to maintain the process set point LP1 OV which ranges from 0 to 100 will in turn be applied to AO1 s input to drive the 4 to 20 mA control signal applied to the valve actuator By modulating the valve actuator s position this 4 to 20 mA signal will regulate the gas flow to the furnace zone burner and thereby allow the instrument to control the heat levels measured in the zone TYPE J THERMOCOUPLE 4 TO 20 mA INPUT TYPE J RANGE LOW 0 RANGE HIGH 1000 TYPE STANDARD OUTPUT TYPE CAT SP1 500 IN LOW LIMIT 0 SAN T A IN HIGH LIMIT 100 OUT LOW LIMIT 4 OUT HIGH LIMIT 20 Figure 3 15 Interconnections Between Function Blocks Video Recorder User Manual 63 Programming and Operating Concepts 6 Draw the Feedback connection 64 To fully complete the function block diagram one final and very important interconnection must be drawn In setting up control loops in this instrument a feedback path must be specified between the loop function block itself and the hardware element that externalizes the loop s output to the real world That is the control loop block needs confirmation from the analog output block connected to it that the percent output
82. or instrument if necessary Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective materials and faulty work manship Contact your local sales office of warranty information If warranted goods are returned to Honeywell during the period of coverage Honeywell will repair of replace without charge those items it finds defective The foregoing is Buyer s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Specifications may change without notice The information we supply is believed to be accurate and reliable as of printing However we assume no responsibility for its use While we provide application assistance personally through our literature and the Honeywell website it is up to the customer to determine the suitability of the product in the application Contacts If you encounter any problem with your video recorder please contact your nearest Sales Office See the address list at the end of this manual An engineer will discuss your problem with you Please have your complete model number serial number and software version available Model number and serial number are located on the chassis nameplate Software version can be viewed under Maintenance mode see Section 8 of this manual If itis determined that a hardware problem exists a replacement instrument or part will be shipped with instructions for returning the defec
83. output TEMPERATURE UNIT F Temperature scale for this block This selection must match the temperature scale of the analog input that is connected to the oxygen probe temperature output TEMP LOW LIMIT NUMBER OFF Probe temperature value below which this block s low temperature discrete output OS is turned ON This limit and subsequent discrete output may be used to force the control loop s output to a known value when the probe temperature is too low for carbon potential control CO COMPENSATION NUMBER PARM OFF Number used in the C calculation which represents the CO present in the endothermic gas FURNACE FACTOR NUMBER PARM OFF Correction factor used to account for environmental variation within the furnace chamber In units of C this factor is added directly to the value calculated from probe output linearization SOOTING FACTOR ON OFF Boolean value that determines whether the anti sooting factor output A1 will be based linearly on probe temperature SOOTING FACTOR ON or a constant value of 2 0 SOOTING FACTOR OFF If SOOTING FACTOR is ON a probe temperature of 1408 F or below limits C output to 0 75 and 2086 F or above limits C output to 2 0 PERCENTAGE NUMBER OFF Number representing 96H that is used in the dewpoint HYDROGEN calculation Video Recorder User Manual 129 Programming Function Blocks and Features O Probe Output LINEAR CARBON POTENTIAL CONTROL
84. output cards Programming of discrete output 6 is not allowed ATTENTION ON OFF loop types provide direct output without the use of an analog output To complete an ON OFF loop configuration assign the ON OFF loop s output LPn OS to a Discrete Output Relay see Program Discrete Outputs section 4 11 Video Recorder User Manual 103 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 10 Program Discrete Inputs Discrete Input function blocks are controlled by the on off status of the input hardware The output of the function block DIn OS reflects the status of the associated input hardware This output DIn OS can be connected to other function blocks input parameters to trigger actions such as starting a profile or selecting a control loop s Set point 1 or Set point 2 among many other possibilities The Program Discrete Input menu item will appear if a DI DO card is installed Select a discrete input to program then program the prompts in Table 4 14 See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 14 Discrete Input Prompts ACTION STATE NORMAL INVERT Determines whether the input will be normally closed or normally open when ON 1 To select closed when ON 1 enter NORMAL not inverted To select closed when OFF 0 enter INVERT inverted DELAY TIME Number of seconds When the DI is placed in its ON 1 state the DI function will wait for the specified delay time before indicating the ON 1 condition as an output If th
85. pressing the Display button if the Alarm Summary display was assigned to that button See Section 4 18 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button and a cursor will appear on the display Use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button to position the cursor on a flashing alarm and press Enter to acknowledge the alarm The flashing will stop and the cursor will disappear If you do not press any button for a period of 5 seconds the cursor will disappear This is a safety feature because while the cursor is visible on the display the display is temporarily disabled and a new alarm will not be shown If there are more flashing alarms press the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons to restore the cursor Display Alarm History The Alarm History display is a multi page display which lists information on cleared alarms The most recent 25 cleared alarms will be shown with the oldest being dropped from the list when a new alarm clears and is logged in The Alarm History includes the descriptor and tag identifiers of the alarm the type high low high rate etc the setpoint value at the time the alarm occurred and the date and times of the occurrence and clearing of the alarm designated as IN and OUT times respectively Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons to view the various pages of the display as desired Display Diagnostics A Diagnostic is a displayed error message that indicates a serious error or failure has occurred See Section 9 for diag
86. radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to radio and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30 meters to the antenna e In special cases when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity the user may have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic emissions of this equipment Video Recorder User Manual iii Video Recorder User Manual 1 Contents INTRODUCTION E 1 1 1 Video Recorder Overview sse 1 1 2 Specifications ii es Ie tet bereitet I ode ei Ete eaten nls 2 1 8 Model Selection 12 INSTALLAT O N 13 247 Warnings iaceat asa erase ue etes m uu et 13 2 2 Unpacking 5 scie ei deter eae der eee cid ederet uide ee evene ea 14 2 3 Panel mounting the video recorder ener 15 2 4 Wiring the video recorder 17 2 5 Terminal connectioris iat e pd imd ne a at 19 PROGRAMMING AND OPERATING CONCEPTS AND PROCEDURES 35 EE MEOS ARIES 35 3 2 QUICK Start Programmilig aces c etate Redde hens Pda page Pee ha n e PR REP Lg 35 3 82 Modes of OperatiOh cin ea ned ret eire ren Ea eie pre bd
87. test each display color red green blue white black Any failed display pixels should be apparent DISK READ WRITE TEST Select this to verify read write disk function Video Recorder User Manual 247 Maintenance 8 7 Database Services The following table describes the prompts Table 8 4 Database Services Prompts CLEAR ALL MEMORY Clears the Instrument memory of all programming tuning data setups etc and restores the original factory set default values for all parameters functions and analog output calibration Does not affect analog input calibration FULL UPGRADE Upgrades all function blocks of the instrument from a disk file with LNF extension Overwrites all function blocks Executes Clear All Memory after this service INCREMENTAL UPGRADE Upgrades the instrument with the desired options from a disk file with LNI extension Does not affect existing function blocks or configuration SOFTWARE UPGRADE Upgrades product software from disk 8 8 Reset Unit Select this item to reboot the unit after making changes to Mains Frequency This function clears all RAM buffers storage and display and accumulated values of some function blocks Calculated Value timers totalizers and control loop integral are reset to initial values This function does not clear memory 8 9 Product Information Select this item to display the product identification software version number PROM part number and serial number 8
88. to finish a batch Example BATCH FIRST SEGMENT which specifies the start of the batch phase of the profile is set at Segment 3 The last segment of the batch phase BATCH LAST SEGMENT is set at Segment 7 The last segment of the profile is Segment 9 When SHUTDOWN changes from OFF to ON the profiler will jump to Segment 8 the first segment of the shutdown phase of the profile See Figure 5 12 Shutdown Startup Segments Batch Segments Shutdown Segments e a END batch l END shutdown BATCH LAST SEGMENT 1 BATCH FIRST SEGMENT BATCH LAST SEGMENT Figure 5 12 Shutdown RAMP See External Ramp Type on page 18p Profiler is in Profiler INCREMENT Run mode amp increments RAMP TYPE by amount of profiler is specified External by the segment s TIME 188 Video Recorder User Manual Setpoint Profiler Parameter nam gt Definition Triggere Conditions by present GUARANTEED See Guaranteed Soak on page 192 Level ON Excessive Profiler is SOAK deviation put on Hold between profiler and PV 1 or PV 2 amp the segment s GUAR SOAK 1 or GUAR SOAK 2 is enabled HOLD LEVEL EDGE EDIT Grants access to the profile s segments edition page see table 5 5 5 4 How to set up a profiler Up to 4 profilers can be programmed depending on the options on your instrument There are two menus for programming a profiler PROGRAM PROFILERS in the Program menu and SETPOINT PROFIL
89. upstream to downstream In some cases like with a control loop s feedback this analogy is not true because the information is flowing in a circle but it is a helpful way to view how function blocks are generally interconnected For example the Analog Input function block is typically upstream of the Control Loop function which is typically upstream of the Analog Output function block Of course if two function blocks are not directly or indirectly connected there is no flow between the two Just remember that every function block has input does a set of operations and produces an output When several function blocks are linked together there is a flow of information Video Recorder User Manual 49 Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 3 Function Block Types Function block Tyr Maximun Purpose name available Alarm Causes alarms under specified conditions Analog Input Al 48 Interfaces with measuring input hardware thermocouple RTD mA volts Analog Output AO Interfaces with analog output hardware current output CAT or with output relay hardware time proportion DAT Calculated Value Performs various calculations on specified parameters Constant 32 Outputs a number or an analog parameter value Discrete Input p 36 Interfaces with discrete input hardware dry contact closure Discrete Output 36 Interfaces with output relay hardware AC relay DC relay mechanical relay open collector output Lo
90. used programming prompts All Program mode menu items and settings can be reviewed but not changed in the Online mode by selecting REVIEW PROGRAMMING on the main Online menu See Enable Features Section 4 19 We recommend you save the instrument configuration to a floppy disk after you have completed programming the instrument See 4 23 Access LOAD STORE CONFIG Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 3 The Program mode menu Program mode is an off line mode for programming configuring the instrument In this mode all outputs are frozen Table 4 1 shows the top level of the Program Mode menu with all available options Your instrument may have a reduced menu if options are not present or if features have been disabled Table 4 1 Program Mode Menu Prompt y Function or a QWERTY keyboard or barcode reader Video Recorder User Manual 81 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 4 Frequently used programming prompts When programming the instrument you will see certain prompts repeatedly in different menus These are described in Table 4 2 rather than in each menu in which they appear Table 4 2 Frequently Used Programming Prompts Prompt Range Selections IN DECIMAL POS X XXXXX XXXX XX Select the decimal point position to be XX XXXX XXXXX X used for all inputs to the function XXX XXX XXXXXX Select X XXEXX to display the function s X XXEXX values in exponen
91. when the Display button is pressed SP1 P SP1 PROFILO1 m 20000 SP Sel SP2 SP 3 10000 se 9 10 720000 710000 000 200 00 DS 000 000 000 END RUN RUN READY HOLD 0 00 m m m m ee hee NENG EN 5 Bas wy weno 24800 RUN Setpoint Profiler 2 Bar Summary Setpoint Prof iler 3 Bar Summanftpoint Profiler 4 Bar Summary Setpoint Profiler Trend SPP2BS SPP3BS SPP4BS SP TREND LOOP 1 1115 AUTO SP1 125 1 1 LP2 LP LP3 zl j 1000 00 1500 00 1200 00 eue PV 2205 00 j J SP 2000 00 j j E DEV 205 00
92. when the condition is corrected or if data storage is disabled turned off DISK FULL Yellow No more space is available on one or more of the files on the floppy disk for storage of data as programmed This message will appear only if at least one partition on the disk is programmed for non rollover operation The message will disappear when a new disk is initialized or if data storage is disabled turned off DISK WARNING Yellow Floppy disk is not full but available space on one or more disk files has reached the programmed warning limit The message will disappear when a new disk is initialized or if data storage is disabled turned off BEZEL OPEN Instrument front panel is open or is not closed securely DISK ERROR Yellow The instrument is attempting to store data but the disk is either not properly formatted or is faulty The message disappears when the disk is formatted or replaced or if data storage is disabled turned off DSK NOT CURRENT Yellow When a disk is initialized the instrument marks it as the current disk The instrument will only store data to the current disk If any other disk is placed in the drive this message will appear The message will disappear when the current disk is inserted or a new disk is initialized WRITE Yellow The disk in the drive has its write protected tab set to the protect PROTECTED position DISK MISSING Data storage is enabled but no disk is installed in the disk drive 2
93. you convert the input from a thermocouple or EMF to engineering units using a custom curve containing up to 20 points Standard algorithm prompts Table 4 6 describes all the prompts associated with the standard algorithm These are the default prompts for analog input programming See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 6 Standard esee Prompts INPUT TYPE _ e 8 Table 1 3 for selections The Input type thermocouple RTD pyrometer default is OFF RANGE LOW The value must be within the limits Low end of the input range specified for the input type see Table 1 3 Be sure to use the correct value for the temperature units used F C R To enter the full range for the temperature units selected see TEMPERATURE UNITS select TYPE again and press Enter without changing the range type RANGE HIGH The value must be within the limits High end of the input range specified for the input type see Table 1 3 Be sure to use the correct value for the temperature units used F R To enter the full range for the temperature units selected see TEMPERATURE UNITS select TYPE again and press Enter without changing the range type Video Recorder User Manual 87 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 6 Standard Algorithm Prompts continued TEMPERATURE UNIT Select C for Degrees Celsius F for Specifies the temperature units used for Degrees Fahrenheit K for
94. 00 E een aM ED RNC cx Fs aa po A ALARM 1 HIGH Figure 6 2 Horizontal and Vertical Trend Displays Table 6 2 Point Detail Menu Prompts Cerem SCROLL Press the Increment or Decrement buttons to scroll the trend forward or backward in time Press Tab key to change to the next point on a multi point trend Press the Menu button to restore the Point Detail menu The trend display will remain at the time determined by the SCROLL Press the Display button to restore the original primary display and cancel the SCROLL SET HOLD Causes one point to remain displayed in the scoreboard Available for live trend only REL HOLD Before selecting SET HOLD press Point Detail to change the scoreboard to the desired point Select SET HOLD and press Enter An H appears in the lower right display The HOLD will remain in effect until deliberately removed with REL HOLD To HOLD a different point press the Tab key until the desired point is shown then press the Display button To release the HOLD select REL HOLD DETAIL Use the Increment and Decrement buttons to move the line cursor forward or backward in time The value of the displayed point will change to its value at the new time If desired press Tab to change to the next point on a multi point trend Press the Menu button to restore the Point Detail menu The
95. 000 00 1500 00 1200 00 J lt 1 ma 7 3 4 j TUE D 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV 405 00 PV 1054 00 PV 405 00 PV 1054 00 623 00 SP 405 00 SP 1040 00 SP 405 00 SP 1040 00 SP 622 00 OUT 150 OUT 100 OUT 150 OUT 10 0 OUT 50 5 1 9 2 A 5 1 5 2 M 5 1 Loop 2 Bar Summary Loop 3 Bar Summary LOOP 2BS LOOP 3BS LP1 LP2 LP3 LPA LP5 LP6 LP7 LP8 L LP2 LP3 4 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 1000 00 1500 00 120000 2400 00 md Jq 4 IRI OR 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV 405 00 1054 00 623 00 1266 00 SP_ 405 00 1040 00 622 00 1244 00 OUT 150 100 50 50 S jM s S JA St WAR NL UE did Biss RIEL 8 Loop 4 Bar Summary 51 S2 M 5 1 51 S M S2 M STA 81 LOOP 4BS Loop 8 Bar Summary Figure 6 5 Loop Displays When the Loop w Bar Graph Loop 2 Bar Loop 3 Bar Loop 4 Bar Loop 8 Bar or Digital Loop display is shown you can e select Auto or Manual control mode for the loop e change loop output e change the setpoint value e switch to the Loop Tuning display for Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 toggle for tuning parameters and pretuning Detailed instructions for performing these interactions are described in Table 6 5 Video Recorder User Manual 215 Online Operations Using Primary Displays Table 6 5 Interacting With Loop Displays To perform this action Do these steps Move the cursor box to Press the Tab key to move the cursor to the Loop Tag at the top of the display another area of the display
96. 1 for ON 1 for CONDITION TIME circuits CONDITION TIME then then OFF 0 During On rising edge of Result OFF 0 CONDITION TIME any creates pulse length additional OFF 0 to ONs of CONDITION TIME and ignores Result are ignored additional rising edges of Result within that CONDITION TIME Condition Type Pulse Condition Time 3 seconds If Result is Then CVn OS is RT PULSE Used for slower circuits Result switches ON 1 for lt ON 1 for CONDITION Re triggerable pulse CONDITION TIME then TIME then OFF 0 OFF 0 Guarantees that CVn OS will be Result switches ON 1 multiple ON 1 when Result first ON for CONDITION TIME after times before CONDITION TIME switches ON 1 and most recent rising edge of expires remains ON 1 until Result Result has not switched ON 1 for CONDITION TIME Result switches ON 1 for 2 ON 1 for CONDITION CONDITION TIME then TIME then OFF 0 OFF 0 Condition Type Re triggerable Pulse Condition Time 3 seconds If Result is Then CVn OS is 112 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Counter Counts the number of OFF 0 to ON 1 transitions of the input This number is output as CVn OV When this number reaches the Preset value a discrete output parameter CVn OS goes ON 1 until Reset occurs Table 4 21 describes the Counter prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 21
97. 1 ON discrete i ON 1 average is reset to zero when to OFF 0 average restarts TIME UNITS SECONDS MINUTES HOURS Time units of the averaging period or DAYS AVERAGE PERIOD PERIOD OFF or number Number of time units per average period E PERIOD OFF or number Number of time units between samples Must divide evenly into Average Period CALIBRATE HOLD HOLD OFF discrete parameter 0 1 When ON 1 no samples are taken and the output is held CEMS Rolling Average CEM Rolling Avg Outputs a rolling mean average CVn OV over the specified Average Period Average is updated every Frame Period thereafter Samples are taken at every scan cycle of the instrument except when Calibrate Hold is ON 1 Time between samples 1 machine scan cycle 8 H 8 a rst S Frame Period l Average Period First average gt Second average m Third average Figure 4 15 CEMS Rolling Average Table 4 49 describes the CEMS Rolling Average prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Video Recorder User Manual 141 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 49 CEMS Rolling Average Prompts RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGEHIGH HIGH Se OFF analog Input to be averaged parameter number RESET OFF discrete When E is ON 1 aver
98. 161 4 22 Set Clock p te aa ee HE RE Ead ee NER T e Mae eel 162 4 23 Load Store Configuration essessssssssssssssseses esten enne ernst nnns intres tenen 163 4 24 Scal Hale soos axes ot e Ltda ELM DAE EN shee erdt duke 164 4 253Select banguage uoto sto teniente i eate I Ee 165 4 26 Data Storage arai ret t undae d d ee LER Ne 166 SETPOINT PROFILER a oir cte ino e oe cte Eoi ta to cte ine totes 175 5 1 Overview of the Setpoint Profiler 175 5 2 Components of a profile herr e re a Re E S T EL EE det 178 5 3 Parameters that control a profile s execution sssesesseeeneeene enne 185 5 4 Howto set profiler is ern ee aie e t er d e epe S 189 5 5 How to load and run a profiler 197 ONLINE OPERATIONS USING PRIMARY DISPLAYS 209 MEO UIT 209 6 2 Interacting With Primary Displays ssssseeseeneeenenneeneeeneeneenn nnne 210 6 3 Display Messages and Symbols enne nnne nennen 217 Video Recorder User Manual 7 ONLINE OPERATION USING 221 TA OVerVIeW aui etes ep pete ose i terum e de es 221 1 24 Data Storage ee aui a i E di hatin teer adod ed ag 222 Access Summiaries eie gn egt plat Pl i e e nib oe Eee tu ede eds 228 7 43 SIRAC
99. 18 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operations Using Primary Displays Table 6 6 Messages and Symbols at Bottom of Display continued Message Symbol GENERAL ERROR Yellow This message will appear if the instrument encounters any error not mentioned above Yellow Located in bottom right of display Indicates storage is active data is S being collected on disk or in the instrument s internal buffer Located in bottom right of display The display s upper and lower limits are zoomed on a smaller range Disappears when Zoom is turned off Located in bottom right of display Indicates the display is held on a single data point and is not rotating through all data points Disappears when Point Hold is removed Table 6 7 Messages and Symbols Elsewhere on Display REVIEW or REPLAY Trend Replay Review Adjacent to detailed point information scoreboard on the screen Indicates that the trend on the display is from historical data and does not represent the current state of the process REVIEW means that the data for the trend are from current memory RAM REPLAY means that the data are retrieved from floppy disk data storage Analog Input Value Adjust Located to the right of the data point value This message appears only on the AI Value Adjust display It indicates that a bias has been manually applied to the value of the particular data point The symbol will disappear when the value is set to OFF Low Alarm Set
100. 228 Operating mode SOUING ninos aUe 242 278 Video Recorder User Manual P Panel display interacting with 214 Parts eani ien Ett 259 Pretune Abort 241 COMPLETE menu ee 240 STIOPPED menhu certe 238 Pretune Loop tee ete 238 Primary display example 217 Process Variable 90 Product Information 231 Product Information 248 Profile advance i ee aute 186 auto Cycl8 incertis 194 teet 175 event inde ene e 183 fast 187 guaranteed 182 HySIer6SIS zat fette tein 182 Holds oh ceat ted 186 iot start eee aeae a ieaiai 186 eee es 194 lOO mede 184 multiphase defined 177 process 178 ramp tyD8s ets deel nik Asal doles 178 Ieset r ri iu derit oe tene NE 185 single phase 177 CIC EE 185 start by pressing a 50 time multiplier 195 Program defined Eee ente 175 Program Calculated Values
101. 4 OUT 83 5 lus i PV 405 00 PV 1054 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 500 00 Ls Our 150 SP maoo Se 62200 Pm eps OUT 15 0 OUT 100 our 50 A 5 1 A SP2 M SP1 Loop with Bar Graph Loop 2 Bar Summary Loop 3 Bar Summary LOOP BAR LOOP 25 385 IPI 1 2 1 8 1 4 ee M AU 4 4 4 DEGF 6467 BEGE 7 ZONEG lt 33467 BEGE 123 45 29346 IZONE7 ZONES ZONES toe um 8467 2542 07 BEGE 123 45 123 45 123 45 PV 40500105400 623 00 1266 00 ARAB 12225865 DEBE DEGF DEGC DEGF AGAG7 153456789 DEGF ONEAZONEBZONEC s Juss ws as 12345 12345 12345 DEGF DEGF DEGF Loep OOP 4 Bar is mary Loop 8 Bar Summary Unit Data Panel Meter LOOP 8BS UNIT DATA PANMETER TEMP7 19415 DEGF 5000 DEG 2500 0 PRESS 3 ZONE mele uu 30 00 205 00 d EHE Y ILE PSI DEGF Tu TEMP2 ZONE2 XL den F 5 134 4 456 2 Z j a N VALUES DEGC DEGF A ALARM HIGH A ALARMI HIGH Panel Display 4 Large Font Vertical Trend Vertical Trend Digital Points PANEL 4 V TREND VTRNDDIG 115 145 T 215 7 2261 50DEGF TEMP7 20615 DpEGF 1 5 pror Val T 1 7 e id VALUET OMA E Sur TEAM KEZCRAS ER SHCDCSS lt VALUES T 1500 0 FC VALUES an A TEMP1 HIGH AJALARM1 HIGH 90000 AJALARMI HIGH 500 Vertical re
102. 4 s diagram any of the profilers within the instrument could have been used When a set point profile is executed discrete inputs are typically used in conjunction with external Switches to control the set point profiler function block For example the set point profiler function block can be programmed to start hold or reset based on discrete input statuses See Figure 3 25 TYPE J THERMOCOUPLE 4 TO 20 mA External INPUT TYPE J Switches RANGE LOW 0 RANGE HIGH 1000 TYPE STANDARD OUTPUT TYPE CAT SP1 500 IN LOW LIMIT 0 SP2 SP1 OV IN HIGH LIMIT 100 GAIN 10 OUT LOW LIMIT RESET 1 RATE 0 OUT HIGH LIMIT 4 2 0 DI3 OS OS OUTPUT STATE Figure 3 25 Discrete Inputs Controlling Execution Of Set Point Profiler Function Block Video Recorder User Manual 71 Programming and Operating Concepts Also typical in the execution of a set point profile is the generation of discrete events during each profile step Discrete events are simply status indicators that are programmed to assume either an ON or OFF state during a step of a profile As simple discrete status indicators these events may for example be used to initiate a logic control scheme on the process being controlled upon the occurrence of a particular profile segment In this product note that up to 16 discrete events may be programmed per segment See Figure 3 26 PROCESS VALUE IN ENGINEERING UNITS SEGMENT SEGMENT SEGMEN
103. 5 51 s2 St s Display o ee UM Left Down Display 1 Dispidy 3 Arrow Arrow Tab Display 2 Arrow Figure 5 14 Buttons Video Recorder User Manual Menu Enter 197 Setpoint Profiler ATTENTION The following procedures assume the instrument has been programmed to display the Setpoint Profiler as a trend To program displays see section 4 18 Program Displays How to load programs from memory using Online menu Programs stored in memory are identified by number 1 48 depending on instrument model number Each program stored in memory contains one to four profiles depending on your instrument See Table 5 517 For example on an instrument with 3 profiles you can store Program 1 which contains Profiles 1 2 and 3 Table 5 7 How Profiles Are Stored In Memory 1 programmer 2 programmer 3 programmer 4 programmer instrument instrument instrument instrument 1 Profile per Program 2 Profiles per Program 3 Profiles per Program 4 Profiles per Program This COntain This contair This COntain This contair 3 Program this Profil Program these Program these Program these Profiles Profiles Profiles 4 2 2 3 A B AR A a N AR T n2 wo m ki lli i 198 Video Recorder User Manu
104. ACK OFF analog parameter For valve characterization select BC to propagate the number back calculation BC value from a downstream Analog Output Also program the upstream loop s feedback with this CV s back calculation value CV BC See Figure 4 8 Attention f feedback is programmed to an analog parameter or a number the X and Y values must define a curve that is not bell shaped or complex That is all Y values must be increasing or decreasing Video Recorder User Manual 123 Programming Function Blocks and Features FUNCTION INPUT GENERATOR CV Figure 4 8 Function Generator Configuration For Valve Characterization FUNCTION OV ANOTHER INPUT GENERATOR FUNCTION BLOCK CV Figure 4 9 Function Generator Configuration For Input Signal Characterization 124 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Interval Timer This timer counts down from the preset value in minutes This time remaining is CVn OV The timer has a single discrete output CVn OS which is ON 1 while the timer is actively counting or while RESET is ON 1 and OFF 0 while the timer has timed out to zero When RESET RUN switches ON 1 the timer resets to the preset value an ON 1 to OFF 0 transition starts the timer Table 4 34 describes the Interval Timer prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 34 Interval Timer Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition PRESET OFF analog parameter Tim
105. B ZIP disks Note that only DOS formatted floppy disks may be used in the instrument s disk drive and the unit s front door must be closed for any disk drive operations to take place The floppy disks may be initialized in the instrument or on an IBM PC with the initialize utility Read this overview thoroughly to understand the fundamentals behind the instruments data storage capabilities Categories of Stored Data 74 There are four categories of disk storable data Each category of data is stored in its own unique file The categories are Data Storage Configuration Storage Setpoint Program Storage Calibration Storage Data Storage Configuration Setpoint Program Calibration Process Data Diagnostic Data Trends Unit Data Alarms Events Figure 3 28 Categories of Stored Data The first category of stored data Data Storage is comprised of two types of data process data and diagnostic data When the instrument stores these data types it is essentially functioning as a recorder Process data is comprised of up to four files containing historical information on the process that the instrument is monitoring and or controlling such as the temperature trend or a log of a furnace over time Process data also includes any alarm or discrete event information Diagnostic data is the result of the instrument s execution of diagnostic routines during instrument start up and maintenance procedures such a
106. CALCULATING Prompts continued mem hien OE SETPOINT Current working set point value of the loop being tuned This is a read only prompt RUN TIME Elapsed time since pretune was started This is a read only prompt ABORT Select to cancel identifying and calculating and return to the stopped status Pretune COMPLETE menu describes the Pretune COMPLETE prompts Table 7 13 Pretune COMPLETE Prompts mew mim STATUS Status Completed This is a read only prompt PB GAIN New Prop Band or gain determined by pretune This is a read only prompt RESET New Reset determined by pretune This is a read only prompt RATE New Rate determined by pretune This is a read only prompt INSTALL Select to install the new pretune values into loop s tuning parameters specified by TUNE SET n Table 7 11 ABORT Select to delete the new pretune values if you do not wish to install them 240 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operation Using Menus Pretune Abort messages One of the following messages is displayed when an unusual event has aborted the pretune PTA means Pretune Abort Table 7 14 Pretune Abort Messages Message Meaning User action required PTA WARM START A warm start occurred during pretune Repeat pretune PTA WENT OFFLINE Instrument went out of Online mode during pretune Repeat pretune PTA LOOP STATUS Loop has PV that is bad i e failed sensor OR PV is a constant value such as from
107. D Beet Deo OPERE RT D ERER 120 Table4 31 BCD Prompts ee eee OBRUO PODER IRI DII ERE 121 Table 4 32 How Profiles Are Saved In Memory sess trennen nr en rennen ene 122 Table 4 33 Function Generator Prompts sessi nene tenete 123 Table 4 34 Interval Timer 125 Table 4 35 Periodic Timer Prompts nennen enne eret eene enne nns 127 viii Video Recorder User Manual Table4 36 Set Up Timer Prompts et eee eee bete tengan 127 Table 4 37 Mass Blow Prompts ie ss cesses nente ei eee eee X e rie eerie ce EE 128 Table 4 38 Carbon Prom pts ie oerte e er rove t e e e Rede ei e eerte 129 Table 4 39 Relative Humidity Prompts enne nennen reete etre enne 131 Table 4 40 Fos terization Prompts vcs oer etie reete eer e ee ef d eie He Fe Ee eee qos 132 Table 4 41 Advanced Sphtter Prompts zone ree b e e RERO eee 134 Table 4 42 Standard Splitter Prompts 2 4 ene ee ee e d e d eee d eec 135 Table 4 43 Scaling Prompts eR e me e AER e e re vm 136 Table 444 Signal Clamp Prompts ses 52 5 edet e ee e e d e Ogden 137 Table4 45 1 Point Block Average Prompts nece etre DOS RU Te ERE Per DRE RUE ne 138 Table 4 46 Rolling Average Prompts eee rere si tra e eda tre Re etie des 139 Table4 47 Multiple Average Prompts ettet cere c
108. D Soft PID action YES causes the control algorithm to not calculate proportional output corresponding to errors resulting from changes to set point The algorithm will adjust its Reset Integral term to a value required to maintain the present output when the set point is changed Normal proportional action should occur for all changes and variations to the controlled variable 98 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 10 Loop Prompts continued Prompt Range Selections SP INC SLEW LIMIT amp Enter a number Working set point slew limits for increasing and decreasing SP DEC SLEW LIMIT slew rates Variable slew limits are available by programming a constant s Destination with IS or DS See Program Constants Section 4 16 SP LOW LIMIT amp SP OFF or number Limits will be imposed on the working set point value HIGH LIMIT regardless of source A set point value above or below the limits will be entered into the loop at the limit value OFF entry will assume process variable limits Variable limits are available by programming a constant s Destination with HS or LS See Program Constants Section 4 16 SP1 TRACKING SP2 NONE A selection of Set point 2 will cause the Set point 1 value to be set to the Set point 2 value on a transfer from Set point 2 to Set point 1 Set point 1 adjustment may be made after the transfer SUPPRESS This parameter set to YES limits overshoot of t
109. EDBACK FEEDBACK 4 gt 20 0 2 o I SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SP HIGH LIMIT SP LOW LIMIT SUPPRESS OVERSHOOT PV TRACKING FEEDBACK INTERACTIVE RESET LIMIT LATCHING gt I U 8 gt o I continued 92 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 9 Control Loop Type Menu Selections continued FEEDFORWARD FEEDFORWARD FEEDFORWARD FEEDFORWARD GAIN GAIN OUTPUT OUTPUT TRACKING TRACKING FORCE REMOTE FORCE REMOTE MAN MAN CHG ACTION CHG ACTION INPUT INPUT DUAL TUNING DUAL TUNING SEL SEL DISCR VS KEY DISCR VS KEY SEL SEL SETPOINT SETPOINT SELECT SELECT AUTO MAN AUTO MAN SELECT SELECT INTERACTIVE INTERACTIVE RESET LIMIT RESET LIMIT LATCHING LATCHING FEEDFORWARD CHG ACTION SOFT PID FEEDFORWARD GAIN INPUT CHG ACTION DUAL TUNING FEEDBACK FEEDFORWARD INPUT SEL GAIN DUAL TUNING DISCR VS KEY FEEDFORWARD OUTPUT SEL SEL TRACKING DISCR VS KEY SETPOINT FEEDFORWARD FORCE REMOTE SEL SELECT GAIN MAN SETPOINT AUTO MAN OUTPUT CHG ACTION SELECT SELECT TRACKING INPUT AUTO MAN INTERACTIVE FORCE REMOTE DUAL TUNING SELECT MAN SEL OUTPUT LOW RESET LIMIT CHG ACTION DISCR VS KEY LIMIT INPUT SEL OUTPUT HIGH LATCHING DUAL TUNING SETPOINT LIMIT SEL SELECT INTERACTIVE DISCR VS KEY AUTO MAN SEL SELECT SETPOINT INTERACTIVE SELECT AUTO MAN RESET LIMIT SELECT INTERACTIVE LATCHING RESET LIMIT LATCHING
110. EPROM Memory No more static memory or EEPROM memory Verify programming of affected function block Out of RAM Memory No more RAM available Verify programming of affected function block Output Limits Equal Output range limits low and high must be unequal Change to unequal limits Pairs Inconsistent Applies to custom or Function Generator CV Program a Y for each X or vice Curve has Xn but no Yn or vice versa Curve does versa Program at least 2 X s and not have at least 2 X Y pairs 2 Y s Request Made with Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the Verify programming of affected Invalid Tag configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file function block Requires a Deviation Deviation alarm does not contain deviation Program alarm with deviation Parameter Requires Input Alarm does not contain an input Program alarm with input Parameter Requires Setpoint Alarm does not contain a setpoint Program alarm with a setpoint Parameter RJ Not in Curve Al is custom type class thermocouple RJ enabled Y values must contain 0 65 but curve does not contain 0 65 degrees C 32 149 degrees C 32 149 degrees F degrees F Temperature Constant FO Sterilization CV Temperature constant is not Program Temperature constant Not Programmed or Less programmed or is less than zero with value greater than or equal to Than Zero Zero Temperature Input Not FO Sterilization CV Temperature Input is not Program Temperature input with
111. ES in the Online menu Both must be accessed to program a profiler Both menus are described in this section Program Profilers menu in Program mode This menu lets you define various parameters for controlling the profiler s execution To access the Program Profilers menu 1 Press the Menu button until a main menu is displayed Select Set Mode and change the mode to Program Select Program Profilers Poco Select a profiler 1 through 4 to program Only profilers that are not actively running are selectable Table 543 briefly describes the prompts for all profilers For detailed descriptions refer to Sections 5 2 and 5 3 See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Video Recorder User Manual 189 Setpoint Profiler Table 5 3 Program Profiler Prompts DISPLAY LO LIM OFF or number Enter the lower limit for the SP Trend display Allow for the maximum and minimum Profiler and PV values DISPLAY HI LIM OFF or number Enter the upper limit for the SP Trend display allowing for the maximum and minimum Profiler and PV values OFF analog parameter number Program the profiler to monitor a process variable PV 1 is trended on the SP Trend display PV 1 is compared to the profiler s value to determine deviation Excessive deviation between PV 1 and profiler value can cause a Hold guaranteed soak OFF analog parameter number This is an optional PV that can also be monitored and can be used to determine deviation from pro
112. Example Function Block Parameter Selection Procedure 58 Table 3 9 Function Block Configuration Procedure eese 58 Table 3 10 Example Configuration Procedure sees eene etre 59 Table 3 11 Data Storage File Extensions sees nennen rene etre trennen 75 Table 4 1 Program Mode Menu o cea ce ore ee deeper tiere eerie e 81 Table 4 2 Frequently Used Programming Prompts nennen emeret tenerent 82 Table 4 3 Labels for Function Blocks eese roris en EEE A SEE EEEE STES 85 Table4 4 Other Labels ie ee tt ese e bete ee eee e ie ee ein 86 Table 4 5 Analog Input Algorithm Selection nennen nennen 87 Table 4 6 Standard Algorithm Prompts nennen trennen eene 87 Table 4 7 Custom Algorithm Prompts essere eene 89 Table 4 8 Loop Characteristics eben e 90 Table 4 9 Control Loop Type Menu 92 Table 4 10 Loop Prompts 4e eee terrre t net depre RE Ree teneo tee egre 94 Table 4 11 Analog Output Types erret tei i n erre en Pe repe tts 101 Table 4 12 Prompts For Analog Output Types eee trennen rennen ener 101 Table 4 13 Analog Output Prompts 5 onere i
113. Honeywell Video Recorder VRX180 User Manual ssue 3 03 03 US11 6228 Honeywell Issue 3 03 03 US11 6228 Copyright Notices and Trademarks Copyright 2000 by Honeywell Inc While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect special or consequential damages The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice This document was prepared using Information Mapping methodologies and formatting principles Information Mapping is a trademark of Information Mapping Inc Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Inc Modbus is a registered trademark of MODICON Inc The omission of a name from this list is not to be interpreted that the name is not a trademark Video Recorder User Manual About This Document Abstract This manual describes the installation configuration operation and maintenance of the Video Recorder Warranty The device described herein has been manufactured and tested for correct operation and is warranted as follows The Video Recorder carries an 18 month warranty This warranty includes immediate technical assistance and replacement of the defective part
114. INPUT 101 TEMPERATURE INPUT 273 where FACTOR 1 is calculated by user DP INPUT is differential pressure in KPASCALS PRESSURE INPUT is in KPASCALS TEMPERATURE INPUT is in C Table 4 37 describes the Mass Flow prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 37 Mass Flow Prompts OUT LOW LIMIT OFF or number Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when these limits are exceeded HIGH LIMIT INPUT OFF analog parameter Differential pressure input number PRESSURE INPUT OFF analog parameter Pressure input in PSIG or KPASCALS number TEMP INPUT OFF analog parameter Temperature in C or F 1 OFF analog parameter Flow factor for the particular installation number 128 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Carbon Potential The Carbon Potential Control Function Block provides for weight percent wt control of carbon in carburizing hardening and atmosphere generating applications Table 4 38 Carbon Prompts PROBE TYPE NONE AACP SUPER Selection which represents the manufacturer of the SYS MARATHON FCC oxygen probe being used This determines which linearization equations are used for and dewpoint calculations CARBON PROBE IN NUMBER PARM OFF Analog input that is connected to the oxygen probe mV output PROBE TEMP INPUT NUMBER PARM OFF Analog input that is connected to the oxygen probe temperature
115. ISK REPLAY ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes the menu items which allow access to the Online retrieval of stored data ZOOM ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes the menu items which allow access to the Online trend Zoom feature POINT DETAIL ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes the menu items which allow access to the Online trend Point Detail feature TIMEBASE SELECT ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes the menu items which allow access to the manual Trend Timebase Select capability CUSTOM INPUT ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes INPUT ALGORITHM prompt from the Program Analog Input menu Video Recorder User Manual 159 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 20 Program Security Security lets you protect certain menu items and functions from unwanted or accidental access Access to a secured item requires entry of a 3 digit master or operator code Select PROGRAM SECURITY to display the Security menu if security is active you will be prompted to enter the master code before continuing REFERENCE If the master or operator s security code is lost or forgotten a security bypass procedure is available See Appendix A Table 4 66 describes the Security prompts Table 4 66 Security Prompts ENABLE SECURITY YES NO Set to Yes to activate security on all enabled security items having a non zero master or operator s code f set to No no items will be secure MASTER SEC CODE 3 digit number Set to a non zero value a value of zero
116. K LOOP REACTR KILN VESSEL WCHEM PRESS DEMIN CONTRL FERMTR LEHR STRLZR OVEN 168 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Trend Data2 3 amp 4 Alarms Events Trend Data 2 Trend Data 3 and Trend Data 4 use the same prompts as in Table 4 72 Alarm data storage consists of a complete log of alarms including time of occurrence time of clearing value of the alarm parameter the alarm sense high low etc and the batch identification number if present The alarm prompts are STORAGE MODE ROLLOVER ALARM SAMPLES EXTERNAL ENABLE SELECT FILENAME See Table 4 72 for descriptions The number of samples which can be stored in a file ALARM SAMPLES can be up to 1600 Depending on your selections data collection will begin when the first alarm occurs or when the first alarm occurs after a batch start Event storage consists of a complete log of events including the event title time of occurrence the status or value after the change and the batch identification number if present When event storage is running loop and instrument mode events are always stored discrete input and output events are stored only if first enabled under those items program menus see Sections 4 10 and 4 11 Table 4 73 Stored Events Event storage setup is done with the following parameters STORAGE MODE ROLLOVER EVENT SAMPLES EXTERNAL ENABLE SELECT FILENAME See Table 4 72 for parameter descriptions The num
117. L Office Bucharest 147 Aurel Vlaicu Str ScZ Apt 61 62 R 72921 Bucharest ROMANIA Tel 40 1 211 00 76 211 79 RUSSIA HONEYWELL INC 4 th Floor Administrative Builiding of AO Luzhniki Management 24 Luzhniki 119048 Moscow RUSSIA Tel 7 095 796 98 00 01 SLOVAKIA HONEYWELL Ltd Mlynske nivy 73 PO Box 75 820 07 BRATISLAVA 27 SLOVAKIA Tel 421 7 52 47 400 425 SPAIN HONEYWELL S A Factory Josefa Valcarcel 24 28027 MADRID SPAIN Tel 34 91 31 3 61 00 SWEDEN HONEYWELL A B S 127 86 Skarholmen STOCKHOLM SWEDEN Tel 46 8 775 55 00 SWITZERLAND HONEYWELL A G Hertistrasse 2 8304 WALLISELLEN SWITZERLAND Tel 41 1 831 02 71 TURKEY HONEYWELL A S Caryiryolu Sok No 7 Ucgen Plaza Kat 5 6 7 Icerenkoy 81120 Instanbul Turkey Tel 90 216 575 66 00 UNITED KINGDOM HONEYWELL Newhouse Industrial Estate Motherwell ML1 5SB Scotland UK Tel 44 0 1698 481481 Fax 444 0 1698 481276 U S A HONEYWELL INC INDUSTRIAL PROCESS CONTROLS 1100 VIRGINIA DRIVE PA 19034 3260 FT WASHINGTON U S A Tel 1 800 343 0228 VENEZUELA HONEYWELL CA APARTADO 61314 1060 CARACAS VENEZUELA Tel 58 2 239 0211
118. MAND action Activates totalizer when ON 1 PRESET OFF analog parameter Up totalizer counts up to this value Down totalizer counts number down from this value ZERO CUTOFF OFF or number Represents the least value to be accumulated in the totalizer Input values below this value will be input as zero RESETTABLE YES NO If NO the Totalizer is non resettable and cannot be reset via the operator keypad This setting does not affect the action of the reset discrete parameter RESET OFF discrete parameter 0 When the RESET goes high 1 an UP action totalizer will 1 reset to zero or a DOWN action totalizer will reset to the preset value Use SY1 F3 to reset with the RESET or F3 key Video Recorder User Manual 145 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 15 Program Profiles Profile programming is explained in Section 5 146 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 16 Program Constants Constants can be programmed here and their values edited Online Select a constant to program Table 4 52 describes the Constant prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 52 Constant Prompts VALUE OFF analog If a number the Constant may be altered Online from the Data parameter number Entry menu If a parameter this parameter can be directed by DESTINATION to override certain programmed values INPUT LOW LIMIT OFF or number Display limits for when viewing Constant on trend display
119. MENT prompts Se Figure 5 Single Phase Profile END Multi Phase Profile lt a Batch Segments HF Startup Segments E i Shutdown Segments END batch END BATCH FIRST SEGMENT 3 BATCH LAST SEGMENT 6 Figure 5 2 Single and Multi phase Profiles Video Recorder User Manual 177 Setpoint Profiler 5 2 Components of a profile Two PVs available Each profile can monitor up to 2 process variables The second PV is for monitoring a second variable related to your process The value of each PV is compared with the value of the profile If the difference between either PV and the profile value exceeds specified amounts the profiler will Hold soak if enabled to do so Number of segments Up to 63 segments may be in a profile Time Units All segments use the same time base seconds minutes or hours 4 types of ramp segments There are four ramp types selectable at the RAMP TYPE prompt 1 Value Duration 2 Time 3 Rate 4 External Value Duration Val Dur Ramp Type This is the only ramp type that allows consecutive ramps or soaks VALUE is the beginning value of the segment TIME is the time needed to reach the VALUE of the next segment Ramp Type Value Duration Features of this ramp type Allows consecutive ramps or soaks First segment can be a ramp or soak Ramp segments Soa
120. Manual 59 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 14 How to program common configurations Being able to diagram a control configuration in terms of function blocks makes it easier to program and configure your instrument for its intended process control application This function block diagram you create can be used as a construction blue print to program the instrument Each block in the diagram relates to a dedicated instrument programming menu in the instrument s PROGRAM mode What follows are examples where common control configurations are presented along with their function block diagrams The first example is a simple control arrangement in great detail to help you understand function block diagram basics followed by more sophisticated examples Once you understand how to diagram function blocks you will be able to draw a diagram for virtually any control strategy regardless of complexity Understanding the relationship between such diagrams and the instrument s programming menus is key to successfully mastering the instrument s many capabilities and features Programming a Current Driven Heat Treat Element An example of one of the most common and simple control strategies is in Figure 3 11 below INSTRUMENT TYPE J THERMOCOUPLE VALVE FURNACE ZONE ACTUATOR 4 TO 20 mA CAT BURNER Figure 3 11 Control Of Furnace Zone Temperature With 4 20 mA CAT Control Signal 60 Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Opera
121. NDITION TIME Figure 4 6 Free Form Logic Signal Flow Table 4 27 describes the Free Form Logic prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 27 Free Form Logic Prompts Range Selections Definition _ Pomp logic calculation Use for iterative calculations irst Zero OFF Expressions enclosed by parentheses are evaluated first INPUT A INPUT OFF discrete parameter 0 Up to 8 input sources 1 RESET OFF discrete parameter 0 Resets the output to OFF 0 Use when using the letter O 1 in equations CONDITION TYPE NONE DELAY EXTEND See Table 4 20 on page 111 PULSE RT PULSE CONDITION TIME OFF or number Enter number of seconds of condition time See Table 4 20 on page 111 Video Recorder User Manual 119 Programming Function Blocks and Features Order of evaluation 1 Parentheses NOT AND OR XOR Pen 70 Example equation using operators and inputs A B C computes the result of A OR B AND C Table 4 28 A OR B ANDC Example equation using iteration The equation A B O computes the result of Input A OR Input B from current machine cycle AND Input A OR Input B from previous machine cycle Table 4 29 shows some possible results of this equation Table 4 29 Results of Logic Equation Using Iteration Inverter The output CVn OS is the logical inverse of the input parameter Table 4 30 describes the Inverter prompts See
122. ONTROL LOOPS in the Main Program Menu Select a loop to program Table 4 9 illustrates the menu selections for the various loop types See Table 4 10 for an alphabetical listing of these parameters descriptions Enter all desired choices then repeat the procedure if desired for the other Loops Video Recorder User Manual 91 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 9 Control Loop Type Menu Selections STD SPLIT ONOFF CASP CASS RATIO DIAT IN DECIMAL POS INDECIMALPOS IN DECIMAL POS INDECIMALPOS INDECIMALPOS INDECIMALPOS INDECIMALPOS IN DECIMAL POS OUT DECIMAL OUT DECIMAL OUT DECIMAL OUT DECIMAL OUT DECIMAL OUT DECIMAL OUT DECIMAL OUT DECIMAL POS POS POS POS POS POS POS POS PVHIGHLIMT PVHIGHLIMT PVHIGHLIMT PV HIGH LIMIT PVHIGHLIMT PVHIGHLIMIT PV HIGH LIMIT PvLOwLMT lPviowuwr eviowuwr Pviowuwr PvucHuMr PviowuMT PVLOWLIMT PVLOW LIMIT CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL PV LOW LIMIT CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL ACTION ACTION ACTION ACTION ACTION ACTION ACTION GAIN PROP GAIN PROP GAIN PROP SP1 TRACKING CONTROL GAIN PROP GAIN PROP GAIN PROP BAND BAND BAND ACTION BAND BAND BAND PROP PROP PROP SETPOINT 1 GAIN PROP PROP PROP PROP BAND 1 GAIN 1 BAND 1 GAIN 1 BAND 1 GAIN 1 BAND BAND 1 GAIN 1 BANDIH GAINZ1 BAND 1 GAIN 1 RESETH RESETH RESETH SETPOINT 2 PROP RESET H RESET H RESET H BAND 1 GAIN 1 RATE RATE 1 RATE 1 SP INC SLEW RESET H RATE 1 RATE 1 RATE 1 LIMIT PROP PROP PROP SP DEC SLEW RATE 1
123. OTALIZERS B25 REMAINING DDHH MM 2 1 123459 EU12 eT TREND 1 HI O2 1015 Y TOTLZRO 12345629 EUI2 011259 041297 TREND 3 ROLL Y 293 123456789 EUt2 ALARMSAMPLES 2 Y PROCESS LO EVENTSAMPLES BN TEMP8 CURR 2345 54 ee RR M ERE id 011259 04 1287 BE BE 12345 SYSTEMNORMAL PROCESS3 ie ie e DISK NORMAL YES TEARS CURI XNS UNS ENABLE STORAGE ENABLE 011259 25 aa A TEMPI HIGH A D DK ALL AIDIDBK FULL s m 12345 ae 12345 Storage Status Totalizer Alarm Summar Process Summary PRO SUM y STORAGE TOTALIZR ALARMSUM contains these screens Horizontal Trend Bar HTRNDBAR 4 Loop Bar LOOP 4BS Panel Meter PANMETER Figure 4 17 Displays Accessible by the Display Buttons Video Recorder User Manual 151 Programming Function Blocks and Features Display Setup Procedure Table 4 54 describes the display setup procedure Table 4 54 Display Setup Procedure Select Program Displays from the Program mode menu For each display format desired trend bar graph panel display unit data specify points to be displayed Assign up to 10 displays to the Display buttons Set Up Trend 1 Table 4 55 describes the trend display setup procedure Table 4 55 Set Up Trend 1 Prompts ENABLE Enables or disables a specific trend POINT 1 Analog or discrete Select up to 12 analog or discrete points to be displayed as a POINT 12 parameters vertical or horizontal trend Trends of discrete points will
124. OUT 1 IN HI LIM UT 1 OUT LO LIM OUT 1 OUT HI LIM OUT 2 IN LO LIM OUT 2 IN HI LIM UT 2 OUT LO LIM OUT 2 OUT HI LIM OUT 3 IN LO LIM OUT 3 IN HI LIM OUT 3 OUT LO LIM OUT 3 OUT HI LIM 134 Table 4 41 Advanced Splitter Prompts Range Selections OFF or number OFF analog parameter number OFF AOn BC LPn BC OFF or number OFF or number OFF or number OFF or number OFF or number OFF or number Definition Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits Input source Typically this is the output value OV of a Split Output type of loop Select the back calculation value BC of the analog output assigned to the A1 A2 and A3 outputs respectively Enter a range for A1 s input Defauts are 0 for low limit amp 30 for high limit When input is between these values A1 output is scaled between OUT 1 OUT LO LIM amp OUT 2 OUT HI LIM Enter OFF or a range for A1 s output Defaults are 0 for low limit amp 100 for high limit Scales A1 output Enter a range for A2 s input Defaults are 30 for low limit amp 60 for high limit When input is between these values A2 output is scaled between OUT 2 OUT LO LIM amp OUT 2 OUT HI LIM Enter OFF or a range for A2 s output Defaults are 0 for low limit amp 100 for high limit Scales A2 output Enter a range for A3 s input Defaults are 60 for low limit amp 90 for high limit When input is b
125. OV Anti Sooting Factor SP HIGH 0 Probe Temp CONSTANT CONTROL LP TYPE T F SAFE DOWN 0 0 Low Temperature 2800 0 Discrete DIRECT F SAFE DOWN CO LINEAR Config as req d OR by CO analyzer Burn Off Dewpoint Furnace Temperature FB PV FURNACE TYPE typ TEMPERATURE XXXXX X CONTROL LP 450 0 2800 0 DIRECT F SAFE UP Figure 4 11 Typical Carbon Potential Control Configuration 130 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Relative Humidity Outputs CVn OV relative humidity as a function of dry bulb temperature wet bulb temperature and atmospheric pressure Table 4 39 describes the Relative Humidity prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 39 Relative Humidity Prompts RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGEHIH HIGH NU BULB TEMP OFF analog parameter Dry bulb temperature in temperature units selected number WET BULB TEMP OFF analog parameter Wet bulb temperature in temperature units selected number ATM PRESS PA OFF analog parameter Enter atmospheric pressure in Pascals 101325 Pa Is number one standard atmosphere TEMPERATURE UNITS Select the temperature units for the calculation Units are for wet bulb and dry bulb Video Recorder User Manual 131 Programming Function Blocks and Features Steri
126. Operations Using Primary Displays Interacting with Panel 4 Display To stop the rotation of the panel display on a precise point series follow the procedure in Table 6 3 14 JAN 99 21 35 DEWP IM AIR OUT 177 6 212 3 DEG C DEG F PRESSURE 55 2 Figure 6 4 Panel Display Table 6 3 Stop Panel 4 Display Rotation Procedure Press Tab key Displays menu item SET HOLD at the lower right hand corner of the display 1 2 Press Tab key Displays the desired point series 3 Press Enter Holds display on desired point series An appears in the lower right of the display To resume rotation through all points follow the procedure in Table 6 4 Table 6 4 Resume Panel 4 Display Rotation Procedure Press Tab key Displays menu item REL HOLD at the lower right hand corner of the display The disappears and rotation resumes 214 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operations Using Primary Displays Interacting with Loop Displays LOOP 1 11 15 SP1 12 15 2500 00 PV 00 SP 2000 00 DEV 205 00 QUT 83 5 0 10096 1500 00 Digital Loop Loop with Bar Graph LOOP DIG LOOP BAR 1 LP2 1 1000 00 1500 00 1
127. P NEW SCHEDULES under the DATA STORAGE menu Up to Eight files may be written to disk while the instrument performs Data Storage four trend files one unit data file one alarm file one event file and one diagnostics file SET UP NEW SCHEDULES lets you designate several other parameters such as the data storage rate i e the distance in time between adjacent samples of a recorded process data parameter the eight character file names used to identify each process and diagnostic data file and whether or not the Data Storage takes place in continuous or batch modes Data Storage files may be configured to rollover after they have become full That is after the space on the disk for each file type has run out all of the oldest data on the disk is overwritten with the most recent data Video Recorder User Manual 75 Programming and Operating Concepts Initializing a ZIP disk To activate the new data storage schedules that have been configured in the SET UP NEW SCHEDULES menu requires you to initialize the DOS formatted disk to which process and diagnostic data will be stored This is done by executing a routine entitled INITIALIZE DISK also found in the DATA STORAGE menu This task can also be done on a PC The task of initializing a disk and activating data storage schedules are one in the same ATTENTION Initializing a disk is only necessary for performing Data Storage You do not have to initialize a disk to perform Con
128. PROP PROP PROP BAND 2 GAIN 2 BAND 2 GAIN 2 BAND 2 GAIN 2 LIMIT BAND 2 GAIN 2 BAND 2 GAIN 2 BAND 2 GAIN 2 RESET 2 RESET 2 RESET 2 SP HIGH LIMIT PROP RESET 2 RESET 2 RESET 2 BAND 2 GAIN 2 2 2 2 SPLOWLIMIT RESET 2 RATE 2 RATE 2 RATE 2 MANUAL RESET MANUALRESET MANUALRESET PVTRACKING RATER MANUAL RESET MANUALRESET MANUAL RESET APPROACH HIGH SP1 TRACKING HYSTERESIS MANUAL RESET SETPOINT 1 APPROACH HIGH HIGH HIGH APPROACH LOW APPROACH LOW MANUAL OFF SP1 TRACKING SETPOINT 2 APPROACH LOW APPROACH LOW SP1 TRACKING SP1 TRACKING INTERACTIVE SETPOINT 1 SP INC SLEW SP1 TRACKING SP1 TRACKING LIMIT SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 1 RESET LIMIT SETPOINT 2 SP DEC SLEW SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 1 LIMIT SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 2 LATCHING SP INC SLEW SP HIGH LIMIT SP INC SLEW SETPOINT 2 LIMIT LIMIT SP INC SLEW SP INC SLEW SP DEC SLEW SP LOW LIMIT SP DEC SLEW SP INC SLEW LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT SP DEC SLEW SP DEC SLEW SP HIGH LIMIT SOFT PID SP HIGH LIMIT SP DEC SLEW LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT SP HIGH LIMIT SP HIGH LIMIT SP LOW LIMIT FEEDBACK SP LOW LIMIT SP HIGH LIMIT SP LOW LIMIT SP LOW LIMIT SUPPRESS FEEDFORWARD RATIOSETPOINT SP LOW LIMIT OVERSHOOT SUPPRESS SUPPRESS SOFT PID FEEDFORWARD RATIO BIAS SUPPRESS OVERSHOOT OVERSHOOT GAIN OVERSHOOT PV TRACKING PV TRACKING FEEDBACK OUTPUT WILD VARIABLE PV TRACKING TRACKING SOFT PID SOFT PID FEEDFORWARD FORCE REMOTE PV TRACKING SOFT PID MAN FEEDBACK FE
129. Profiler How programs are stored on a disk Programs are saved to disk as a file name number and LNS extension Unlike memory storage you can specify which profiles you want stored as a program Disk capacity depends on the number of profiles in the program See Table 5 11 For example on a 4 Programmer instrument if you want to store Profiles 2 3 and 4 as a program you enter 2 at the prompt STARTING PROFILE to indicate that the lowest numbered profile to be stored will be Profile 2 At the prompt NUMBER OF PROFILES you enter 3 to indicate that 3 profiles will be stored Table 5 10 shows all possible combinations of profiles that can be stored to disk Table 5 10 How Profiles Are Stored On Disk 1 Programmer Instrumer 2 Programmer Instrument 3 Programmer Instrument 4 Programmer Instrument 1 Profile per Program Up to 2 Profiles per Progran Up to 3 Profiles per 1 Up to 4 Profiles per Progra 1 Starti J Profile Table 5 11 Disk Program Capacity Number of Profiles in Program Maximum Disk Capacity 224 programs 199 programs 200 Video Recorder User Manual Setpoint Profiler How to load a program from disk Table 5 12 Procedure To Load A Program From Disk 1 Press the Display button to change to online An online display is shown mode 2 Press the Menu button to display the online Online menu is displayed menu Profiles 5 Press Decrement button to highlight Load Prompt is highlighted
130. Program From Disk 7 Press Increment or Decrement to highlight Program is highlighted desired program file pe Press Enter to select Press Enter again to Program is loaded from the disk to the instrument load Video Recorder User Manual 201 Setpoint Profiler How to start a profiler A profiler can be started from the Ready Hold or End state Table 5 13 Profiler Starting Procedure Sm Hm Press Display button until the Setpoint Trend SP 1 P ROF 101 is displayed 0 00 PW 000 ue SP 0 00 SEG1 9 READY Press Tab button to display the profile menu S P 1 P RO FI LO 1 500 00 SHUTDOWN EVENTS DETAIL 0 00 0 00 00 SEG1 9 READY Cursor is on Start Press Enter Profiler starts running at segment 1 if in Ready or End or resumes running from its Hold state If in Ready state and Hot Start has been activated profiler will start at the first point in the profile where the present value of PV 1 occurs Event outputs assume their states as of the beginning of the running segment Profiler status on lower right of display indicates RUN after you start the profiler ATTENTION A profile can also be started by pressing the F1 button but only if that profile s START parameter was configured as SY1 F1 See Sectidn 5 4 202 Video Recorder User Manual Setpoint Profiler How to h
131. Programmed or Less programmed or is less than zero value greater than or equal to Than Zero zero Temperature Reference FO Sterilization CV Reference Temperature is not Program Reference Temperature Not Programmed or Less programmed or is less than zero with value greater than or equal to Than Zero zero Video Recorder User Manual 257 Diagnostic and error messages Table 9 4 Error Messages continued Description Trend Has Too Many Data Storage cannot store more than 3 points at 1 4 Change number of points to be Points For Rate Selected second scan rate compatible with scan rate Type Does Not Exist A function block type was loaded that does not exist Re program or re load correctly For example you loaded a Profile but the unit does not have the Profile option Type Incompatible With Analog output type is different from hardware setting Change programming to be Hardware Attempted to assign 6 relay as a DAT function compatible with the hardware or vice versa then reload configuration or reconfigure the block Type Requires Hardware Hardware is missing for the programmed analog Either ignore the message output or discrete output relay knowing that those particular points did not get loaded or verify configuration and make sure that the points that are in the configuration match the hardware components Undefined Function Block Internal Error No user action Request Value Written to An input has been
132. Programmer has ability to start a program at a predetermined time Number of 63 segments per profile Segments Ramping Capability Ramp X Ramp rate is set by specifying x degrees per second per minute or per hour Ramp T Ramp rate is set by selecting the time to go from previous setpoint to next setpoint in t time Ramp E Ramp rate is set to increment by ASP for every pulse of a digital input Value Duration Ramp Ramp rate is based on the start value of the ramp and the time specified to reach the next soak start value Ramp Time Range 0 9 999 999 hours minutes or seconds Soak Guaranteed or non guaranteed Can be applied to ramp or soak segment or across entire profile program Soak time range 0 9 999 999 hours minutes or seconds Program Cycling Entire programs or portions of a program can be cycled up to 99 times Loops can be nested up to 4 deep Startup Shutdown Can be set up to use a predefined startup profile separate from the normal processing programs Shutdown profile can be attached to the end of a profile and can be jumped to for emergency shutdown PV Hot Start Can start the profile at the point where the present PV value first intersects the profile Batch Programming 1 to 255 Batch numbers Batch number is assigned by the programmer and is incremented automatically when batch is started Using a keyboard or bar code reader and the front keyboard connector a batch can be labeled with a name of u
133. R Input SQRT where OPERATOR is of these add subtract multiply or standard deviation Standard Deviation uses all inputs Example Input A minus Input B minus Input H 2 OPERATOR Input A where OPERATOR is absolute value or square root 3 Input A OPERATOR Input B where OPERATOR is divide Note Inputs 3 8 are not used in division FEEDBACK OFF analog parameter Select LP BC or AO BC to propagate the back calculation number BC value from a downstream loop or AO Also program the upstream loop s feedback with this Math CV s back calculation value CV BC You MUST program this CV s feedback to NONE if this CV is not used as part of a control loop output configuration Figure 4 4 If it is part of a loop configuration the math operator cannot be ABSVAL SQRT or STDDEV Figure 4 4 Math CV Feedback Programming 114 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Free Form Math The output CVn OV is the result of a user specified equation QWERTY keyboard may be used for easier equation entry Table 4 23 describes the Free Form Math prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 23 Free Form Math Prompts OUT LOW LIMIT OFF or number Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when these limits are exceeded OUTHIGHLMT HIGH LIMIT See Table 4 24 Enter the equation using the keyboard See Table 4 24 for allowable characters and
134. RGIES a EE ia a LL enia 254 Alarm di tese cete adea fer 238 229 eterne 235 edit setpoints sseeeeene 232 Control Loop Programming Structure 90 NISTO PE 229 Control loops SUImmalty ssss BOTE IISQUE 228 progami an MEI entis tret Meter unte 90 what happens during een 229 Custom algorithm prompts 89 Alarm 229 Analog Input 232 D pleted puts DAD up NoD 90 ere RERO Rss 87 Data Ent 232 Analog outputs ata uie Cute dee rene ien Data storage program 101 heckini tset 224 Analog point values ing current setup displaying cote 230 checking STAINS ceteri 226 laying data See Trend interacting Analog 106 SeoM Approach High and 94 MSSSAJOS evade Auto Manual 94 replaying RUE mE starting and stopping 225 B typical tasks ice ete nem enum 222 Data Storage 166 222 Back Calculation esee 90 Set Up AUS ehe uus ee M ed
135. RUN 1 Check for noise 2 Increase scan rate to higher time for example from 500 msec to 1 second continued 252 Video Recorder User Manual Diagnostic and error messages Table 9 2 Internal Error Messages continued SLOT CARD FAILURE 1 Check for noise 2 Check AI card connection 3 Replace card STORAGE FAILURE 1 Check for bad floppy disk 2 Run disk diagnostic on the disk drive 3 Check seating of floppy cables 4 Replace CPU DATA STORAGE STATUS 1 Check for bad floppy disk LOST 2 Run disk diagnostic on the disk drive 3 Check seating of floppy cables 4 Replace CPU RJ FAILURE 1 Check reference junction sensor connection 2 Check card 3 Replace CPU CLOCK FAILURE 1 Reprogram clock 2 Reset unit 3 Change lithium battery on interconnection board 4 Replace CPU CLOCK RESET 1 Reprogram clock 2 Reset unit 3 Change lithium battery on interconnection board 4 Replace CPU TIMING ERROR 1 Reprogram clock 2 Reset unit 3 Change lithium battery on interconnection board 4 Replace CPU TASK ERROR 1 Reset unit 2 Clear configuration and reload 3 If message recurs replace CPU RAM ERROR 1 Run RAM diagnostic WENN NNI COMM PORT ERROR 1 Check communications card seating 2 Replace communications card 3 Replace CPU Video Recorder User Manual 253 Diagnostic and error messages 9 2 Loop Error Indicators When a loop s PV SP2 or other parameter fails the loo
136. Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Logic The input or inputs are processed by a logic operator Call the result of this logic operation Result Result is a pulse that goes ON 1 when the logic is true and OFF 0 when the logic is not true Result is then processed according to the specified condition type and condition time The final output is a discrete pulse CVn OS See Figure 4 5 CONDITION LOGIC Result DEC CVn OS OPERATOR CONDITION TIME Figure 4 5 Logic Signal Flow Table 4 25 describes the Logic prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 25 Logic Prompts OPERATOR AND OR XOR RESET SET FF See Table 4 26 TOGGLE FF ONE SHOT PASS INPUT A OFF discrete parameter 0 1 Program at least 2 inputs Only inputs programmed with parameter 1 or 0 are processed with the operator INPUT B INPUT C CONDITION TYPE NONE DELAY EXTEND PULSE See Table 4 20 on page 111 RT PULSE CONDITION TIME OFF or number Enter number of seconds of condition time See Table 4 20 on page 111 Video Recorder User Manual 117 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 26 Logic Operators Fortis operator enenatis AND If all programmed inputs are ON All programmed inputs ON 1 Result is ON ON 1 If at least 1 programmed input is ON At least 1 programmed ON 1 Result is ON input is ON 1 XOR Uses Inputs A and B only Input A is ON 1 a
137. S SUMMARIES DATA ENTRY SETPOINT PROFILES CALIBRATE ANALOG OUTPUTS RESET UNIT DATA STORAGE SET ANALOG OUTPUTS SETMODE ONLINE REVIEW PROGRAMMING TUNE LOOP CALCULATED VALUES l4 DISCRETE OUTPUTS DISCRETE INPUTS ALARMS gt TOTALIZERS H PROFILERS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS lt SECURITY H FEATURES COPY BLOCK CLOCK LOAD STORE CONFIG MAIN MENU PROGRAM OFF LINE DIAGNOSTICS DATABASE SERVICES CALIBRATE ANALOG INPUTS SETMODE MAINTENANCE MAINS FREQUENCY PRODUCT INFORMATION WARM START TIME DEMO Figure 3 2 Menu Navigation Guide Through ON LINE PROGRAM and MAINTENANCE mode MAIN MENUs MAIN MENU MAINTENANCE Once you have established which MAIN MENU you are on use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons to verify each MAIN MENU choice as indicated in Figure 3 2 Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons to find and highlight the menu s SET MODE prompt When the SET MODE prompt is highlighted press the Enter button Use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow buttons to switch the instrument to one of the other two instrument modes and press the Enter button Video Recorder User Manual 37 Programming and Operating Concepts 38 Once within the mode selected in Step 5 scroll through the mode s MAIN MENU using the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons Verify each menu choice as indicated in Figure 3 2 Repeat Steps 3 through 6 for the last o
138. S120 46210116 501 or ZIP disk 46210117 501 Panel mounting kit 46182649 501 Kit of 2 keys for key lock 46180091 003 Parts Backlight 46193065 501 Backlight igniter 461 woes LCD screen 46193062 501 cable of LCD screen 46193261 501 Keyboard card 46193310 501 e e Interconnection board 46190326 502 HMI board 46193301 501 Door switch 46193112 501 Internal 100M B ZIP drive 46193110 501 262 Video Recorder User Manual Appendix A Appendix A A 1 Security Bypass Procedure Overview Your instrument has a security bypass code which allows you to enter secured areas of the product Use this bypass code if you have forgotten or lost the master and or operator security code Bypass procedure Table A 1 Security Bypass Procedure 1 When you are prompted for the master or operator security code use the Increment and Decrement buttons to select the bypass code 783 the secured area press Enter Press the Display button to display the forgotten master or operator code To return to the previous menu without entering the secured area press the Menu button To enter ATTENTION Remove this page for security Video Recorder User Manual 263 Appendix A 264 Video Recorder User Manual Safety SIKKERHESKRAV DA21 6063 For at undg elektrisk sted me
139. T SEGMENT SEGMENT 1 2 3 4 5 a 1 SP1 EVENT OFF ON ON ON 16 Figure 3 26 Up To 16 Discrete Events May Be Programmed Per Step Of A Set Point Profile Discrete events whose ON or OFF states depend on the step number of the profile they are associated with may be externalized using the discrete output hardware available in the instrument Figure 3 2Tfeatures the function block diagram elements that represent how to program the instrument s discrete outputs so that their states coincide with those assumed by a profile s discrete events 72 Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts TYPE J THERMOCOUPLE 4 TO 20 External INPUT TYPE J RANGE LOW 0 RANGE HIGH 1000 TYPE STANDARD OUTPUT TYPE CAT SP1 500 IN LOW LIMIT 0 SP2 SP1 OV IN HIGH LIMIT 100 Switches GAIN 10 OUT LOW LIMIT 4 RESET 1 OUT HIGH LIMIT 20 P START RATE 0 dh DI2 101205 I ioi p SP1 RESET oe 013 EA SP1 E16 Figure 3 27 Tying A Profile Function Block s Discrete Events With Discrete Output Hardware Refer to your instrument s model number to verify its complement of discrete input and output hardware The available combinations of discrete inputs and outputs are featured in the Specifications section Video Recorder User Manual 73 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 15 Data Storage This instrument supports either floppy 1 44 MB or 100 M
140. The following topics are covered in this section Overview Programming Tips The Program Mode Menu Frequently used programming prompts Set Mode Enter Labels Program Analog Inputs Program Control Loops Program Analog Outputs Program Discrete Inputs Program Discrete Outputs Program Calculated Values Program Alarms Program Totalizers Program Profiles Program Constants Copy Block Program Displays Enable Features Program Security Serial Communications Set Clock Load Store Configuration Scan Rate Select Language Data Storage Video Recorder User Manual 79 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 2 Programming tips 80 See Section 3 for general programming procedures Before programming a function block s input parameter with a CV s Calculated Value output parameter you must program the CV first otherwise the CV s output parameter will not be available for programming The function block SY System Parameter operates internally and has no menu It automatically produces outputs which reflect the status of alarms data storage diagnostics and reference junction temperature These outputs can be programmed as inputs to function blocks See Table 3 5 in Section 3 Each function block can be labeled with custom descriptors and tags to identify the function on displays You can enter these labels under the menu item ENTER LABELS or within each function block s menu item See Section 4 4 Frequently
141. User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 74 Unit Data Prompts continued SELECT FILENAME FILE CYCLE DRYER Select a file name to identify the type of Unit data to be PROD RECORD TANK stored UNIT LOOP REACTR CONFIG KILN VESSEL CALIB WCHEM PRESS FURNCE DEMIN CONTRL BATCH FERMTR LEHR LINE STRLZR OVEN ZONE START HOUR 0 23 If no external enable is specified select a starting date and time and an interval for periodic storage Set Interval Days to 31 if you want the timed schedule to START MINUTE 0 59 repeat on the same day each month This timer schedule will run in any Data Storage mode In CONTINUOUS mode it will start as scheduled and START MONTH JAN DEC collect samples until stopped by manual command the ENABLE STORAGE in the Online Data Storage menu In BATCH mode the timer schedule will be started and START DAY 1 31 stopped by an Online menu selection BATCH STATE by the operator or by an optional discrete input designated as the BATCH CONTROL START YEAR 1994 2038 HORN D 59 INTERVAL MINS 0 Video Recorder User Manual 171 Programming Function Blocks and Features Disk capacity Choose DISK CAPACITY under SET UP NEW SCHEDULES menu to allocate trend storage See Table 4 75 Table 4 75 Disk capacity Prompts DISK CAPACITY Displays total time available for non rollover trend storage based on the low storage rates programmed See Table 4 76 Disk Storage Capacity of 100MB ZIP disk
142. V AI2 Ol THERMOCOUPLE NOTE 1 SP1is desired reaction vessel temperature 2 SP2 is the remote setpoint input of LP2 Figure 3 22 Function Block Diagram Of The Cascade Control Strategy Recall that based on the instrument s model number up to eight control loops LP1 through LP8 are potentially available for use within the instrument All control loops in this product may be programmed to operate using up to two user defined set point parameters designated by SP1 and SP2 Should you implement a control loop using one or both setpoints That depends on what is necessary to meet the requirements of the specific application being dealt with When in the on line mode and viewing a control loop s dedicated on line display the working set point of the live control loop can be switched between SP1 or SP2 by simply pushing the SP key on the instrument s front door Note that while both set point parameters may be programmed to have straight numeric values only SP2 may be defined as a remote set point That is SP2 may be set up so that its value is determined by the output value of another function block such as a setpoint profile In the cascade control strategy demonstrated in Figure 3 22 SP2 s remote set point functionality is exploited by the LP2 secondary cascade loop When this control configuration is made operational LP2 s working set point SP2 will have a value determined by LP1 OV In Figure 3 22 the process va
143. acts See Figure 2 6 DO Board Relay Contact Setting Use a pair of needle nose pliers and move the jumper from the location NC normally closed to the location NO normally open Video Recorder User Manual 25 Installation 2 O o Zoz 56 El eo olg alu Oz 55 2 oR m 0 4 perg p Lj Lj Lj jum Eres Es meg E E st o N Digital Output Board Normally Open Normally Closed Contacts Contacts Figure 2 6 DO Board Relay Contact Setting 2 5 7 Wiring communications This software package has been designed to operate with three kinds of serial communication standards which are RS232 RS422 and RS485 Refer to the following chapters for the wiring configuration of each of them For more details on the wiring please refer to your computer product manual 26 Video Recorder User Manual Installation 2 5 7 1 RS232 wiring configuration PC OR SERIAL PRINTER RS232 DIRECT LINK SOFTWARE APPLICATION VIDEO RECORDER Figure 2 7 RS232 wiring configuration 2 5 7 1 1 Switch configuration RS232 3 2 1 LEFT RIGHT away from PC board toward PC board Video Recorder User Manual 27 Installation 2 5 7 1 2 Interface connector e With DB9 connector Interface cable connectors pin arrangement and signal functions VIDEO RECORDER SIDE PC SIDE 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 5 43 2 1 Oee eoovcveo0O 0 000 e
144. age is reset to zero when ON 1 to parameter O 1 OFF 0 average M TIME UNITS Seconds minutes Time units of the averaging period hours or days AVERAGEPERIOD PERIOD OFF or number Number of time units per average period FRAME ELEM OFF or number Number of time units per Frame Period Must divide evenly into Average Period CALIBRATE HOLD OFF discrete When ON 1 no samples are taken and the output is held parameter 0 1 3 n If calibrate hold is set ON the function block stops acquiring samples however the averaging will continue to update for the remainder of the average period after which the output value will hold If calibrate hold is set ON longer than the average period the display will alternate between the last output value and indicating the current value is no longer valid If calibrate hold is set OFF and the CEM Rolling Average is not reset the CEM Rolling Average will continue to update every frame period from the last value If the CEM Rolling Average is reset the average value is set to zero and the displayed value will not update until the Average period has transpired The average value will update every frame period 142 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 13 Program Alarms You can program an alarm to be triggered by any extreme input value To program alarms select PROGRAM ALARMS on the Main Program Menu Select an alarm to progr
145. al Setpoint Profiler Table 5 8 Procedure To Load A Program From Memory Using Online Menu 1 Press the Display button to change to online An online display is shown mode 2 Press the Menu button to display the online Online menu is displayed menu Profiles 5 Press Decrement button to highlight Load Prompt is highlighted Program From Memory Press Enter to select Program Number prompt Cursor moves to the right Press Increment or Decrement to select the Program number is displayed desired program number to be loaded Press Enter to select Program number is selected 10 Press Enter again to load Program is loaded from the disk to the instrument Table 5 9 Procedure To Load A Program From Memory Using Point Detail Menu 1 Press the Display button to change to online An online display is shown mode 2 Press the Tab button to display the Point Detail Online menu is displayed menu 3 Press Decrement button to highlight Setpoint Cursor moves down Profiles 5 Press Decrement button to highlight Load Prompt is highlighted Program From Memory Press Enter to select Program Number prompt Cursor moves to the right Press Increment or Decrement to select the Program number is displayed desired program number to be loaded 9 Press Enter to select Program number is selected 10 Press Enter again to load Program is loaded from the disk to the instrument Video Recorder User Manual 199 Setpoint
146. al position eee Input parameter __ INPUT Select OFF Number or PARM i AL 1 OS Alarm state Input parameter p SETPOINT Select OFF Number PARM AL1S2 C ompare point Input parameter 1 Jd COMPARE POINT Select OFF Number or PARM Deviationialarm only Function block parameter HY STERESIS Select OFF or Number AL 1 PV Value of alarm s INPUT Function block parameter DELAY TIME Select OFF or Number Figure 3 7 Alarm 1 Function Block Components Input parameter A function block s input parameter can be configured to be OFF a number or it can receive its data from outside the block from another block s output codes These output codes are shown in Table 3 4 That is an input parameter is any menu item that can be programmed as connected to one of these output codes These output codes are grouped under the menu choice PARM When you are programming a function block and one of your choices is PARM you know you are programming an input parameter See Figure 3 7 For example suppose you are programming an alarm function block One of the alarm s menu items is INPUT which specifies which point will be monitored for an alarm condition One of the choices for the INPUT is PARM which lets you connect the INPUT to one of the output codes in Table 3 4 Therefore the INPUT is an input parameter because it receives its data from another function block Some function blocks can h
147. aler Video Recorder User Manual 265 Safety VEILIGHEIDSVEREISTEN DU21 6063 Ter vermindering van het gevaar van elektrische schokken die lichamelijk letsel kunnen veroorzaken dient u alle veiligheidsaanwijzingen in dit dokument te volgen Dit symbool waarschuwt de gebruiker voor een potentieel schokgevaar wanneer toegang bestaat tot onderdelen die onder gevaarlijke spanning staan Beschermende aarde aansluiting Bestemd voor aansluiting van de aardingsdraad van de voeding S e Indien de apparatuur wordt gebruikt anders dan door de fabrikant gespecificeerd kan de bescherming die de apparatuur biedt ongedaan worden gemaakt e Alleen die onderdelen mogen worden vervangen die door de fabrikant als uitwisselbaar zijn aangemerkt e Alle bedrading moet in overeenstemming zijn met de lokale elektriciteiseisen en moet aangelegd worden door geauthoriseerd ervaren personeel e De aardingsdraad moet worden aangesloten v rdat alle andere bedrading wordt aangesloten en als laatste worden verbroken e Het verdient aanbeveling een netschakelaar aan te brengen vlakbij het instrument APPARATUUR VOORWAARDEN Voedingsspanning 100 tot 240 V AC DC Frequentie 50 60 Hz Vermogen of stroomvermogen 100 VA Zekering 3 15 250 V AC DC OMGEVINGSCONDITIES Gebruik het instrument niet in de aanwezigheid van ontvlambare vloeistoffen of dampen Het gebruik van elk elektrisch instrument in een dergelijke omgeving vormt een gevaar voor
148. ally and cannot be programmed It automatically produces outputs which reflect the status of alarms data storage diagnostics and reference junction temperature These outputs can be used as inputs to function blocks How to program an input parameter with a number 56 Besides connecting an input parameter to another function block you can program an input parameter with a number The instrument will accept 999 999 to 9 999 999 Continuing with the previous example assume we want Loop 25 Setpoint 2 to be a number Therefore we must program Loop 72 s Setpoint 2 parameter with a number say 95 The following procedure shows how Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 6 Example Number Selection Procedure Using Front Panel Buttons In the Program Control Loops menu select LOOP 2 Consult the Program Control Loops section of this manual to learn about the menu item you wish to change namely SETPOINT 2 Press Down Arrow button to move the cursor to the menu choice SETPOINT Z2 Press Enter to move the cursor to the right side of the display where the choices for SETPOINT 2 are IH Er WEN The rightmost digit will slowly flash on and off indicating the cursor position Since we want to change the number to 95 00 press the Left Arrow until the ones digit flashes The Left Arrow moves the cursor to the left Press Up Arrow to change the 0 to a 5 To change the tens digit press Le
149. am REFERENCE When an alarm occurs it produces an output pulse which can be configured to trigger a discrete output such as a relay Refer to Section 4 11 for instructions Table 4 50 describes the Alarm prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 50 Alarm Prompts ON STATE See Table 4 3 for Enter labels for on and off states of alarm choices OFF STATE ALARM ACTION HIGH Alarm when input value 2 set point value LOW Alarm when input value x set point value DEV Deviation Alarm when input value deviates above or below compare point value by an amount 2 set point value HDEV High deviation LDEV Low deviation HRATE High Rate Alarm when input value increases at rate 2 set point value in units per minute Negative rate set points are processed as positive values May take up to 30 seconds to activate LRATE Low Rate Alarm when input value decreases at rate 2 set point value in units per minute Negative rate set points are processed as positive values May take up to 30 seconds to activate INPUT OFF analog Input source monitored by alarm parameter number SETPOINT OFF analog Point at which alarm occurs parameter number COMPARE OFF analog DEV type only It is the point against which the input point is POINT parameter number compared The difference between the input point and the compare point is the value which is measured against the alarm set point HYSTERESIS OFF or number Hysteresis affects only
150. ameter If input goes below this number the output will equal the number preset value Otherwise the output equals the input HIGH SELECT OFF analog parameter If input goes above this number the output will equal the number preset value Otherwise the output equals the input INPUT OFF analog parameter Input to be clamped number PRESET OFF analog parameter Output will go to this value when the input exceeds the number low or high select values Video Recorder User Manual 137 Programming Function Blocks and Features 1 Point Block Average 1 Pt Block Avg Outputs a block mean average CVn OV of the input over the specified Average Period A new sample of the input will be taken on every instrument scan cycle The block average is only updated at the end of the Average Period When the Reset Input is ON 1 all accumulated samples are discarded and the output is held until the Reset Input is OFF 0 then the averaging period resets Table 4 45 describes the 1 Point Block Average prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 45 1 Point Block Average Prompts Pomp Range Selections Definition RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGEHIGH HIGH OFF analog parameter This parameter will be averaged number OFF discrete parameter 0 1 When the Reset is ON 1 all accumulated samples are discarded and the A is
151. an upstream block in manual OR Loop has back calculation value from a downstream block that is bad or is the result of the downstream block being in manual Repeat pretune PTA AM SEL CHNGE Loop switched between automatic and manual modes Repeat pretune PTA SP SEL CHNGE Loop was in automatic mode and an attempt was made to switch between Setpoint 1 and Setpoint 2 Repeat pretune PTA OUT MOVED Loop was in manual mode and loop s output value changed Repeat pretune PTA SP MOVED Loop was in automatic mode and the setpoint value changed Repeat pretune PTA LOOP OS Loop is out of service Fix loop before repeating pretune PTA LOOP NOT CFG Loop is not configured Configure loop before repeating pretune PTA BAD STEP SIZ Step size is turned off Set step size to a value before repeating pretune Sge Table 7 1 1 PTA ONOFF LOOP Cannot pretune an on off type loop PTA BAD SN RATIO Increase step size Sek Table 7 1 e Table 7 1 PTA BAD OSC Repeat pretune with smaller gain or proportional band in loop PTA BAD ID VALUE Increase step size See Table 7 1 7 1 PTA DB ACCESS Unknown hardware problem Consult service PTA TASK FAIL Unknown hardware problem Consult service Video Recorder User Manual 241 Online Operation Using Menus 7 7 Set Mode Select this item to change the operating mode of the instrument to Program or Maintenance These operating modes are discussed in Sections 4 5 and 8 7 8 Review Pr
152. analysis Press the Display button to restore the primary display with the ZOOM limits A Z appears in the lower right of the display TIMEBASE Lets you change the timebase of the trend Choices are NORMAL use the trend s normal timebase ALTERN Alternate use the trend s alternate timebase Move the cursor box to the desired timebase and press Enter The trend will be redisplayed in the new timebase An arrow points to the current timebase Timebases are specified in the program mode Available for live trends only If a storage trend CHANGE WITH KEY is set to YES then changing the timebase will also change the storage rate of the storage trend That is if the live Trend1 is displayed in NORMAL timebase then the storage Trend1 will be stored at the LOW rate If the live Trend1 is displayed in the ALTERN timebase then the storage Trend1 will be stored at the HIGH rate Trend2 3 and 4 behave the same way NEW FILE Select to see the Replay From Disk menu from which you may select another stored file for replay Available for replay trends only 212 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operations Using Primary Displays TEMP7 1941 5 DEGF 1500 0 2500 0 lt Zoom cursor 12 15 N LS 11 45 11 15 p A t of A JALARM 1 HIGH Figure 6 3 Vertical Trend at 2X Zoom Video Recorder User Manual 213 Online
153. aps around to display 4 again See Table 4 64 on page 154 for more information on the Displays 42 Video Recorder User Manual Y v Y Y Display 1 Display 2 Display 3 Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 1 Button functions continued Operating mode in whicl function applies From any display or menu pressing this button changes the instrument to online mode and accesses the display programmed as Display 1 See Table 4 64 on page 154 for more information on Displays From any display or menu pressing this button changes the instrument to online mode and accesses the display programmed as Display 2 See Table 4 64 on page 154 for more information on Displays From any display or menu pressing this button changes the instrument to online mode and accesses the display programmed as Display 3 See Table 4 64 on page 154 for more information on Displays Note Changing to ONLINE mode by pressing any of the Display buttons can cause incorrect values to be displayed The values will correct themselves in a few seconds To avoid this potential annoyance first change to online mode by selecting SET MODE from the PROGRAM or MAINTENANCE menus then press a Display button to access the displays Video Recorder User Manual 43 Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 1 Button functions continued Symbol Operating mode in which function applies ewes man Auto In a loop di
154. ariable being PV HIGH LIMIT controlled Loop tuning parameters are based on the span selected by the high and low limit values PV TRACKING PV OFF A selection of Process Variable PV will cause Set point 1 of the control loop to track the process variable when the loop is in Manual mode A transfer to Automatic mode will maintain the tracked set point value as the working set point of the loop unless the loop was operating from Set point 2 prior to the transfer to Manual 96 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 10 Loop Prompts continued Promp Range Selections RATE 1 amp 0 02 10 00 minutes Modifies the loop output based on the rate of change of the RATE 2 process variable The output is modified by a value that assumes the rate of change of the process variable will continue for the time period specified Enter a starting value or OFF at the time of configuration The value may be altered Online for final loop tuning For loops with dual tuning Rate 1 is the rate for the first set of tuning parameters Rate 2 is for the second set Variable Rate1 is available by programming constant s Destination with RT Program Constants Section 4 16 RESET H amp 0 005 99 99 repeats minute Determines the period of time for a repeat of the proportional RESET 2 gain output Enter a starting value at initial configuration The value may be altered Online for final loop tuning For loops
155. arious loop parameters online These tunable parameters depend on the loop type in use and are described in Section 4 8 Program Control Loops Also the following menu choices are available LOOP TYPE V OUTPUT SETPOINT SOURCE Table 7 9 Tune Loop Prompts STD ADV SPLIT ON OFF CAS P CAS S RATIO DIAT STD Standard ADV Advanced SPLIT Split Output ON OFF On Off CAS P Cascade Primary CAS S Cascade Secondary RATIO Ratio DIAT DIAT 100 to 100 SP1 or SP2 Bold items are read only TOGGLE SETPOINT SOURCE SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 PROP BAND 1 GAIN 1 SP1 SP2 Number Number or parameter Enter a value of 0 1 to 200 for Gain or 0 5 to 1000 0 for Proportional Band Enter OFF to allow integral only control Variable Gaini or PB1 is available by programming a constant s Destination with GN or PB See Program Constants Section 4 16 Loop output 96 Indicates which setpoint is being used by the loop SP1 must be a number SP2 may be a number or a value from a function block remote setpoint Press Enter to change the Setpoint Source from SP1 to SP2 vice versa Enter the new value of SP1 Enter the new value of SP2 If SP2 is a remote setpoint you cannot change the value here See Gain 1 Gain is the proportional gain entry for the control loop The value entered here is the gain applied to the error signal to determine the loop output For example a 1096 change in
156. at this diagnostic s cause has been corrected you may clear the INPUT FAILURE message from all ON LINE screens by performing one of the following sequences of steps 1 Acknowledge the INPUT FAILURE diagnostic From the ON LINE main menu select ACCESS SUMMARIES Select DISPLAY DIAGNOSTICS Use the Up and Down buttons to highlight the INPUT FAILURE diagnostic s that you wish to acknowledge and then press Enter Once the diagnostic has been acknowledged it will still be listed in the DISPLAY DIAGNOSTICS screen but will no longer be displayed on any ON LINE screen 2 Delete the INPUT FAILURE diagnostic From the ON LINE main menu select ACCESS SUMMARIES Select DELETE ALL DIAGNOSTICS Once this menu choice has been executed all diagnostic messages will be deleted from the DISPLAY DIAGNOSTICS screen and will no longer be displayed on any ON LINE screen During power up if an analog input is open or is out of range the setpoint and process variable values will display OFF and the loop s AUTO mode is disabled Check connections to determine problem During calibration if the input reference voltages supplied by the technician are outside acceptable limits a CALIB FAIL message will be generated Video Recorder User Manual 251 Diagnostic and error messages Internal error messages In addition to diagnostic messages error messages are presented to indicate an internal fault To correct the problem Table 9 lists suggest
157. ata Summary or menus SELECT PEN PEN 1 Assign a color to each of up to 12 points Affects points COLOR PEN 2 displayed on all Trend live and replay Bar Graph Loop and Panel displays Pen 1 corresponds to Point 1 Pen 2 corresponds to Point 2 etc Choices Green Cyan Yellow Purple Blue Brown Red PEN 12 Black White Attention A Yellow pen appears yellow on a black background and orange on a white background Caution Do not select a white pen color for a white background or a black pen color on a black background these will render your points invisible continued Video Recorder User Manual 157 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 64 Assign Displays To Keys Prompts continued Promp RangeiSelections DISPLAY 1 FORMAT Select one of the following display formats The DISPLAY 2 corresponding format will be shown when the Display keys are pressed V TREND Vertical Trend VTRNDDIG Vertical Trend Digital VTRNDBAR Vertical Trend Bar VT 6DIV Vertical Trend 6 Division H TREND Horizontal Trend HTRNDDIG Horizontal Trend Digital HTRNDBAR Horizontal Trend Bar V 4 BAR 4 Point Vertical Bar Graph V 6 BAR 6 Point Vertical Bar Graph V 8 BAR 8 Point Vertical Bar Graph V 12 BAR 12 Point Vertical Bar Graph H 4 BAR 4 Point Horizontal Bar Graph H 6 BAR 6 Point Horizontal Bar Graph PANEL 4 4 Point Panel Display UNIT DATA Unit Data Display PANMETER Panel M
158. ated to each other that is you can give them different times and settings f you want the profilers to be coordinated you must configure each profiler that way For example if you want all your profilers to be started by the same signal you must configure each profiler with the same START parameter The Copy Block function in the Program menu lets you copy parameters from one profiler to another SPP synchronization Allows a multiple SPP user to synchronize several SPPs for when one enter hold due to a guaranteed hold the others will enter hold and when the one that entered hold leaver hold the others will leave hold also This is done by using a block output status called SG status guaranteed hold that is high when the block is in guaranteed hold mode If different SPPs are used the SPPx SG outputs should run through an OR block and then the output of the OR block back to the SPPx HOLD input The SG status output may be viewed on the discrete status screen Discrete inputs You can program a profiler with discrete inputs that enable you to reset start hold advance shut down or fast forward through the profiler hot start the profiler from a live process variable increment a ramp segment or enable disable guaranteed soak See Table 542 Note that some discretes are edge sensitive and some are level sensitive Edge sensitive means that the action is triggered by the discrete s transition from OFF to ON rising edge or from ON to OFF
159. ation Auxiliary input link to totalizer preset Discrete Output Output Status cannot program an input parameter with CV1 OV unless CV1 has been programmed Input to the following CV types Peak Pick 1 Point Block Avg 1 Point Rolling Avg Scaling Signal Select TL Totalizer Output Value Process Variable Totalizer s input Output Status Preset Value Video Recorder User Manual Paramete Type Analog Analog Analog Analog Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Analog Analog Discrete Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Discrete Discrete Analog Analog Discrete Analog Programming and Operating Concepts 3 11 How to program input parameters A function block has two types of programmable parameters input parameters and function block parameters When in a function block s Program menu if a menu item has choices OFF a number or PARM then the menu item is an input parameter to that function block That is if you choose PARM you can connect the input parameter to another function block s output code How to connect an input parameter to another function block One way to program an input parameter is to connect it to an output parameter from another function block We will show you this procedure using a specific function block s input parameter but the keystrokes used in the procedure will apply when you are making any input parameter connection
160. ature of the water will be measured by means of a three wire 100 Platinum RTD This process may be likened to manipulating hot and cold faucets regulate water temperature Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts In Figure 3 20 the analog input function block AI1 is depicted processing the resistance values produced by the RTD The resulting water temperature measurements Al1 OV are then fed to the process variable input PV of the LP1 control loop block Note how LP1 has been defined as a split output control loop using the notation TYPE SPLIT Unique to this control loop is the defined range of its output value LP1 OV Where the standard control loops mentioned thus far have had outputs ranging exclusively between 0 and 100 the values of the split output control loop vary between 100 and 100 0 is considered the midpoint for this control loop s output range When brought on line 0 to 100 output value will be generated by LP1 when hot water is needed to maintain the temperature at set point When the addition of cold water is necessary the loop s output will assume a value between 0 and 100 Note that to externalize the control signals generated by LP1 two analog output blocks AO1 and AC2 will be used AO1 s 4 to 20 mA signal will be tied to the hot water valve actuator while the actuator that adjusts the position of the cold water valve will receive its mA control signal from 2 To provide AO1
161. ave multiple input parameters For example an Alarm function block has an INPUT and a SETPOINT both of which can be connected to other function blocks Discrete Input function blocks have no input parameters that is they have no inputs that can be connected to another block s output codes Video Recorder User Manual 51 Programming and Operating Concepts Function block parameter A function block parameter s data is contained within the block When you are programming a function block and are not given a choice of PARM you are programming a function block parameter Typical choices when programming a function block parameter are NONE OFF any numerical value or a list of options for the parameter but not PARM See Figure 3 7 For example to program an Alarm function block s ALARM ACTION you select from a list of choices NONE LOW HIGH DEV LRATE HRATE Other function block parameters are an Analog Inputs RANGE LOW and RANGE HIGH where you specify the voltage range or temperature range Output code 52 An output code is the result of the function block s operations on the input parameters and function block parameters It is designated by one of the two character output codes shown in Table 3 4 An output code can be programmed to be the input to one or several other function blocks See Figure 3 7 Output codes are either discrete can be on or off or analog numerical value For example DI1 OS is the output status
162. be required to de energize the unit before servicing Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury Notice Time stamp and description of successful calibrations are stored to disk in the Event file Table 8 2 Calibrate Analog Output Procedure Connect the meter to the output 1 terminals Select CALIBRATE ANALOG OUTPUTS CALIBRATE ANALOG OUTPUTS 3 OUTPUT 1 LOW The menu will disappear and the meter will read approximately 4 mA CAT 4 Use the Increment and Decrement buttons to adjust the meter reading to the exact low value 4 mA Press Enter when done 5 Select OUTPUT 1 HIGH The menu will disappear and the meter will read approximately 20 mA CAT Use the Increment or Decrement buttons to adjust the meter reading to the exact high value Press Enter when done Repeat steps 1 6 to calibrate other CAT outputs steps 1 6 to calibrate other Repeat steps 1 6 to calibrate other CAT outputs outputs Press Menu to restore the main Maintenance menu 8 6 Off line Diagnostics The following table describes the prompts Table 8 3 Offline Diagnostic Prompts RAM SIZE KB Shows amount of RAM found during power up self test If less than 3072KB replace the CPU KEYBOARD TEST Select this to verify operation of each key When each key is pressed its name should appear onscreen An AT keyboard can also be tested if connected DISPLAY TEST Select this then press Enter to
163. below Select DISK CAPACITY to specify storage rates See page 172 Select WARNING LEVEL to define the capacity warning level Select INITIALIZE DISK then select USE NEW SCHEDULES to initialize the disk with the settings you created in steps 3 and 4 See section 3 15 Select SET UP NEW SCHEDULES to specify storage data mode and other settings See page 167 Enable storage Set to Enable to turn on storage If Disabled no storage will occur regardless of any other settings 166 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Set Up New Schedules This item contains setup menus for all data sets Select it to specify what data to store and how to store it If a type of data storage is not scheduled no disk file will be created for it ATTENTION If you make any changes to any item under SET UP NEW SCHEDULES you must initialize using new schedules to activate those changes The following items appear under SET UP NEW SCHEDULES and are described under the following headings e Trend Data 1 e Trend Data 2 e Trend Data 3 e Trend Data 4 e Alarms e Events e Diagnostics e Unit Data e Disk capacity e Batch Control Trend Data 1 At the top of the display the message SETUP IS CURRENT indicates that current setup for storage of TREND 1 is exactly as shown If the message is SETUP IS NOT CURRENT then the TREND 1 setup has been changed since a disk was last initialized To make a
164. ber of samples which can be stored in a file EVENT SAMPLES can be up to 1600 Depending on your selections data collection will begin when the first event occurs or when the first event occurs after a batch start Barcode data is also stored in the event file Video Recorder User Manual 169 Programming Function Blocks and Features Diagnostics Data storage for Diagnostics is a complete log of all diagnostic messages It includes the diagnostic code or identifier message and its time and date of occurrence Setup is done with the following parameters STORAGE MODE ROLLOVER DIAG SAMPLES EXTERNAL ENABLE SELECT FILENAME See Table 4 72 for descriptions Depending on your selections data collection will begin when the first diagnostic occurs or when the first diagnostic occurs after a batch start occurs When calibration is executed the record is time stamped and stored to the diagnostic file The number of samples which can be stored on a disk DIAG SAMPLES can be up to 1600 Unit Data Values for up to 12 points analog input calculated value discrete input discrete output totalizer etc can be sampled at user definable intervals and stored on floppy disk The sample interval must be set by a schedule or triggered by a discrete event Prompts are described in Table 4 74 Table 4 74 Unit Data Prompts POINTS OFF or analog parameter or Enter up to 12 points POINTS 12 discrete parameter STORAGE MODE OFF CONTIN
165. calibration routine After calibration of 096 value is completed apply a 100 range value to the channel input terminals and then begin the calibration routine for 100 input high point calibration When 100 range value calibration is completed the controller compares the new 0 and 10096 range values against the current 0 and 10096 values If the span of the 0 and 100 readings is less than 20 of the sensor range the new values are rejected and the current calibration is retained Each channel must be calibrated for the specific input type to be applied to that channel Calibration values can be copied from one channel to all other channels of like input type and range NOTE Signal generators should have an accuracy of at least 0 05 96 The type of wires depends on the sensor used Wait for 5 minutes after that particular sensor is connected for compensation wires only WARNING In thermocouple pay attention to the ambient temperature If you are using a mV generator instead of direct thermocouple generator the leadwires are in copper and you have to subtract from the mV value the mV corresponding to the ambient temperature of the rear terminals This eliminates the effect of the cold junction compensation Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury Video Recorder User Manual 245 Maintenance Additional calibration selections allow you to perform other calibration procedures
166. ce not in terms of the output as defined by OUTPUT LOW LIMIT amp OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT Variable slew limits are available by programming a constant s Destination with IS or DS See Program Constants Section 4 16 Select failure action to occur on input signal loss If VALUE is selected enter the value desired in FAILSAFE VALUE The value at which the output will be held for failsafe This value is also the initial output of the loop on cold start If the value is set to OFF the output will go to 0 Value entered is in terms of the AO s input source not in terms of the output as defined by OUTPUT LOW LIMIT amp OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT The cycle time in seconds for On and Off time of the output For example a time of 150 seconds will cause the output to be on for 75 seconds and off for 75 seconds when the input source is at 50 Variable impulse time is available by programming a constant s Destination with IT Program Constants Section 4 16 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 13 Analog Output Prompts continued MIN ON TIME OFF or gt 0 The minimum on time in seconds for the output If the input source calls for the output to be on for less than this time the output will not turn on at all Example 1 Impulse Time 100 Min On Time 5 seconds The output will not come on unless the input source is gt 5 For instance if input source 3 output would be on for 3 of imp
167. configuration into the instrument ATTENTION Only function blocks that have been programmed are loaded to the instrument Function blocks in the receiving instrument are not replaced unless the incoming function blocks are programmed differently For example if the instrument has Al1 and Al2 programmed and the configuration being loaded from the floppy contains only then Al1 and AI2 are undisturbed on the instrument and AIS3 is added If the configuration being loaded contains a different AI2 and a new AIS then Al1 is undisturbed AI2 is replaced by the different Al2 and AI3 is added Video Recorder User Manual 163 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 24 Scan Rate Scan rate is the time required to measure inputs execute function blocks Al Loops AO DI DO CV etc and update outputs It is also known as the machine cycle scan cycle and update rate The Scan Rate prompt lets you set the scan rate of the instrument to a value slower than the maximum rate allowed by the hardware The hardware will determine the default scan rate Allowable entries are 250 milliseconds 500 milliseconds 1 second 2 or 3 seconds 250 ms rate is only available on 4 input units We recommend the following scan rates for the following configurations Table 4 70 Suggested Scan Rates 250 msec 500 msec 500 msec 1 sec 750 msec 1 sec 1 sec 1 5 sec 1 5 sec 2 sec 2 0 sec 2 sec 3 0 sec 3 sec NOTE These are suggeste
168. connected and user has tried to Avoid changing connected values Indirected Point write a value to that input For example if a control loop setpoint is connected to 11 OV you will receive this message if you try to change the loop setpoint online X Axis Must Increase Appears if Al is custom type or CV is Function Re program Xn 1 Generator and if Xn gt Xn 1 X Axis Not Increased Appears if Al is custom type or CV is Function Re program X Enough Generator and if X does not increase by at least 0 00001 Y Axis Not Increased Appears if Al is custom type or CV is Function Re program Y Enough Generator and if Y does not change by at least 0 00001 258 Video Recorder User Manual Parts 10 Parts Table 10 1 Parts Kit Description CK N ELECTRONIC SOFTWARE Power supply 189 HMI board 241 CPU board 242 Interconnection board 243 Relay output board with terminals 192 DC digital output board with terminals 192 AC digital output board with terminals 192 Analog output board with terminals 222 Contact closure input board with terminals 192 Universal analog input board with terminals 192 DC digital input board with terminals 192 AC digital input board with terminals 192 Keyboard card 248 Backlight igniter 249 Communication board 214 Firmware upgrade Communication MECHANICAL PARTS Door complete with LCD glass window and latch 46193090 501 244 Door complete with LCD glass window and lock 46193090 502 244 D
169. crete Storage Warning Discrete Analog Safe Parameter Analog Discrete Safe Parameter Discrete F1 or Start Key on keyboard Discrete F2 or Hold Key on keyboard Discrete F3 or Reset Key on keyboard Discrete F4 Discrete F5 Discrete F5 Analog Output OV Output Value BC Back Calculation Value Feedback Process Variable AO s input OV Control Loop Output Value Analog Process Variable Analog Deviation Value Analog Working Setpoint Analog Setpoint 1 Value Analog Setpoint 2 Value Analog Back Calculation Value Cascade feedback Analog Auto Manual Status Discrete Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 Status Discrete ON OFF Loop only Output Status Discrete Video Recorder User Manual 53 Programming and Operating Concepts Functio Block CV output codes are available for programming only if the CV has been programmed For example you Table 3 4 Function Block Parameter Designators continued Output code Function Block Setpoint Profiler Parameter Name Output Value Auxiliary Output Value Process Variable Guaranteed Soak PV 1 Segment Number Hold Status End Status Active Status Active or Hold Status Ready Status Event 1 Output thru Event 9 Output Event 10 Output Event 11 Output thru Event 16 Output Process Variable alarm s input Compare Point of Deviation alarm Output Status Output Value Process Variable Constant s input Output Value Process Variable Analog Output Back Calcul
170. ction chamber is determined by the temperature of the heated oil surrounding it Heating the oil is done by an electric heating element driven by a 4 to 20 mA controlled SCR and external power source In this application the instrument controls the temperature of the chemical reaction chamber through control of the heat emitted by the jacket tank oil The instrument must provide a single 4 to 20 mA control output to govern the voltage switched by the SCR and hence the heat applied to the entire system Temperature is monitored with thermocouples The function block diagram of the required instrument configuration is featured in Figure 3 22 Note that this diagram illustrates the classic cascade arrangement of two control loops that defines the cascade control strategy The first control loop LP1 is designated as the primary cascade loop by the notation CAS P The notation CAS S indicates LP2 s designation as the secondary cascade loop Note how both control loops are joined together In addition to the back calculated feedback path set up between the two LP2 BC LP1 s output is connected to an input on LP2 that at this time must be introduced Denoted as SP2 this input is LP2 s remote set point input Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts LP2 BC AO1BC REACTION OV FB VESSEL All PV LP1 OV THERMOCOUPLE FB 4 TO 20 mA TYPE CAS P 5 1 12345 CAS S AI2 O
171. d Distributor contact one of the offices below ARGENTINA Honeywell S A 1 C Belgrano 1156 Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 54 1 383 9290 ASIA PACIFIC Honeywell Asia Pacific Inc Room 3213 3225 Sun Kung Kai Centre 30 Harbour Road Wanchai Hong Kong Tel 852 829 82 98 AUSTRALIA Honeywell Limited 5 Thomas Holt Drive North Ryde Sydney Nsw Australia 2113 Tel 61 2 353 7000 AUSTRIA Honeywell Austria G M B H Handelskai 388 A1020 Vienna Austria Tel 43 1 727 800 BELGIUM Honeywell S A 3 Avenue De Bourget B 1140 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 728 27 11 BRAZIL HONEYWELL DO Brazil And Cia Rua Jose Alves Da Chunha Lima 172 Butanta 05360 050 Sao Paulo Sp Brazil Tel 55 11 819 3755 BULGARIA HONEYWELL EOOD 14 Iskarsko Chausse POB 79 BG 1592 Sofia BULGARIA Tel 359 791512 794027 792198 CANADA Honeywell Limited The Honeywell Centre 300 Yorkland Blvd Toronto Ontario 2 151 Canada Tel 800 461 0013 Fax 416 502 5001 CZECH REPUBLIC HONEYWELL Spol S R O Budejovicka 1 140 21 Prague 4 Czech Republic Tel 422 6112 3434 DENMARK HONEYWELL A S Automatikvej 1 DK 2860 Soeborg DENMARK Tel 45 39 55 56 58 FINLAND HONEYWELL OY Ruukintie 8 FIN 02320 ESPOO 32 FINLAND Tel 358 0 3480101 FRANCE HONEYWELL S A B timent le Mercury Parc Technologique de St Aubin Route de l Orme CD 128 91190 SAINT AUBIN FRANCE Tel from France
172. d after a failure to the failsafe status When the loop s PV or Set point 2 fails the downstream function block activates its failsafe See Table 9 3 Default condition column If latching YES when the failure is corrected the operator must take specific action to cancel these failsafe measures and return the loop to normal operation See Table 9 3 for action needed If latching NO when the failure is corrected the loop will automatically return to normal operation with no action needed by the operator MANUAL OFF OFF discrete parameter 0 When this discrete input goes ON 1 it causes the control 1 output to go off MANUAL RESET 100 to 100 This feature functions only when OFF is entered for RESET Enter a value equal to the desired loop output when the process variable is at set point This allows correction of output to account for load changes to bring the process variable up to set point OUTPUT LOW LIM amp OFF or number For cascade primary loop set to PV LOW LIMIT and PV OUTPUT HIGH LIM HIGH LIMIT of the cascade secondary loop respectively OUTPUT TRACKING 0 100956 Analog parameter This will be the loop s output value when the FORCE OFF REMOTE MAN input to the loop is high 1 See Force Remote Man PROCESS OFF analog parameter Process variable for the loop VARIABLE number PROP BAND 1 amp See GAIN 1 OR GAIN 2 PROP BAND 2 PV LOW LIMIT amp OFF or number Enter the high and low limits for the process v
173. d mulighed for personskade skal alle sikkerhedsbestemmelser i denne manual f lges n je Dette symbol advarer brugeren om en potentiel bergringsfare s fremt der kan veere adgang til den livsfarlige netspaending Beskyttende jordterminal Terminalen er forberedt for og skal forbindes til beskyttelses jordledning i henhold til steerkstremsberkendtgerelsen DK eR e Hvis udstyret ikke bruges som specificeret i manualen kan den beskyttelse udstyret yder blive nedsat eller forsvinde e Eerstat kun komponenter som udtrykkeligt er specificeret som udskiftelige i manualen e Alle ledningsforbindelser skal f lge steerkstramsberkendtggrelsen DK og udf res af autoriseret erfarent personel e Den beskyttende jordterminal skal forbindes f rst af alle forbindelser og fjernes som den sidste e Det anbefales jvf steerkstremsberkendtgerelsen at der installeres en afbryder til frosyningsspaendingen n r udstyret UDSTYRS SPECIFIKATIONER Str mforsyning 100 til 240 V AC DC Frekvens 50 60 Hz Nominel effekt 100 VA Sikringsv rdi 3 15 A 250 V AC DC OMGIVELSES SPECIFIKATIONER Placer ikke udstyret i n rheden af brandbare v sker eller dampe Temperatur Rumtemperatur 5 til 40 C Opbevaring 20 til 60 C Fugtighed 10 til 90 RH ikke kondenserende 40 C Vibration 10 til 40 Hz amplitude 0 07 mm 40 til 60 Hz acceleration 0 2 g UDSTYRS INSTALLATION Skriveren skal monteres i en tavle for at forhindre adgang til bagtermin
174. d scan rates In general if your instrument responds too slowly use a slower higher scan rate You can use a faster lower scan rate than suggested here but be aware of possible sluggish display and button response time 164 Video Recorder User Manual 4 25 Select Language SELECT LANGUAGE on the Main Program Menu changes the instrument s language to English Spanish German French Italian Programming Function Blocks and Features Video Recorder User Manual 165 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 26 Data Storage Overview Data Storage lets you store trends unit data alarms events and diagnostics in separate files on a floppy disk for later analysis and review replay Data can be reviewed onscreen or on a PC with SDA data analysis software or the TrendManager Pro V5 software suite Set point Programs instrument configurations and calibrations are not part of the Data Storage feature Setup and configuration of Data Storage is described in this section Online operation is described in Section 7 4 Setup procedure Data Storage setup is performed Online to avoid interruption of current storage The steps are described briefly Table 4 71 Table 4 71 Data Storage Setup Procedure Access DATA STORAGE Online Insert an initialized 100MB ZIP disk into the drive If necessary initialize disk using FORMAT DISK See Opening Closing the Front Door in Section 3 8 Select ENABLE STORAGE See Enable Storage
175. e 169 Batch Gontrol aee Ru 175 Set Up 170 Bumpless Transfer 94 Spesso noo mr rS 169 Button f nctionS e 41 Set Up Trend 172 C Set Up Trend Data 1 167 Set Up Trend Data 2 3 amp 4 169 Calculated Value Set Up Unit 170 GOmpal ie DOR 109 Database Services 248 COUTE s a seite roe eite re TOM 113 Delete All 230 Free Form Logic esee 119 Detroit ee teniente p 250 Free Form 115 Diagnostic 117 230 114 deletng all 2 cente 230 Peak Picking cnet tenente 107 what happens during 230 Signal Select re egere 108 Diagnostic messages 251 Calculated values Discrete program RR 106 PR 232 Calculated 90 Discrete inputs Calibrate program iste tke mie iuis 104 Anal
176. e DI ON state changes before the delay time expires no ON output will be indicated EVENT ENABLE NONE RISING FALLING Determines whether changes in Dl s status can be recorded BOTH as events in data storage NONE status changes are not stored RISING OFF 0 to ON 1 changes can be stored FALLING ON 1 to OFF 0 changes can be stored BOTH Both changes can be stored 104 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 11 Program Discrete Outputs Discrete Output function blocks control the relay or open collector output hardware The Program Discrete Outputs menu item will appear if a Discrete Outputs board is installed ATTENTION If a discrete output has been assigned to a time proportioning output DAT it will not be programmable here See OUTPUT RELAY in Table 4 13 Select a DO to program then program the prompts in Table 4 15 See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 15 Discrete Output Prompts ACTION STATE NORMAL INVERT Determines whether the relay will normally be energized or de energized when the DO s Input is ON 1 To select energized when ON enter NORMAL not inverted To select energized when OFF enter INVERT inverted INPUT OFF discrete parameter 0 Source of the Discrete Output 1 EVENT ENABLE NONE RISING FALLING Determines whether changes in DO s status can be recorded BOTH as events in data storage For storage to occur Data Storage must also be progra
177. e input The Programmer is running at a 500msec scan rate The TIME MULTIPLIER is set to 60 Therefore the profiler will run 60 times faster than normal The profiler will increment in 6500msec x 60 or 30 second increments Put another way every half second the profiler will advance 30 seconds Values sampled at each during fast forward 150 lg 130 lt q 107 t 100 Sample interval 30 seconds 200 4 175 60 x 500 msec gt Normal time of segment Fast forward time 110 seconds 130 seconds 120 seconds 2 seconds 2 seconds 2 seconds uu lt q sampled value profile is sampled Time Multiplier 60 Scan Rate of machine 500 msec Therefore every half second the profile is incremented 30 seconds Segment 2 begins between samples Segment 42 s events not recognized until next scan cycle Figure 5 11 Fast Forward Video Recorder User Manual 187 Setpoint Profiler Parameter nam gt Definition Triggere Conditions by present SHUTDOWN When Shutdown is activated by a discrete Profiler is in Profiler input or by the operator menu the profiler Run Hold or jumps to jumps from the batch phase to the shutdown End BATCH phase of a multiphase profile The shutdown LAST phase begins at the segment defined by the SEGMENT parameter BATCH LAST SEGMENT 1 1 Shutdown is useful when you need to shut down your process without waiting for the profiler
178. e introduction of cold water into the vessel to cool its contents down Note the function block diagram s use of three back calculated feedback paths Two such paths are labeled AO1 BC and AO2 BC They are connected to CV1 from the analog output function blocks at inputs denoted FB1 and FB2 CV1 BC the third feedback path runs from CV1 to the FB input of LP1 All three feedback paths work together to acknowledge to LP1 that the appropriate output signals have been generated in response to the output levels the loop has called for Video Recorder User Manual 67 Programming and Operating Concepts Cascade Control 68 An example of a cascade control application is featured in Figure 3 21 Cascade control is typically used when two process values must be simultaneously controlled with one process value directly influencing the behavior of the other In this control strategy each process value is supported by its own dedicated control loop The term cascade is used because it describes how this control approach literally attaches both control loops together This act of linking control loops allows for the regulation of both process values using one and only one output control signal INSTRUMENT THERMOCOUPLES PV 200 SP 500 OUT 83 5 4 TO 20 mA CAT AC POWER SOURCE Figure 3 21 Temperature Control Of An Oil Heated Chemical Reaction Chamber InFigure 3 21 the temperature in a chemical rea
179. easing or not always decreasing Video Recorder User Manual 255 Diagnostic and error messages Table 9 4 Error Messages continued Gesn Incorrect Input The Advanced Splitter CV was programmed with Re program input limits for coordinates input limits for Output 2 A2 only or for Outputt1 amp Output 1 only Outputs 1 amp 2 3 A1 amp only or for Output 3 only or Outputs 1 2 amp 3 Incorrect Number of The function was not programmed with the minimum Program function with at least the Parameters for function number of parameters for example the Math CV minimum number of parameters requires at least 2 inputs to function properly Incorrect Output The Advanced Splitter CV was programmed with Re program output limits for Coordinates output limits for Output 2 A2 only or for Output amp Output 1 only Outputs 1 amp 2 3 A1 amp only or for Output 3 only or Outputs 1 2 amp 3 Invalid Algorithm Code Bad algorithm code has been given bad algorithm Verify programming of affected choice Probably caused by someone incorrectly function block editing the configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file Invalid Block Number Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the Verify programming of affected configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file function block Invalid Block Type Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the Verify programming of affected
180. ector is located on the front door of the instrument Lift the rubber cap 1 to connect the mini DIN connector 2 Figure 3 6 Connection of a keyboard or a barcode reader Video Recorder User Manual 47 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 8 Installing and removing a floppy disk To install or remove a floppy disk from the instrument open the door as described in the following drawings NOTE recording on the disk stops when door is open Open the door latch Door with key lock Door with latch 48 Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts 3 9 Definition of Function Blocks Definition A function block is a unit of software that performs a set of operations on its input parameters and function block parameters and produces output parameters These output parameters can be programmed as inputs to other function blocks whose output parameters can be programmed as inputs to other function blocks and so on By programming all desired function blocks input parameters and function block parameters you configure the instrument to measure and control your process Types of function blocks Each function block performs a set of operations which fulfills a unique purpose For example the Analog Input function blocks processes the analog input data the alarm function block processes alarms and so on Table 3 3 describes each function
181. ed actions you should take in the order you should take them To acknowledge or clear the error message see Section 7 2 Access Summaries Table 9 2 Internal Error Messages NONV RAM ERROR 1 Reduce the configuration by eliminating function 2 Call service provider PROCESSOR EXCEPTION 1 Reset unit 2 Clear configuration and reload 3 If message recurs replace CPU PROCESSOR RESET 1 Reset unit 2 Clear configuration and reload 3 If message recurs replace CPU TASK INIT FAILURE 1 Reset unit 2 Clear configuration and reload 3 If message recurs replace CPU QUEUE READ FAILURE 1 Reset unit 2 Clear configuration and reload 3 If message recurs replace CPU RESPONSE FAILURE 1 Reset unit 2 Clear configuration and reload 3 If message recurs replace CPU REQUEST FAILURE 1 Reset unit 2 Increase scan rate to higher time for example from 500 msec to 1 second 3 Clear configuration and reload it 4 If message recurs replace the CPU AED REPORT FAILURE 1 Reset unit 2 Increase scan rate to higher time for example from 500 msec to 1 second 3 Clear configuration and reload it 4 If message recurs replace the CPU AED HANDSHAKE FAILURE 1 Reset unit 2 Increase scan rate to higher time for example from 500 msec to 1 second 3 Clear configuration and reload it 4 If message recurs replace the CPU FB TASK OVERRUN Increase scan rate to higher time for example from 500 msec to 1 second AI TASK OVER
182. el of the same function block For example if you have programmed Al1 and want AI2 to have the same settings use Copy Block If desired you can make program changes to AI2 after the copy is complete If your instrument can run multiple profiles at the same time Copy Block is useful for copying the parameters of one profile to another For example if your instrument can run 2 profiles it may be useful to have both profiles use the same switches for starting holding and resetting After you program the first profile s parameters use Copy Block to copy Profile 1 to Profile 2 Table 4 53 describes the Copy Block prompts Table 4 53 Copy Block Prompts BLOCK TYPE Al AO AL CN CV DI Select the function block type to be copied DO LP TL SP Al Analog Input AO Analog Output AL Alarm CN Constant CV Calculated Value DI Discrete Input DO Discrete Output LP Control Loop SP Set point Profile TL Totalizer FROM NUMBER NUMBER Enter the channel number to be copied TO NUMBER NUMBER Enter a channel to copy to or ALL if you want to copy this block to all other channels COPY BLOCK Select this to do the copy A verification prompt lets you continue or abort the copy Video Recorder User Manual 149 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 18 Program Displays You can configure up to 10 primary displays using one or more display formats shown in Figure 4 17and assign them to appear in specified order
183. elect DISPLAY DIAGNOSTICS to display a list of diagnostics Unacknowledged diagnostics will be flashing Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button and a cursor will appear on the display Use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button to position the cursor on a flashing diagnostic and press Enter to acknowledge the diagnostic The flashing will stop and the cursor will disappear If you do not press any button for a period of 5 seconds the cursor will disappear This is a safety feature because while the cursor is visible on the display the display is temporarily disabled and a new diagnostic will not be shown If there are more flashing diagnostics press the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons to restore the cursor Display All Analogs Displays current value of all analog points in the instrument These include all analog I O loops calculated values totalizers and system parameters Only those points that have been programmed will be displayed Display All Discretes Displays current status of all discrete points in the instrument These include all discrete I O alarms loops calculated values totalizers and system parameters Only those points that have been programmed will be displayed Delete All Diagnostics A diagnostic is not automatically cleared from the summary when the error has been found and correcteq Table 718 gives the procedure for deleting the diagnostics 230 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operation Using Menus
184. er Manual 179 Setpoint Profiler Hate Ramp Type Each ramp segment s TIME specifies the rate at which the profiler output will reach the next soak segment where the rate is specified by the prompts TIME TIME UNITS The ramp segment s VALUE prompt is not used Ramp Type Rate Features of this ramp type First and last segments must be soaks No consecutive ramps or soaks Ramp segments Time rate at which next soak Value will be reached in PV units Time Units Example Time 3 Time Units Seconds PV units degrees Therefore profile will ramp to next soak Value at 3 degrees F per second Value not used with ramp segments Segment 3 Soak segments Value Time duration of soak Value value of soak Segment 1 Value 9 gt Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Time Time Rate Time Figure 5 5 Rate Ramp Type ATTENTION Rate ramp type s TIME prompt is in engineering units of the PV not in time units seconds minutes or hours External Ramp Type This ramp type works with the RAMP INCREMENT discrete input During a ramp segment each time RAMP INCREMENT changes from OFF to ON the profiler output incrementally changes by the amount specified in the ramp segment s TIME in units of the PV When RAMP INCREMENT changes from ON to OFF the profiler output soaks at its present value This increment soak repeats until the profiler output reaches the VALUE of the next soak segment
185. er counts to zero from this number of minutes number RESET RUN OFF discrete parameter 0 1 Controls the operation of the timer RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGE HIGH Video Recorder User Manual 125 Programming Function Blocks and Features Periodic Timer Generates a discrete output pulse CVn OS which is ON 1 for 1 machine cycle 250ms 500ms 1 sec at specified Start time and repeated at a specified Period thereafter Use this to activate a discrete parameter at a particular time and at regular intervals lt P Period Start Time of first pulse Hours Min Sec Day Hour Min Sec CVn OS pulses ON at Start Time and at every Period Figure 4 10 Periodic Timer Table 4 35 describes the Periodic Timer prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts 126 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 35 Periodic Timer Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition SET UP TIMER See Table 4 36 for prompts Selects the timer format Table 4 36 Set Up Timer Prompts SN NONE DAILY WEEKLY Select the timer format Remaining prompts will vary per MONTHLY phase selected PERIODHOURS HOURS Number of hours in the period LL MINUTES Number of minutes in the period PERIOD SECONDS Number of seconds in the period OFF discrete parameter 0 1 Phase NONE only When
186. ermocouple with cold junction compensation for operation between 0 to 80 C 32 to 176 F Line resistance up to 1000 ohms T C mV mA V RTD 3 wire connections 40 ohms balanced max Input Impedance 10 Meg Q for T C mV inputs gt 1 Meg Q for volt inputs S lot ID Therm ocouple input Current Inputm A 4 to 20 Channel4 mA E Ground Term inal Channel 3 Ground Term inal A 250 ohm resistor is required for the inputrange m V V Inputs RTD Input 3 w ires Channel2 RTD Channeli G round Term inal G round Term inal Figure 2 1 Al Board Terminal Block Connections 10 ohm Copper with common ground lead Grounded lead of i All RTD connections are RTD should be Aes common on Universal connected to RTD i board terminal of VRX terminal block Figure 2 2 10 ohm Copper connections 22 Video Recorder User Manual Installation 2 5 4 Digital Inputs Boards Three types of Digital Input DI boards accept three types of input signals 1 Logic Input 2 DC Input 3 AC Input Each type is described on the following pages Figure 2 3 shows the terminal block connections for all DI boards See Section 1 for details on all I O board specifications Contact Closure 84 Logic input nii 7 NA 1111 24 VDC 7 lt gt I DC input 7 120 240 lI DAA Ili AC input
187. ervices 248 Reset Unit 248 Product Information 248 Mains Frequency 248 Warm Start Time 249 Demo 250 244 Video Recorder User Manual Maintenance 8 2 Routine Maintenance CAUTION Calibrate the instrument routinely to ensure conformity to specifications Calibration is to be performed by qualified service personnel only Clean the front panel with a damp cloth If needed use a detergent containing no abrasives Always clean the front panel with the bezel closed Do not use solvent cleaners Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage 8 3 Set Mode Select this to change the operating mode to Online or Program Changing to ONLINE mode by pressing any of the Display buttons can cause incorrect values to be displayed The values will correct themselves in a few seconds To avoid this potential annoyance change to online mode through SET MODE instead of through the Display buttons 8 4 Calibrate Analog Inputs Note the unit must be allowed to warm up for 30 minutes at the intended operating temperature prior to calibration Selecting the CALIBRATE ANALOG INPUTS lists a number of calibration functions you can perform Selecting the CALIBRATE ANALOG INPUTS again allows you to specify the Al module and channel in which to calibrate When you Select Input you must apply a 096 reference low point calibration value to the terminal block of the module channel Then select CALIBRATE to start the
188. et pe iei n epe rete f P rire e ntes 102 Table 4 14 Discrete Input Prompts eoe eertete nte he tie n et e n e iee ee eie Fere 104 Table 4 15 Discrete Output Pror pts nei tette p e e etre Pe rre e nes 105 Table 4 16 GV Typ6esis iii etr tti ee repr eet Fere ER eee ehe Feu Pure n ones 106 Table 4 T7 Peak Picking Prompts es rre ent P rire etes 107 Table 4 18 Signal Select Prompts nee nre ie e estre eee te e Pe n ee nes 108 Table 4 19 Compare Prombpls 5 2 su oerte rp cete eee ene sli nire et reete e i e p e nts 109 Table 4 20 Compare s Condition Type and Condition Time Prompts sse 111 Table 4 21 Counter Prompts cete eee DR EG DER PER ERO TRU EU UR RECS sees 113 Table 4 22 Math Prompts tcm ree tir e BR E PORE RAN UE IRAN UU RR Ree RUE 114 Table 4 23 Free Form Math Prompts nce rep bm DDR stro ROI I e pP 115 Table 4 24 Free Form Math Functions 2 rec pre rcee eot sess va Sepis TeS ERER i 116 Table4 25 Logie Prompts ne EER EEEE Dp t gt p 117 Table 4 26 Logic Operators secs isc o eeepc ieemSOSe IO De UD De OT e ID POET 118 Table4 27 Free Form Logic Prompts dece beo ea tee De rt pr te pP 119 Table4 28 A OR B AND p a PD B DRE DERE ER 120 Table 4 29 Results of Logic Equation Using Iteration sees 120 Table 4 30 Inverter Prompts 2 nno eee
189. eter ALARMSUM Alarm Summary STORAGE Storage Status TOTAL Display 1 totalizer TOTALIZR Display all totalizers LOOP BAR Loop with Bar Graph LOOP 2BS Loop with 2 Bar Graphs LOOP 3BS Loop with 3 Bar Graphs LOOP 4BS Loop 4 Bar Summary LOOP 8BS Loop 8 Bar Summary SPP 2BS Set point Profiles with 2 Bar Graphs SPP 3BS Set point Profiles with 3 Bar Graphs SPP 4BS Set point Profiles with 4 Bar Graphs SP TREND Set point Profile Trend PROSUM Process Summary TREND Appears if a trend format is selected Select trend data to be displayed TREND 1 TREND 2 TREND 3 or TREND 4 BARGRAPH Appears if a bar graph format is selected Select bar graph data to be displayed BARGRAPH 1 BARGRAPH 2 BARGRAPH 3 or BARGRAPH 4 ROTATION RATE Appears if trend panel display or some bar formats are selected Select number of seconds each point on the panel display will be shown 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 LOOP Appears if a loop format is selected Select loop to be displayed PROFILE Appears if Set point Profile Trend format is selected Select profile to be displayed DISPLAY 10 158 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 19 Enable Features Features can be restored to or removed from menus and displays simply by turning them On ENABLE or Off DISABLE here Disabled functions and their data are not destroyed or erased they just cannot be viewed on the display F
190. eter Measured temperature in degrees C number REFERENCE TEMP OFF analog parameter Reference temperature number TEMP CONSTANT OFF analog parameter Temperature constant Z number DESIRED FO OFF analog parameter Desired ES number 132 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Advanced Splitter Output ADV SPLITTER This function can be used for heat cool applications It splits an input into 3 independently scaled outputs CVn A1 CVn A2 and CVn Figure 4 12 For each output when the input is between IN LO LIM and IN HI LIM the output is scaled between the OUT LO LIM and OUT HI LIM Each output holds its OUT LO LIM value when the input the IN LO LIM value for that output Each output holds its OUT HI LIM value when the input the IN HI LIM value for that output Output limits OUT LO LIM amp OUT HI LIM cannot exceed 10095 but can be negatively sloped OUT HI LIM OUT LO LIM 100 A1 A2 A3 OUTPUT VALUE 26 0 0 30 60 90 100 INPUT SOURCE VALUE Figure 4 12 Advanced Splitter Default Outputs FEEDBACK 1 SPLITTER INPUT CY FEEDBACK 2 Figure 4 13 Heat Cool Configuration Table 4 41 describes the Advanced Splitter prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Video Recorder User Manual 133 Programming Function Blocks and Features RANGE LOW RANGE HIGH INPUT FEEDBACK 1 FEEDBACK 2 FEEDBACK 3 OUT IN LO LIM
191. etermine the loop output For example a 1096 change in OFF to allow integral only process variable with respect to the input range from a control Variable Gain1 or balanced condition will result in a 1096 change in output PB1 is available by when a gain of 1 0 is used Enter a starting value at initial programming a constant s configuration The value may be altered Online for final loop Destination with GN or PB tuning If an indirect source is specified as in an adaptive See Program Constants gain configuration the value can only be altered at the Section 4 16 source Gain and Proportional Band are interchangeable values Proportional Band 100 Gain For loops with dual tuning Gain 1 is the gain for the first set of tuning parameters Gain 2 is for the second set HYSTERESIS Enter 0 100 of PV span Deadband value prevents excessive output oscillation when using ON OFF control Video Recorder User Manual 95 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 10 Loop Prompts continued IN Select decimal position Used for all input parameters of the loop POSITION INTERACTIVE YES NO Select interactive YES or noninteractive NO for the control algorithm Interactive causes We on Rate and Reset terms to interact to make up the proportional term of the algorithm similar to analog controllers In noninteractive the proportional term is simply related to Gain LATCHING YES NO Select the desired action require
192. etween these values A3 output is scaled between OUT 3 OUT LO LIM amp OUT 3 OUT HI LIM Enter OFF or a range for A3 s output Defaults are 0 for low limit amp 100 for high limit Scales A3 output Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Standard Splitter Output STD SPLITTER This function can be used for heat cool applications It is a deadband based splitter that divides a Split loop s output 100 to 100 into two outputs CVn A1 and CVn A2 both of which are zero when the loop output is zero Figure 4 14 A deadband provides a range of loop output within which both split outputs remain at zero For overlapped outputs use Advanced Splitter Note A third output CVnA3 is displayed Online and should be ignored 100 100 Deadband CV A2 CV A1 2 100 0 100 PID Output 96 Figure 4 14 Standard Split Output Function Table 4 42 describes the Standard Splitter prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 42 Standard Splitter Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGE HIGH INPUT OFF analog parameter Input source Typically this is the output value OV of a number Split Output type of loop FEEDBACK 1 AOn BC LPn BC CVn BC Enter an AO LP or CV for the back calculation value BC of the analog output assigned to the A1 output
193. f the three mode selections possible Having completed the preceding exercise changing the instrument s mode should now be a simple task Furthermore a fundamental understanding of how the Menu Up Arrow Down Arrow and Enter buttons work should now be at your fingertips Now use the Menu Up Arrow Down Arrow and Enter buttons to verify the ON LINE PROGRAM and MAINTENANCE mode sub level menus detailed in Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 and Figure 3 5 The sub level menus shown represent only the first sub level below each mode s MAIN MENU There are several sub level menus not indicated here that run further below each first sub level Note that once inside of a sub level menu regardless of how deep the level is a press of the Menu button will return you to the next highest menu level In case you get lost within a mode s sub level menu keep pressing the Menu button until the ON LINE PROGRAM or MAINTENANCE mode MAIN MENU appears on screen Be advised that Figure 3 2 through Figure 3 5 comprise a basic road map for navigating the menus within the programmers three modes Sections 4 through 8 of this manual will provide detailed descriptions of each menu choice and complete guides through all the sub level menus that run below the levels indicated in these Figures ATTENTION The following menus contain all possible options Your instrument may not include some items shown here MAIN MENU ONLINE gt SETMODE ONLINE
194. figuration Set Point Program or Calibration Storage When executing the INITIALIZE DISK menu prompt you will observe two selections USE NEW SCHEDULES and USE CURRENT SCHEDULES The SCHEDULES in both selections refer to the data storage schedules prepared in the SET UP NEW SCHEDULES menu described earlier USE NEW SCHEDULES to initialize the disk to activate a newly configured data storage schedule for the very first time The only time you will USE NEW SCHEDULES again is after you have made any changes to the way the data storage schedules have been configured You must USE NEW SCHEDULES to initialize the disk in order for these changes to take effect USE CURRENT SCHEDULES to initialize a disk if the disk will replace one that has become full This will ensure that data being recorded continues uninterrupted over the space of both the full and replacement disks During the time when the full disk is being replaced with a new disk recorded data will be stored to the instrument s memory buffer Upon completing initialization via the USE CURRENT SCHEDULES prompt all buffered data will be written to the new disk and data storage will resume with no lapses of storage between disks Disk initialization allocates sections of the disk to each of the files you have elected to store per the SET UP NEW SCHEDULES menu Once the instrument completes initializing the disk process and diagnostic data recording begins immediately indicated by a yellow colored le
195. filer value PV 215 shown on SP Trend display s Point Detail menu PV 2 is also trended on SP Trend display ADVANCE See Advance on page 18b RAMP INCREMENT See External Ramp Type on page 18b GUARANTEED SOAK See Guaranteed Soak on page 18 HOLD LEVEL EDGE LEVEL or EDGE Select LEVEL to Hold the profiler while the Hold discrete is Level ON and resume Run when the Hold discrete is Level OFF Select EDGE to Hold the profiler after the Hold discrete changes from OFF to ON and resume Run after the Start discrete changes from OFF to ON 190 Video Recorder User Manual Setpoint Profiler Setpoint Profiles Menu in Online mode This menu lets you define profile ramp and soak segments and associated parameters and store and load programs to and from floppy disk or memory Sge Figure 5 13 for allowable and non allowable storage To access the Setpoint Profiles menu 1 Press the Menu button until a main menu is displayed 2 Select Set Mode and change the mode to Online 3 Select Setpoint Profiles 4 Select a profile 1 through 4 to program Table 5 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 and describe the Setpoint Profile prompts Table 5 4 Setpoint Profiles Prompts EDIT PROFILE 1 Select a profile to edit Sde Table 5 5 for EDIT PROFILE 2 prompts EDIT PROFILE 3 EDIT PROFILE 4 STORE PROGRAM TO STARTING PROFILE Select 1 4 Select the lowest numbered profile to be stored that is Profile 1 2 3 or 4 See How program
196. for up to the buffered data time period while loading Setpoint programs without losing storage data When the storage disk is re installed or when another disk is initialized using the current schedules the buffered data will be transferred to the disk Initializing a disk Initialization creates separate areas on the disk for each type of data to be stored Data types that can be stored are up to 3 Trends Alarms Events Diagnostics and Unit Data You can initialize a disk using the current storage schedule or using a new storage schedule When data storage is active the instrument determines the status of the disk Status can be one of the following possibilities Table 7 3 Disk Status The current disk was inserted The instrument will resume storage to this disk automatically back into the drive Some other disk was inserted In this case a DISK NOT CURRENT message is displayed and data is That is disk is blank contains stored in a buffer not on the disk old data files or contains configuration files Initializing a disk using the same storage setup To continue storing the same data storage schedule on this disk select the online DATA STORAGE SETUP menu select INITIALIZE DISK then select USE CURRENT SCHEDULES The instrument will display a prompt asking for a yes or no response to initialize the disk Initializing will destroy all existing information on the disk To shorten the initialization time the disk
197. ft Arrow to move the cursor one place to the left To change the 0 to a 9 press Up Arrow nine times At this point 95 00 should be displayed with the 9 flashing Since 95 00 is the value we want press Enter to select it The cursor moves left to the SETPOINT 2 prompt and the value is selected ATTENTION To enter a number with a connected keyboard instead of steps 5 10 simply type in the number 95 and press Enter How to program a discrete input parameter with a number Table 3 6 shows how to connect Setpoint 2 an analog parameter to a number You can also connect a discrete parameter to a number A discrete parameter such as an alarm s input source can be connected to any discrete parameter type in Table 3 7 or it can be programmed with a 0 to signify the off state or with a 1 to signify the on state Enter a value of 1 or 0 For example if you program an alarm s input source Figure 3 7 with a value of 1 the alarm s output AL1 OS will always be on To program a discrete parameter with a 1 or 0 perform the following procedure The procedure uses Alarm1 s Input source as the parameter being programmed Table 3 7 Example Programming Discrete Input Parameter with a Number In the Program Alarms menu select ALARM 1 2 Consult the Program Alarm section of this manual to learn about the menu item you wish to change namely INPUT SOURCE Press Down Arrow to move the cursor to INPUT SOURCE 4 Press ENTER to move the curso
198. functions Enter up to 64 characters upper or lower case Spaces are permitted Enclose a function s argument with parentheses Square root argument must be absolute value to prevent square root of a negative value Only whole numbers may be used as exponents Example To input this equation AI10V CN 5 OV X12 5 AI 2 OV enter these settings INPUT A CN5OV INPUT B 12 0 INPUT C AH OV INPUT D AI2OV EQ A B SQRT ABS C D 5 Note how constants can be entered through the Constant function block as in example s Input A assigned to an input as in example s Input B or entered directly in the equation as in example with 5 INPUT A INPUT H OFF analog Enter the parameters or numbers to be used in the equation parameter number OFF discrete Resets the function block Use only when the equation result parameter 0 1 is the input to itself integrating that is when the equation contains the letter O Video Recorder User Manual 115 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 24 Free Form Math Functions For this function or value Type this in the equatio n Negation n NEG n Value of Input A Value of Input D Value of Input E Value of Input F Value of Input G Value of Input H Add y n EX n Log base 10 of n LOG n Natural log of n Naturallogofn LN n Integration Result of equation as of last machine cycle Letter O not zero 0 116 Video
199. g the current setup the setup from the previous initialization not the new setup Typically the operator will choose USE CURRENT SCHEDULES to continue storing the same setup onto a new disk IMPORTANT Initialization deletes any data already on the disk therefore you are prompted to press Enter to proceed or to press Menu to abort When the INITIALIZING DISK message disappears initialization has completed If initialization fails see Table 6 6 for message descriptions ATTENTION Refer to section 3 15 for additional information on disk initialization 174 Video Recorder User Manual Setpoint Profiler 5 Setpoint Profiler What s in this section Section 5 explains the functions configuration and operation of the Setpoint Profiler Terminology is defined and all prompts are explained r5 Overview of the Setpoint Profiler 175 Components of a profile Parameters that control a profile s execution How to set up a profiler How to load and run a profiler 5 1 Overview of the Setpoint Profiler Definitions A profiler is a Setpoint Profiler function block This function block is what you interact with when you program and run a profile The profiler is analogous to a compact disk player on a stereo in that the profiler plays a profile Your instrument contains 1 2 3 or 4 profilers depending on the option ordered A profile is a series of ramp and soak segments along with any parame
200. ge npe tas 109 Compare s Greater Than Result With Hysteresis sssssseeeee 110 Math CV Feedback 114 Eogic SignallFIQW 2 5 1 tiere rt tide da iade a ede i p a aec e 116 Free Form Logic Signal Flow esses enne ennemis 119 Function Generator Curve sssssssssssssess eene en nennt sinet ennenen nnt 123 Video Recorder User Manual xi Figure 4 8 Function Generator Configuration For Valve 124 Figure 4 9 Function Generator Configuration For Input Signal Characterization 124 Figure 4 10 Periodic tee ad e e ee aD hd wet pee 126 Figure 4 11 Typical Carbon Potential Control Configuration esee 130 Figure 4 12 Advanced Splitter Default Outputs ene 133 Figure 4 13 Heat Cool Configuration nennen nnn sineret en 133 Figure 4 14 Standard Split Output Function sssssssssssssseseee enne nnn enne 135 Figure 4 15 CEMS Rolling Average 142 Figure 4 16 Example of Constant Destination 148 Figure 4 17 Displays Accessible by the Display Buttons 150 Figure 5 1 Setpoint Profiler Schematic n
201. give inaccurate tunings Pretune STOPPED menu describes the Pretune STOPPED prompts Table 7 11 Pretune STOPPED Prompts roroesan E TUNE SET Select which set of tuning If tuning a split loop set 1 applies to loop output between 0 parameters 1 or 2 will and 100 set 2 applies to loop output between 0 and 100 be pretuned and installed OPTIMIZE Select SET PT or LOAD This optimizes the new tuning parameters according to their intended use that is controlling changes in setpoint or process load OVERSHOOT Select YES or NO This determines whether or not some overshoot is acceptable in the pretune specified tuning Continued on next page 238 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operation Using Menus Table 7 11 Pretune STOPPED Prompts ae OUTPUT SIZE 100 to 100 Appears if loop is in Manual Enter the largest change in output or in engineering units that the process will tolerate The pretune will initiate and analyze this output change SP STEP SIZE 100 to 100 Appears if loop is in Auto Enter the largest change in setpoint or in engineering units that the process will tolerate The pretune will initiate and analyze this setpoint change START Select to start the pretune function See Before Starting Pretune below Before Starting Pretune Before starting Pretune configure adjust the loop as follows Auto Manual Either mode is acceptable Changing the loop mode after
202. guaranteed soak to occur the following conditions must be met 1 The GUAR SOAK 1 and GUAR SOAK 2 prompts for the segment ramps and soaks must be enabled set to ON and 2 The GUARANTEED SOAK discrete input to the profile must be enabled level high If either of these are disabled a guaranteed soak cannot occur even with excessive deviation between profile and PV Hysteresis 182 This parameter specifies the amount the deviation between profile and PV must be reduced before the profile resumes running after a guaranteed soak Sde Figure 547 After a guaranteed soak the profile will resume running when the deviation has decreased by this amount The following examples assume GUARANTEED SOAK is ON 1 and the example segment s GUAR SOAK 1 is ON 1 Example 1 Assume PV 1 is 20 units above the profile output GUAR SOAK HI LIM is 15 HYSTERESIS is 5 The profile will Hold because the deviation high limit is exceeded The profile will resume running when the PV 1 is 10 15 5 units or less above the profile output Example 2 Assume PV 1 is 20 units below the profile output GUAR SOAK LO LIM is 15 HYSTERESIS is 5 The profile will Hold because the deviation low limit is exceeded The profile will resume running when the PV 1 is 10 15 5 units or less below the profile output Guaranteed Soak Limit Check Guaranteed Soak Segment n ON Profile Segment n AND 4 Guaranteed Soak Profile ON Ee an CC
203. hdysvaaran L mp tila ymp r iv 5 40 C Varastossa 20 60 C Kosteus 10 90 RH non condensing 40 C T rin 10 40 Hz amplitude 0 07 mm 40 60 Hz Kiihtyvyys 0 2 g LAITTEEN ASENNUS Piirturi on asennettava paneeliin siten etta per liitimille jaa riittavasti tilaa Video Recorder User Manual 267 Safety CONSIGNES DE SECURITE FR21 6063 Pour r duire tout risque de d charge lectrique qui pourrait provoquer une l sion corporelle respectez toutes les consignes de s curit de cette documentation Ce symbole avertit l utilisateur d un risque lectrique potentiel lorsqu il peut avoir acc s des l ments sous tension Borne de mise la terre Destin e au raccordement du conducteur de mise la terre de l alimentation eR e Sil quipement est utilis dans un but non sp cifi par le constructeur la protection fournie avec cet quipement peut tre affect e e Aucun composant ou pi ce ne doit tre remplac s il n est pas explicitement sp cifi comme tel par le constructeur e Tous les c blages doivent tre conformes aux normes locales et doivent tre r alis s par un personnel autoris et exp riment e La borne de masse doit tre raccord e avant tout autre c blage et d branch e en dernier e est obligatoire de connecter cet appareil sur une ligne poss dant un moyen de coupure pr s de l appareil CARACTERISTIQUES DE L EQUIPEMENT Tension d alimen
204. he Set point OVERSHOOT SP by the Process Variable PV after a disturbance in the process such as a load or SP change Through fuzzy logic the working SP of the control loop is dynamically modified by the control algorithm to reduce or eliminate overshoot ATTENTION Regardless of the setting of this SUPPRESS OVERSHOOT selection overshoot is not suppressed when the process disturbance causes an initial deviation PV SP value between 0 7 and 0 7 engineering units Consequently overshoot may not be suppressed in applications which require numerically small control loop PV ranges such as carbon potential where this range is typically 0 0 to 2 0 engineering units WILD VARIABLE Enter an analog input Aln OV or calculated value CVn OV parameter that represents a second input signal applied to the ratio control loop whose value will be multiplied by the RATIO SETPOINT multiplier The product of this multiplication may be specified as the ratio control loop s working set point and can be biased by specifying a RATIO BIAS value This input parameter is referred to as the WILD VARIABLE since the ratio loop has no control over its value whatsoever In the fuel air ratio control examples used in RATIO SETPOINT AND RATIO BIAS fuel flow was for all intents and purposes the WILD VARIABLE Note that the typical function block diagram one will use to represent a ratio control loop is illustrated in Figure 4 1 Video Recorder User Man
205. held until the Reset is OFF 0 then the averaging period resets AVERAGE PERIOD 0 1 to 1440 Length of averaging period in minutes 138 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Rolling Average Outputs a rolling mean average CVn OV of the input over the specified Average Period As new input samples are collected old samples are discarded The function will calculate a new average at equally spaced sample intervals averaging period Sample interval of samples sum of samples Rolling A M dd of samples Example of samples 10 Average Period 30 minutes The first average will appear after 30 minutes then will be updated every 30 10 or 3 minutes after When the Reset Input is ON 1 all accumulated samples are discarded and the output is held until the Reset Input is OFF 0 then the averaging period resets Table 4 46 describes the Rolling Average prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 46 Rolling Average Prompts Range Selections Definition RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGE HIGH INPUT OFF analog parameter This parameter will be averaged number OF SAMPLES Number of samples taken during average period AVG PERIOD MINS OFF or number Number of minutes in average period Video Recorder User Manual 139 Programming Function Blocks and Features
206. iad dah Pian dka E RE ERR ER ep das 35 3 4 Menu Navigation oit eret ete ere edi t E rnv Ea ee a et I hee Ec 36 Bide Button TunctlOns ire efe P tae metet tpe oq P te n tien t bd benc bet Edd 41 3 6 Text Entry From External Sources ssssssssssssssssseeeee 45 3 7 Connecting a keyboard or a barcode 47 3 8 Installing and removing a floppy nennen 48 3 9 Definition of Function amp 49 3 10 Components of function blocks sess nennen sinn enter nnne ns 51 3 11 How to program input parameters 5 aAA nnne enne nennen 55 3 12 How to program function block parameters sssssseseeeeneeene eene 58 3 13 How to program a simple configuration ssssssseeeeneneenenenenneennneneen nnne 58 3 14 How to program common configurations ssesssseseeeeneeeenen nennen nnne 60 2415 Data Storage c dioeceseos rto Ete rr Der eL nodi AE 74 HOW TO PROGRAM FUNCTION BLOCKS AND 79 r MEO S ADEM 79 4 2 Programming tipa uoir ie teet tee ai nee ct evt n tat EP even te ete 80 43 The Program mode TEU soea reien eae tenere tee etate ar v ott a E Pete Ee er e AX
207. ibes each prompt Video Recorder User Manual 101 Programming Function Blocks and Features INPUT SOURCE INPUT LOW LIMIT INPUT HIGH LIMIT OUTPUT LOW LIMIT OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT INC SLEW LIMIT DEC SLEW LIMIT FAILSAFE FAILSAFE VALUE IMPULSE TIME 102 Table 4 13 Analog Output Prompts Enter OFF analog parameter number as the analog output source If the AO s input source is a PID control loop specify a high value of 100 and a low value of 0 For other input sources specify limits using the same units as the AO s input source For CAT enter any output range within 0 20 mA Enter OFF or 0 1 to 999 9 units minute units of the AO s input source NONE UP Upscale DOWN Downscale VALUE Enter a value between Input Low Limit and Input High Limit or analog parameter or OFF OFF or gt 1 For a control loop this is typically set to a control output LP OV However it may be directed to any analog value such as a calculated value to retransmit the value to an external device Input limits Variable input limits are available by programming a constant s Destination with HS or LS See Program Constants Section 4 16 These limits scale the output to the input limits For a CAT output a low limit of 4 and high limit of 20 will provide a 4 20 mA output range Limits the rate of increase or decrease of the analog output Value entered is in terms of the AO s input sour
208. icted availability Key Number 1 IV V te ele ee See KEY NUMBER Selection Availability Video Recorder VRX180 Y TABLE I ANALOG INPUTS Analog Universal Inputs 4 Universal Analog Inputs slot A to F 8 Universal Analog Inputs 12 Universal Analog Inputs 16 Universal Analog Inputs 20 Universal Analog Inputs 24 Universal Analog Inputs TABLE Il ADDITIONAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS None 4 Universal Analog Inputs Digital Inputs contact closure Digital Inputs 24 Digital Inputs 120 240 Vac Relays Outputs Digital Outputs 24 open collector Digital Outputs 120 240 Vac triac None Universal Analog Inputs Digital Inputs contact closure Digital Inputs 24 Digital Inputs 120 240 Vac Relays Outputs Digital Outputs 24 Vdc open collector Digital Outputs 120 240 Vac None Universal Analog Inputs Digital Inputs contact closure Digital Inputs 24 Vdc Digital Inputs 120 240 Vac Relays Outputs Digital Outputs 24 Vdc open collector Digital Outputs 120 240 Vac None Universal Analog Inputs Digital Inputs contact closure Digital Inputs 24 Vdc Digital Inputs 120 240 Vac Relays Outputs Digital Outputs 24 Vdc open collector Digital Outputs 120 240 Vac T OoOmUJmou o 10 Video recorder User Manual Introduction Model Selection Guide cont VRX180 TABLE Il ADDITIONAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS continued Selection
209. ideo Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts MAIN MENU PROGRAM SET MODE PROGRAM LABELS ANALOG INPUTS CONTROL LOOPS ANALOG OUTPUTS DISCRETE INPUTS DISCRETE OUTPUTS CALCULATED VALUES ALARMS TOTALIZERS PROFILES CONSTANTS DISPLAYS FEATURES SECURITY ANALOG ANALOG DISCRETE DISCRETE CONTROL CALCULATED SETPOINT INPUTS OUTPUT INPUTS OUTPUTS LOOPS ALARMS VALUES TOTALIZERS PROFILES FILENAMES HNCINEERINGIH Unit 8 CONSTANTS INPUT 1 a INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 48 AM Al2 AI3 AM Al5 ee 8 LOOP 1 LOOP 2 LOOP 3 LOOP 4 LOOP 5 LOOP 6 LOOP 7 LP1 LP2 LP3 1 4 LP5 LP6 LP7 OUTPUT 1 V ourPur OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT AO1 A02 A03 A04 AO5 AO6 AOT INPUT 1 pf INPUT 2 INPUTS o o o o p INPUT 34 5 INPUT 35 p INPUT 36 DH 012 DI3 DI34 DI35 DI36 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT OUTPUTA e e __ e o o OUTPUT 34 f OUTPUT 35 OUTPUT 36 DO1 DO2 D034 DO35 DO36 CALC CALC CALC 9 4 c2 e CALC CALC CALC VALUE 1 VALUE 2 VALUE 3 VALUE 62 VALUE 63 VALUE 64 ALARM 1 ALARM 2 ALARM ES o o o o p ALARM 94 JALARM 3 JA AL1 AL2 AL3 AL94 AL95 TOTALIZER 1 TOTALIZER 2 TOTALIZER 8 ToTALIZER 4 TOTALIZER 5 TL2 TL4 TL5 PROFILE 1 PROFILE 4 PROFILE 4 PROFILE 4 SP1 SP2 SP3 5 4 CONSTANT 1 CONSTANT 4 __ o __ o
210. igure 2 8 RS422 wiring configuration 2 5 7 2 1 Switch configuration RS422 3 2 LEFT RIG HT away from PC board toward PC board 30 Video Recorder User Manual Installation 2 5 7 2 2 Interface connector TOP SIDE BOTTOM SIDE Figure 2 9 RS422 Inferface connections 2 5 7 3 RS485 2 wires wiring configuration OR SERIAL PRINTER CONVERTER ER gne SOFTWARE RS4857 APPLICATION 2 wires 4 As Bag 2 L hus VIDEO RECORDER VIDEO RECORDER VIDEO RECORDER Figure 2 10 RS485 wiring configuration Video Recorder User Manual 31 Installation 2 5 7 3 1 Switch configuration RS485 3 2 1 LEFT RIGHT away from PC board toward PC board 2 5 7 3 2 Interface connector TOP SIDE RX TXA e RX TXB O 2 BOTTOM SIDE Figure 2 11 Interface connector 32 Video Recorder User Manual Installation 2 5 7 4 Connecting the RS422 485 link to a computer The VRX180 video recorder with the RS422 485 Communications option can be connected your computer using one of two arrangements e Wired to an RS422 485 compatible serial port if the computer is equipped with such a port
211. imited to within the operations of the function block itself It is not always possible or even practical to draw every internal parameter that a function block has or might need Therefore as a rule of thumb for starting out you should first think of internal parameters as simple labels that further define and clarify the internal operation of the function block With this rule of thumb in mind internal parameters become items that are hopefully intuitively obvious At this point what may or may not be an intuitively obvious internal parameter will depend on your level of process control expertise For the function block diagram built up so far internal parameters that can be presumed from the control strategy of Figure 3 11 are indicated in Figure 3 14 Here the 11 function block has been labeled to show that its INPUT TYPE wil be a Type J thermocouple with a measurement range between 0 RANGE LOW and 1000 F RANGE HIGH The label STANDARD has been used to indicate the type of control loop LP1 will be along with the notation SP 500 to show that the loop s set point will be 500 F The loop tuning constants of GAIN RESET and RATE have been initially indicated as 10 1 repeat minute and 0 minutes respectively As far as the AO1 function block is concerned its input range has been defined between 0 IN LOW LIMIT and 100 IN HIGH LIMIT in anticipation of using LP1 s output to drive the 4 to 20 mA signal it will genera
212. internal memory up to 6 programs each containing 2 profiles Suppose the BCD bits are programmed as follows Bit 2 1 Bit 1 1 Bit 0 0 This sequence of bits equals the number 6 and is the value of CVn OV When the Enable discrete is triggered ON 1 the profiles in Program 6 will be loaded from internal memory into the function blocks for Profile 1 and Profile 2 where they can be edited or run Example 2 loading a 4 profile program You are programming a 4 programmer instrument According to Table 4 32 a 4 programmer instrument can run 4 profiles at a time and can store in its internal memory up to 3 programs each containing 4 profiles Suppose the BCD bits are programmed as follows Bit 2 0 Bit 1 1 Bit 0 0 This sequence of bits equals the number 2 and is the value of CVn OV When the Enable discrete is triggered ON 1 the profiles in Program 2 will be loaded from internal memory into the function blocks for Profiles 1 through 4 where they can be edited or run Video Recorder User Manual 121 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 32 How Profiles Are Saved In Memory 1 programmer 2 programmer 3 programmer 4 programmer instrument instrument instrument instrument 1 Profile per Program 2 Profiles per Program 3 Profiles per Program 4 Profiles per Program This contain This contair This contain This contair 5 Program this Profil Program these Program these Program
213. ion of the Factory order to supply the Custom Calibration Certificate otherwise the calibration will be based on the factory default ranges When selecting SP program make sure to select analog output current as necessary Table II slot N P When selecting Control loops make sure to select outputs as necessary in Table 1 Provided with each VRX180 are one pre initialized disk and one SDI software pack SDI software should be installed on a PC and used for initialization of new disks Must purchase Tablell M inorderto select Table Il Selection 12 Video recorder User Manual Installation 2 Installation What s in this section The following topics are covered in this section If this instrument is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired To avoid the risk of electrical shock which could cause personal injury follow all safety notices in this documentation Protective earth terminal Provided for connection of the protective earth supply system conductqr POWER SUPPLY Ensure the source voltage matches the supply voltage of the video recorder before power on In the rear of the video recorder near to the connector of the power supply PROTECTIVE GROUNDING Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent an electric shock before power on Do not operate the instrument when protective grounding or fuse might be defective To av
214. is equipment shortage To obtain proper credit and to avoid delays return goods only after contacting your local sales office in advance Carefully remove the instrument and remove any shipping ties or packing material Follow the instructions on any attached tags or labels and then remove such tags or labels Fuse spare use only 3 15 AT slow blow fuses size 5 x 20 mm Floppy disk Mounting brackets with nuts Video recorder ow od oc ger Product manual NOTE In the event that any items are missing please contact your nearest sales office 14 Video Recorder User Manual Installation 2 3 Panel mounting the video recorder 2 3 4 Recommendations This video recorder is designed to operate under specific conditions If you need more information refer to the product specification sheet 2 3 2 External dimensions and cut out Prepare panel cut out as detailed below OmmsHHDEE 317 12 48 1 5 278 10 95 0 08 0 06 0 10 95 millimeters inches NOTE Maximum panel thickness 40 mm 1 55 CAUTION The maximum temperature inside the cabinet should not exceed the ambient conditions specific for the video recorders The video recorder must be mounted into a panel to limit operator access to the rear terminals Failure to com
215. is displayed Table 5 13 Ster 2 Press Decrement button to move cursor to The Edit Profile menu is displayed Edit Press Enter EDIT PROFILE n SEGMENT n NEXT SEGMENT PREVIOUS SEGMENT VALUE 100 00 AUX VALUE 50 00 TIME 20 000 The profile and segment numbers whose value and time you are editing are shown 3 Use Increment and Decrement buttons to Numbers are changed to their new values move cursor to value or time Press Enter to access the numbers shown Change the numbers with the Increment and Decrement buttons 4 Press Menu button when finished editing The Profile Trend is displayed with the new segments segments Video Recorder User Manual 207 Setpoint Profiler 208 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operations Using Primary Displays 6 Online Operations Using Primary Displays 6 1 Overview Online operation using primary displays consists of using the buttons to view and interact with the displays that were assigned to the Display button Pressing the Display button changes to online mode and accesses the displays assigned to this key Available displays are shown in Figure 4 17 and are described in Table 6 1 In the following table interactive means the Tab key can be pressed to access various functions on the display Table 6 1 Displays Accessed With Display Button EGET 088 or view only Horizontal Trend Digital HTRNDBAR Horizontal Trend Bar Displays up to 12 points trended hori
216. isplays To Keys Prompts sess neee trennen trennen rennen 157 Table 4 65 Enable Features Prompts eese serere see Sedrenn pester Eea eetere ts 159 Table4 66 Security Prompts eee er pet bre npe e bebe peret estesa ds 160 Table 4 67 Serial Communications Prompts eeseesesseseeeseeeseee eene nennen eene en eterne tne tenete tren 161 Tabl 4 68 Set Clock Prompts 5 edet e eser e tude treten soho ci e geek dente costae be Pee eeepc 162 Table 4 69 Load Store Config Files Prompts essere enne nene tenete 163 Table 4 70 Suggested Scan Rates ice etre uidere tegere ete re dee Pee eite cede te 164 Table 4 71 Data Storage Setup Procedure 166 Table 4 72 Prompts For Storage Setup Of Trends Alarms Events 1 168 Table 4273 Stored Events ete ro Fe eset t e nee bett cele t dele 169 Table 4 74 Unit Data Prompts anco Coe Pete n terere b ROC etie 170 Table 4 75 Disk capacity Pfompts 5 2 2 nene bc Eee be Ire eit erede dete 172 Table 4 76 Disk Storage Capacity of LS120 ZIP disk nennen eene 173 Table 4 77 Disk Storage Capacity for the 1 44 Mbyte Floppy Disk seen 174 Table 5 1 Example of Segment 183 Table 5 2 Parameters That Cont
217. ition from ON to OFF starts an Ended profiler End 1 Falling START is not Profiler RESET RUN does not affect a running program edge programmed with a goes to May be connected to the key SY1F3 discrete parameter Segment 1 If the START discrete input parameter is not Rising START is not Profiler programmed with a discrete then switching edge programmed with a changes to RESET RUN from OFF to ON resets an Ended discrete parameter Ready and amp profiler is at End and starts to Run Video Recorder User Manual 185 Setpoint Profiler Table 5 2 Parameters That Control Profiler Execution continued Parameter nam Definition Triggere Conditions by present HOLD Holds a profiler at its current position Level ON Profiler is in Profiler is Profilers Elapsed Time continues but Run or Hold put in Hold Segment Time stops until Profiler is started again Hold is activated by online operator menu or by a discrete input May be connected to F2 key SY1F2 ADVANCE Advances a profiler on Hold to the starting Rising Profiler is in Profiler value of the next segment If the profile is on edge Hold advances the last segment it advances to the ending value of the last segment If the profile is on the ending value of the last segment of the batch then it advances around to the starting value of segment 1 or to the first segment of the batch phase as defined by BATCH SEGMENT FIRST If within a loop advances
218. ition type and condition time The final output is a discrete pulse CVn OS COMPARE CONDITION OPERATOR Result i amp HYSTERESIS MER Figure 4 2 Compare Signal Flow Table 4 19 and Table 4 20 describe the Compare prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 19 Compare Prompts Range Selections INPUT 1 OFF analog parameter Input sources to be compare INPUT 2 number d OPERATOR EQ GT LT GTE LTE NEQ The Result will be set to ON 1 when the comparison is true Input 1 OPERATOR Input 2 where OPERATOR is EQ GT gt LT lt GTE gt LTE lt NEQ z The Result will be set to OFF 0 when the comparison is false HYSTERESIS Number OFF Applies to all operators except EQ and NEQ If given a value hysteresis determines when Result goes OFF 0 after the comparison becomes false Operator Hysteresis Function GT Result goes OFF when Input 2 Input 1 gt Hyst GTE Result goes OFF when Input 2 Input 1 gt Hyst LT Result goes OFF when Input 1 Input 2 gt Hyst LTE Result goes OFF when Input 1 Input 2 gt Hyst See Figure 4 3 CONDITION TYPE NONE DELAY EXTEND See Table 4 20 PULSE RT PULSE CONDITION TIME OFF or number Enter number of seconds of condition time See Table 4 20 Video Recorder User Manual 109 Programming Function Blocks and Features Operator GT Greater than Hysteresis 2 degrees Input 1 gt Input 2 Result switches ON nput
219. k segments Time time to reach next segment Value Time duration of soak Value beginning value of current segment Value value of soak Segments 4 amp 5 Value Segment 3 Value Segments 1 amp 2 Value Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4 Segment 5 Time Time Time Time Time Figure 5 3 Value Duration Ramp Type 178 Video Recorder User Manual Setpoint Profiler To properly terminate a Val Dur profile you must program the segment beyond the last segment with the following 1 The value you want the program to end with Looking at Figure 5 3 the last segment is a soak thus the Value of segment 6 should be set to the same value used in segment 5 Any other value will cause segment 5 to be a ramp since the value will ramp up or down from segment 5 5 value to segment 6 s value 2 Setthe TIME to OFF Time Ramp Type Each ramp segment s TIME is the time allotted for the profiler output to reach the next soak segment s VALUE The ramp segment s VALUE prompt is not used Ramp Type z Time Features of this ramp type First and last segments must be soaks No consecutive ramps or soaks Ramp segments Time time needed to reach next soak segment Value Value not used in ramp segments Segment 3 Value Time z duration of soak Value value of soak Segment 1 Value Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Time Time Time Figure 5 4 Time Ramp Type Video Recorder Us
220. ke place Data in storage buffers will be copied to the floppy disk and the buffers will then be cleared Data collection for storage will stop until the operator reinitializes the schedule If the clock is set back less than 5 minutes collection of data storage and trends will stop until the setback time elapses and the clock catches up with the original collection schedule A warning prompt will appear on the display before these actions occur You can then cancel the clock change if desired 162 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 23 Load Store Configuration Instrument configurations can be stored to and loaded from floppy disk The front door must be closed Configurations have filename extension LNC Table 4 69 describes the Load Store Config prompts Table 4 69 Load Store Config Files Prompts STORE CONFIG TO FILEO1 CYCLEO 1 Specify a filename and number 01 99 for the DISK DRYERO 1 PRODO1 configuration Press Enter to store the configuration RECORDO TANKO1 UNITO1 1 REACTRO1 CONFIGO 1 KILNO1 VESSELO 1 CALIBO1 WCHEMO 1 PRESSO1 FURNCE01 DEMINO1 CONTRLO1 BATCHO01 FERMTRO1 LEHRO1 LINEO1 STRLZRO1 OVENO1 ZONE01 LOAD CONFIG Select a configuration First you must clear the instrument s configuration memory FROM DISK filename Press Enter to clear or Menu to abort and exit the menu Once the memory is clear select a filename from the floppy disk Press Enter to load the
221. keyboard to the mini DIN connector See Table 3 2 for key functions The instrument s cursor must be on the text to be changed on the right side of the display before you type in the new text Press Enter to accept the changes or press Menu to reject the changes Table 3 2 QWERTY Key Equivalents QWERTY key E Exits prompt or menu without saving changes Changes from online display to online menu 7 9 _ Scrolls down a menu or list BEC Increments the value of the selected field Enter J Selects menu item to change it Saves changes made O _ _ LA E 8 Changes to online mode and shows online displays Exits Point Details menu Accesses Display 2 Accesses Display 3 e Toggles Loop between Automatic and Manual e This button can also be used as Display 4 when the instrument does not have control Video Recorder User Manual 45 o ud SC 4 F4 F3 10 11 F2 Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 2 QWERTY Key Equivalents continued e Moves cursor around displays e Accesses Point Details menu Initiates a discrete action programmed to this key such as Starting a Setpoint Profile or resetting a totalizer Initiates a discrete action programmed to this key such as Resetting a Setpoint Profile or resetting a totalizer Initiates a discrete action programmed to this key Initiates a discrete action programmed to this key such as Ho
222. l enable is configured with a discrete will start and stop according to the state of that discrete This works independently of batch storage Acts as a start stop switch for each storage file type The ENABLE STORAGE and EXTERNAL ENABLE both must be enabled for BATCH STATE to function Accessed under DATA STORAGE menu If batch storage mode is configured for any storage file and if BATCH CONTROL has not been configured with a discrete then you can manually start stop the batches using this selection The instrument will automatically assign a number internally to identify the batch for storage For example data stored between the first start and stop is marked as Batch 1 When the next batch starts the instrument will increment the batch number These numbers identify the batches for later retrieval Accessed under SET UP NEW SCHEDULES If this item is configured with a discrete it will start and stop storage for all storage files configured with batch storage mode The ENABLE STORAGE and EXTERNAL ENABLE both must be enabled for BATCH CONTROL to function The instrument will automatically assign a number internally to identify the batch for storage For example data stored between the first start and stop is marked as Batch 1 When the next batch starts the instrument will increment the batch number These numbers identify the batches for later retrieval Accessed under DATA STORAGE Shows the number 1 255 of the active batch The batch
223. larm summary 228 Alarms are set up as part of the instrument configuration procedure Section 4 13 Up to 12 alarms can be configured An alarm can be assigned to any analog data point Analog Input Analog Output or Calculated Value and can be one of these types HIGH Alarm when input value gt setpoint value LOW Alarm when input value setpoint value DEV Deviation Alarm when input value deviates above or below compare point value by an amount gt setpoint value HRATE High Rate Alarm when input value increases at rate gt setpoint value in units per minute Negative rate setpoints are processed as positive values May take up to 30 seconds to activate LRATE Low Rate Alarm when input value decreases at rate setpoint value in units per minute Negative rate setpoints are processed as positive values May take up to 30 seconds to activate An alarm programmed with delay will not activate before its delay time An alarm programmed with hysteresis will clear after its hysteresis delay The alarm will remain active as long as the conditions causing it remain When the conditions no longer exist the alarm will be cleared automatically Clear means that the indicators for the particular alarm on all displays will be removed and the alarm will be removed from the Alarm Summary list Video Recorder User Manual Online Operation Using Menus What happens during an alarm e A flashing red alarm indicator a
224. lding a Setpoint Profile or resetting a totalizer F1 F5 F6 F7 F8 9 Buton e Initiates a discrete action programmed to this key ASCII barcode reader To enter text such as labels numbers and equations with a barcode reader connect the barcode reader to the mini DIN connector with an adapter part No 104286 The instrument buttons remain functional See section 3 7 on how to connect a mini DIN connector To enter labels the instrument s cursor must be on the text to be changed on the right side of the display before you scan in the new text from the barcode Press Enter to accept the changes or press Menu to reject the changes The barcode reader may also be used on the instrument trend screens to enter text data that will be stored as a time stamped event The ASCII data is split up into three fields Description 16 characters Tag 7 characters State 6 characters The first 16 characters will go into the description field The next 7 into the tag field and so on This data will be time stamped and stored in the event file LNE on the floppy disk Barcode Reader Recommendation The barcode reader should output ASCII keyboard data The reader should be capable of Code 39 barcode input The connector should be able to connect to the Keyboard connector located under the door 46 Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts 3 7 Connecting a keyboard or a barcode reader The mini DIN conn
225. levels it calls for have been correctly translated into accurate output signals The feedback path that provides LP1 with this confirmation is established by means of program settings depicted in Figure 3 16 TYPE J THERMOCOUPLE 4 TO 20 mA INPUT TYPE J RANGE LOW 0 RANGE HIGH 1000 OUTPUT TYPE CAT 1 500 IN LOW LIMIT 0 IN HIGH LIMIT 100 OUT LOW LIMIT 4 OUT HIGH LIMIT 20 Figure 3 16 Complete Function Block Diagram Of Figure 3 11 Here the function block diagram is drawn to include the key components of a typical loop feedback path The AO1 function block has been changed to feature a second output denoted AO1 BC This output has been connected to a feedback input at LP1 identified by the notation FB The AO1 BC designator stands for Analog Output 1 s Back Calculation When the control loop is brought on line AO1 BC will essentially represent the value of AO1 s 4 to 20 mA output at any particular instant The term Back Calculation is used to reinforce the idea that this information is being sent upstream against the flow of all other information within the function block diagram Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts Time Proportioning Relay Driven Pump A second control scheme is to use a relay to produce a time proportioning or Duration Adjusting Type DAT control signal Such an application is depicted in Figure 3 17 LINEAR pH INSTRUMENT TRANSMITTER
226. lization The output CVn OV is a kill time F_ which quantifies the destruction of microorganisms during a sterilization process represents the number of minutes after which the microorganism population is decreased by one decimal or log unit The z formula is F 2X dtx 100 795 where dt time between F measurements in minutes Dt is equal to the scan cycle of the instrument in minutes T measured temperature input in Tret reference temperature 121 C typical Z product dependent temperature constant This function also compares the calculated Fo value to the desired Fo value Fa Preset When Fo equals or exceeds Fg the function activates its discrete output CVn OS this output remains ON 1 until the Fe calculation is reset via the Reset Input The output CVn A2 is the Time Remaining Tr at the current temperature to achieve Fa and is calculated as follows Fa Fo 1 0 7 7 0 2 The Fo calculation will be reset and the Fo value will remain at zero while the Reset Input is ON 1 The calculation will resume when the Reset Input goes OFF 0 again Table 4 40 describes the Sterilization prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 40 Sterilization Prompts OUT LOW LIMIT OFF or number Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when these limits are exceeded OUTHIGHLMT HIGH LIMIT OFF discrete parameter 0 Reset input 1 TEMP INPUT OFF analog param
227. ls EDIT EVENTS EVENT 1 Enter the state of up to 16 discrete outputs of this segment These outputs can be used to trigger any action requiring a discrete signal such as a relay or another function block EVENT 16 An event stays on or off for the entire segment To trigger events in the middle of a segment you must divide the segment into 3 segments See Segment Events on pag 183 for details 196 Video Recorder User Manual 5 5 How to load and run a profiler Overview From the Setpoint Profile Trend s menu you can e load a profiler from memory e load a profiler from storage media e start a profiler e hold a profiler e reseta profiler e advance a profiler e shut down a profiler e view profiler events Setpoint Profiler e view profiler details profiler elapsed time segment time remaining profiler length in seconds PV 2 value e edit profile segments e view various profiler displays All these tasks can be done using the front panel buttons shown in Figure 5 14 The procedures are explained in the next several pages LP1 P2 LP3 ZON ONE2 ZONES T0050 1200000 29 123 45 123 45 123 45 ZONE4 ZONES ZONE6 123 45 123 45 123 45 ZONE7 ZONES ZONE9 123 45 123 45 123 45 Y 40520 fiosa oo 535 00 7255 00 sar ur so oo 50 So ZONEA ZONEB ZONEC 123 45 123 45 123 4
228. lsysternets skyddsjordsledare eR e Om utrustningen anv nds pa ett s dant s tt att det inte innefattas av tillverkarens specifikation kan de inbyggda s kerhetsfunktionerna ventyras e Ers tt aldrig n gon komponent eller del som inte r specificerad som ers ttningsbar av tillverkaren e All ledningsdragning m ste utf ras i enlighet med lokala best mmelser och skall utf ras av beh rig personal med erfarenhet av s dant arbete e Skyddsjordsanslutningen skall anslutas f re alla andra anslutningar och losskopplas sist e str mbrytare f r n str mmen rekommenderas STR MF RS RJNING Sp nning 100 a 240 V AC DC Frekvens 50 60 Hz Effekt eller m rkstr m 100 VA S kringsv rde 3 15 A 250 V AC DC OMGIVNINGSVILLKOR Anvand ej instrumentet i narhet av br nnbara vatskor eller gaser Anvandandet av instrumentet i s dant milj ar en direkt s kerhetsrisk Temperatur Omgivande 5 till 40 C F rvaring 20 till 60 Fuktighet 10 till 90 RH ej kondenserande 40 Vibration 10 till 40 Hz amplitud 0 07 mm 40 till 60 Hz acceleration 0 2 g INSTALLATION Instrumentet skall monteras i en panel eller i en l da f r att undvika att personalen kommer i ber ring med bakre inkopplingsplintar Video Recorder User Manual 275 Safety 276 Video Recorder User Manual Index Index A Action State 1 eH es 104 105 Control loop Advancing 204 O
229. lues of each loop are the output values of the Al1 and AI2 analog input function blocks 11 will produce temperature measurements of the reaction chamber and provide them to the process variable input of LP1 while measurements of the oil temperature in the jacket tank will be furnished to LP2 s PV input by AI2 Because LP1 OV will provide LP2 with its operating set point LP1 s output range will be defined in engineering units of temperature instead of the usual 0 to 100 LP2 s output range is 0 to 10096 in anticipation of using it to drive the AO1 function block s 4 to 20 mA signal Note that the range covered by LP1 OV will have to be consistent with the operating temperature range of the oil For example if it is determined that the oil temperature will be manipulated between 75 and 500 the low and high limits assumed by LP1 OV and for that matter SP2 will equal 75 and 500 respectively Finally LP2 BC and AO1 BC are the two back calculated feedback paths shown As is true for the operation of all back calculated feedback paths both LP2 BC and AO1 BC work together to acknowledge the cascaded control loops that the appropriate actions have taken place in response to both loops output values The method used to coordinate the tuning of the cascaded loops is particularly interesting Using the diagram of Figure 3 22 the first priority is to tune the secondary cascade loop of LP2 With LP1 kept in manual mode tuning may begin by first
230. ly if INDIR or SQRT was previously selected Is the actual high end value of voltage to be used for Indirect measurements ELECTRICAL UNITS Select whether the CIRCUIT LOW or Circuit low and circuit high units CIRCUIT HIGH values specified are in units of VOLTS MV millivolts or OHMS LAG 2 0 seconds or OFF LAG is a time constant applied to the input measurement value This provides digital filtering LAG to the measurement Lag appears on menu only if EXPANDED INPUT is enabled under Enable Features in the Program menu SAMPLE HOLD OFF discrete parameter 0 1 Holds Input The input value is measured normally when this discrete is OFF and holds its last value when the discrete is ON 1 Hold appears on menu only if EXPANDED INPUT is enabled under Enable Features in the Program menu FAILSAFE For thermocouples only Upscale UP Determines whether or not failsafe is active Downscale DOWN or None and if so which direction CLAMPING HI RANGE clamps the input at the Clamps input at specified value RANGE HIGH value LO RANGE clamps input at the RANGE LOW value RANGE ATTENTION Clamping is not recommended clamps input over both the low and high for process variable inputs to control loops range values NONE gives no clamping 88 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Custom algorithm prompts Table 4 7 describes the custom algorithm prompts See Table 4 2 for additional
231. m mode MAIN MENU prompt LOAD STORE CONFIG Here a file containing the instrument s programming and configuration is created by executing a routine called STORE CONFIG TO DISK The applicable file extensions for configuration files are LNC Note that an instrument configuration file may also be created and stored to disk using optionally purchased SCF Configuration Software You do not need a live instrument to create a configuration file using SCF Once stored to disk the instrument configuration file may be downloaded into other instruments that have an identical model number This helps to greatly reduce the amount of time required to program and configure multiple units sharing the same application Having the instrument configuration on disk can also drastically minimize down time in the event of an instrument failure The file can be used to program and configure a replacement unit within seconds Performing Set Point Program Storage 78 Refer to Section 5 of the manual for a detailed explanation of how Set Point Program Storage is accomplished Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 How To Program Function Blocks and Features 4 1 Overview This section describes all the programming procedures to get your instrument up and running except Profiles which are discussed in Section 5 It describes the entire Program Mode menu and some items from the Online Mode menu What s in this section
232. ment time remaining Profile length in seconds PV 2 value PV 2 ELAPSED TIME STIME REMAIN LENGTH SECS Video Recorder User Manual 205 Setpoint Profiler How to view profiler summary display Table 5 20 Summary Viewing Procedure Perform 1 and 2 from Start procedure Profiler menu is displayed Table 5 1 Press Decrement button to move cursor to Three profilers will be displayed as bar graphs Summary Press Enter Data for your profile s will be displayed 100 00 200 00 1500 00 FJ 0 00 200 00 100 00 RUN READY END 40 00 71 00 820 20 SEG 5 SEG 1 SEG 15 00 21 13 00 00 00 01 30 00 TREND TREND TREND Setpoint Profiler 3 Bar Summary SPP 3BS Press the Tab button to move the cursor to the The profiler trend of the selected profile is TREND of the desired profiler then press displayed Enter SP1 PROFILO seo PV 24127 www SP 248 00 scs RUN 206 Video Recorder User Manual Setpoint Profiler How to edit a profile s segments Profile may be in Run Ready End or Hold to edit segments CAUTION For value duration ramp type it is recommended you do not edit the currently running segment or the next segment Doing so may prematurely terminate the segment that is the profiler may jump to the next segment Table 5 21 Segment Editing Procedure 1 Perform steps 1 and 2 from Start procedure Profiler menu
233. mmed to store Events NONE status changes are not stored RISING OFF 0 to ON 1 changes can be stored FALLING ON 1 to OFF 0 changes can be stored BOTH Rising and falling changes can be stored Video Recorder User Manual 105 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 12 Program Calculated Values A Calculated Value CV is a data point whose value is derived from calculations involving other data points The CV Output can be analog or discrete A CV can include other CVs in its calculations Once a CV is created it can be used by any function block as many times as desired Select CALCULATED VALUES on the Main Program Menu Select a CV to program then choose from the types shown in Table 4 16 ATTENTION e Ifyou plan to program another function block using a Calculated Value as a parameter you must program the Calculated Value first e Once you change the type and press Enter the previous type s settings are deleted and cannot be recovered e f your unit has the standard math package you still have access to advanced math package types but the fields will be blank and unaccessible Table 4 16 CV Types Type Math Description Package NONE CCE No CV Programmed 1 1 1 1 COMPARE Compares input and outputs result 109 COUNTER A Counts transitions of input status mM MATH 1 _ 5 _ Calculates math on 8 inputs using oneoperator 114 LOGIC
234. must initialize the new disk to resume data storage Warm Start If power is off for less than 90 minutes a warm start will be used during power up All buffered data prior to power loss is retained and accumulated values in Calculated Value timers and totalizers are retained Control loop output values are also retained Setpoint Profilers resume where they left off If power is off for more than the warm up start time a cold start operation will occur Warm start times available in minutes 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 20 30 60 90 None Note that all data storage schedules that have been initialized or started via the ON LINE mode DATA STORAGE SETUP menu will automatically resume their execution upon the occurrence of a Warm Start Video Recorder User Manual 249 Maintenance 8 12 Demo This item is intended primarily for sales demonstrations It causes the instrument to display a series of simulated values Never turn the demo on in an instrument that has already been configured to support its true application without first saving the instrument s configuration to floppy disk Selecting DEMO will reconfigure Analog Inputs 1 through 4 and Discrete Input 1 When DEMO is turned off the demo s function block configurations are still used but their inputs are tied to the hardware and are no longer simulated It is recommended that the user clears memory after DEMO is turned off 250 Video Recorder User Manual Diagnostic and
235. n as hot start e Discrete input for enabling disabling guaranteed soak over the entire profile Video Recorder User Manual 175 Setpoint Profiler e Guaranteed soak configurable per segment e Discrete outputs to indicate profile state including Ready Run Hold In Progress and At End e Up to 16 Discrete outputs Events programmable per segment e Four user selectable methods for ramping e Automatic recycling of the profile e Up to four levels of looping within profile e Jumping to another segment e Batch operation including shutdown profiling activated through a discrete input or online menu Schematic of the Setpoint Profiler function block Outputs Event 1 Event 16 RESET RUN ADVANCE Setpoint output value SPn OV SHUTDOWN Ready Run Hold At End Status Guaranteed Hold Figure 5 1 Setpoint Profiler Schematic 176 Video Recorder User Manual Two types of profiles Setpoint Profiler A single phase profile is the simpler of the two profile types It does not contain startup and shutdown segments It runs from Segment 1 to the last segment A multiphase profile divides the profile into three phases the startup phase the batch phase and the shutdown phase With a multiphase profile you can rerun the batch phase multiple times known as AUTO CYCLING or skip to the shutdown phase The batch phase of a multiphase profile is specified by the BATCH FIRST SEGMENT and BATCH LAST SEG
236. n floppy disk or read from an optional serial communications link Analog and discrete data can be displayed in trend or tabular format Viewed data can be either live real time inputs or historical retrieved from disk Flexible modular design and several options make this instrument adaptable to nearly any industrial application VALUES VALUE11 TAGE TAG VALUES VALUE12 ZONES 123 45 ZONE8 123 45 1054 00 1623 00 1266 00 DEGC ZONEB 123 45 1 gt O 2 amp e e eG Figure 1 1 Video Recorder Video Recorder User Manual 1 Introduction 1 2 Specifications Table 1 1 Specifications Physical Enclosure Metal case and rugged die cast aluminium door and frame High impact resistant polycarbonate keypad and glass or polycarbonate window IP55 rating NEMA 3 from front panel Mounting Panel 40 mm thickness max 1 57 Dimensions Compact size 320 mm 12 60 depth 310 mm front face height x 317 mm width 12 21 x 12 48 278 mm x 278 mm 10 95 x 10 95 cutout Weight 14 kg depending on configuration 30 lbs Ports Standard PC keyboard Connector 6 pin mini DIN type on front panel May be used to connect to a QWERTY keyboard or to an ASCII Barcode Reader Environmental Temperature Operating 5 to 40
237. n the keyboard or press the Menu button on the front panel 84 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 3 Labels for Function Blocks Enter 16 characters maximum Called a descriptor Usually appears as a header or title on some displays and reports For alarms this is the actual alarm message If labeling is enabled the descriptor can be edited in the function block s program menu TAG Enter 7 characters maximum Identifies the point or function on most displays and reports Each tag must be unique f labeling is enabled the tag can be edited in the function block s program menu UNITS Default choices Shows units of measure for analog PSI DEGR values on most displays and reports BAR K This list of units can be changed under MW MV the ENGINEERING UNITS menu item If GPH V labeling is enabled the units can be edited in the function block s program GPM menu GPS HZ ON STATE ON DRAIN Select a label describing the ON 1 state DOWN FULL of the discrete function These labels STOP OUT cannot be changed HIGH CLOSED RUN ACTIVE FALSE ABORT RIGHT NORMAL INCRS MANUAL UNLOAD SP2 HEAT YES OFF STATE See ON STATE for default choices Select a label to describe the OFF 0 state of the discrete function These labels cannot be changed Video Recorder User Manual 85 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 4 Other Labels Range Selections Definition UNIT Enter up t
238. national IEC CENELEC CE standards for intended instrument locations The following Standards and Specifications are met or exceeded Case Protection Rear of Panel Flammability Rating Vibration Level Electromagnetic Compatibility Safety Intended Instrument Locations IP55 on front door only when the instrument is panel mounted and the front door securely closed EN 60529 IP 20 UL 94 V2 10 to 40 Hz 0 07 mm displacement 40 to 60 Hz 0 2g acceleration CE EMC Directive 89 336 EEC IEC1010 Installation Category II for personal protection Rack or panel mounting in control room or industrial environments operator accessibility front of panel only Installation Category II with grounded mains supply from isolation transformer GFI ground fault interrupter Pollution Degree 2 with rear of panel enclosed in industrial environment Video Recorder User Manual 9 Introduction 1 3 Model Selection Guide This table helps you to identify correctly the unit in front of you Please refer to the product label and verify that you have the right unit Select the desired key number The mark to the right shows the selection available A complete model number has the requested number of digits from each table as follows Video Recorder Model Number Figure 1 2 Video Recorder Model Number Make the desired selection from Tables I to VI The arrow to the right marks the selection available A dot e denotes unrestr
239. nd Input ON 1 B is OFF 0 If one and only one input is ON Result Input A is OFF 0 and Input ON 1 is ON B is ON 1 1 RESET SET FF Rising edge of Input A turns Result Input A is ON 1 ON 1 ON Reset Set Flip Flop Rising edge of Input B resets Result Input A is OFF 0 and Input OFF 0 B is ON 1 Reset Set FF Input A l Input B TOGGLE FF Toggle Flip Flop Rising edge of Input Input A changes from ON 1 if it was A inverts Result OFF 0 to ON 1 rising OFF 0 or OFF 0 edge if it was ON 1 Input A changes from unchanged ON 1 to OFF 0 falling edge Toggle Flip Flop Input A ri l l 1 f ONE SHOT Rising edge of Input A turns Result Input A is ON 1 for any ON 1 for 1 scan ON for one machine scan cycle length of time cycle of the instrument then OFF 0 One Shot Input A Result PASS Passes Input A s state unchanged to Input A changes state same as Input A CONDITION TYPE 118 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Free Form Logic Lets you enter up to 64 characters as a custom logic equation EQ containing inputs and logical operators The result of this equation is called Result Result is then processed according to the specified condition type and condition time The final output is CVn OS See Figure 4 6 Inputs CONDITION FREE FORM TYPE LOGIC Result amp CVn OS EQUATION CO
240. nd w 4 Bar Horizontal Trend Horizontal Trend Digital Horizontal Trend Bar VTRNDBAR H TREND HTRNDDIG HTRNDBAR 25000 TEMP7 11 15 4 2010 DEGrF 2 Ss 5 pan 1634 50 P L 3 160 zs ees E 225160 EMP5 1207 50 25160 DEGF __ 12 160 125009 7 25160 Hee TEMP1 HGH 4 Point Horizontal Bar Graph 6 Point Horizontal Bar Graph H 4 BAR H 6 BAR Figure 4 17 Displays Accessible by the Display Buttons continued 150 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features 1145 215 TEMP7 261 D TEMP1 TEMP2 TEMP3 4 1000 00 500 00 250 00 500 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 510 00 28 00 121 00 273 00 TEMP1 HIGH DEWPOINT IN 42 DEGF TEMP IN 252 DEGF 500 0 00 4 Point Vertical Bar Graph V 4 BAR 6 Point Vertical Bar Graph V 6 BAR 8 Point Vert Bar Graph ical V 8 BAR 12 Point Vertical Bar Graph V 12 BAR DATASTCHAGESTATUS 15 T
241. ne Loop 216 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operations Using Primary Displays 6 3 Display Messages and Symbols Overview Messages and symbols will appear in different areas of the display to inform the operator of a variety of conditions The area across the bottom of the display Figure 6 6 is reserved for messages that require the operator to take action They include Active Alarm Symbols Diagnostic Messages and Data Storage Messages Location The Alarm and Diagnostic messages consist of a symbol on the left side of the display and a text message next to it on the right The Data Storage message has no symbol and includes only the text portion Multiple messages If multiple messages are present simultaneously they will be arranged in a cascaded or shingled arrangement so that underlying symbols will be visible data storage on top diagnostics in the middle alarms on bottom Example of primary display Figure 6 6 shows an example of a primary display The Scoreboard individual point data BOILER7 2305 5 DEGF 12 15 36 11 15 13 15 36 3300 00 Messages AID DISK FULL Alarm Diagnostic Data Storage Figure 6 6 Example of Primary Display Video Recorder User Manual 217 Online Operations Using Primary Displays Description of Messages and Symbols Table 6 6 Messages and Symbols at Bottom of Display Message Symbol Red An active alarm exists Fla
242. nected to the ground terminal Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage Video Recorder User Manual 17 Installation EXAMPLE Rep A Cable retaining bracket 46210075 501 Rep B Grounding screw Rep C Clamp Rep D Shielded cable inputs Rep E External grounding cable The use of spade terminals on all wiring is recommended 18 Video Recorder User Manual Installation 2 5 Terminal connections 2 5 1 Rear cover The rear cover protects the I O boards terminal connectors On the rear cover a drawing reminds the user of the terminals use gt B a 5 X X MT g g 8 a a 5 EIS ER 9 a a a 8 9 EU a a a a By 8 8 8 2 AN 100 240 V E 50 60 Hz 100 VA 8 Y 3 5 AT 250 V Lu L2 N fl m 5 j Positions From A to F J to P Upper and lower rack From N to P Upper rack From J to P Upper rack From J to P Upper rack Al Analog inp
243. nfiammabili in quanto questo potrebbe essere estremamente pericoloso Temperatura Ambiente da 5 a 40 C Stoccaggio da 20 a 60 Umidit relativa Da 10 a 9096 UR non condensata a 40 Vibrazioni Da 10 a 40 Hz ampiezza 0 07 mm Da 40 a 60 Hz accelerazione 0 2 g INSTALLAZIONE DELL APPARECCHIO Il apparecchio deve essere montato su un pannello per limitare l accesso ai terminali posteriori Video Recorder User Manual 271 Safety SIKKERHETSKRAV NO21 6063 F lg alle retningslinjene i dette dokumentet slik at du reduserer risikoen for elektrisk st t og mulige personskader Dette symbolet advarer brukeren om tilgjengelige terminaler med farlige spenninger og en potensiell fare for elektrisk st t Jordingsterminal kabelen for jording av systemet skal tilknyttes til denne terminalen Eo Dersom utstyret benyttes p en m te annerledes enn spesifisert av produsent kan utstyrets beskyttelsesgrad forringes e Ingen komponenter eller deler skal skiftes ut dersom de ikke er uttrykkelig spesifisert som utskiftbare av din forhandler e Deter p krevet med en hovedstr msbryter i n rheten av utstyret e All kabling m utf res i henhold til gjeldende forskrifter og installeres av autoriser og erfaren installat r e Jord m tilknyttes f r all annen kabling og frakobles sist UTSTYRSPESIFIKASJONER Str mtilf rsel 100 til 240 V AC DC Nettfrekvens 50 60 Hz Kraftforbruk 100 VA Sikringsterrelse 3 15 A
244. ng new storage setup 223 initialize using same storage setup 223 initializitig erts c eee ern 223 installing mitteret erecti 222 Force DI DO Points eoeoed ete 232 Frequency 248 Frequently used programming parameters 82 Function block comporniehts ptus 51 Function block 52 Input 51 interconnecting essseeee 55 Parameter 52 Parameter code designators 53 parameter code 56 programming a function block parameter 58 programming input parameters 55 H Hold iecit Mec uibem ee 89 Holding profile 203 How data is 223 Initialization errors eener 224 Initializing a disk eeren 223 Initializing a disk using a new storage setup 223 Initializing a disk using the same storage setup 223 Installations 13 Interacting With Primary 210 L iicet ehe 84 Lag Time 89 Language Select ato ode ned Matte teaches
245. nged Gain or proportional band PB is the default however this may be changed 7 loop types available If the loop type is changed after a configuration is completed all previously programmed entries will be deleted Diagnostic routines You will be prompted to save your entries when leaving the loop program sequence Diagnostic routines are executed at this time to verify all entries are complete and compatible A FAIL message at this time may indicate incomplete entries or incompatible selections Split output tuning When programming Split Output control loops tuning parameter set 1 is automatically applied to output values between 0 and 100 Tuning parameter set 2 is automatically applied to output values between 0 and 100 Programming loop Control loop programming may require entry of numerical values analog parameters parameters or discrete parameters as determined by the specific loop feature In some cases the choices may be a numeral an analog parameter or OFF For parameter choices refer to Table 3 2 for definitions of the discrete and analog parameter types available OFF or NONE are listed as menu choices where applicable Scroll to locate Minimum programming Many of the prompted entry fields for control loops are optional As a general requirements rule the minimum entry information for control loops includes the Process Variable PV with range limits set point value some combination of gain reset and rate and a sou
246. ningun componente o parte no explicitamente especificado por el suministrador e Todo el cableado debe realizarse de acuerdo con las normas el ctricas locales y debe ser realizado por personal experimentado e El terminal de tierra debe ser conectado antes que cualquier otro cable y desconectado el ultimo Serecomienda la instalaci n de un interruptor de la alimentaci n principal cerca del equipo DATOS ELECTRICOS DEL EQUIPO Tensi n de alimentaci n 100 a 240 V ca cc Frecuencia 50 60 Hz Potencia o corriente 100 VA Fusible 3 15 A 250 V ca cc CONDICIONES AMBIENTALES No operar con el instrumento en presencia de liquidos o gases inflamables La operaci n de cualquier equipo el ctrico en tal ambiente constituye un riesgo contra la seguridad Temperatura Ambiente 5 a 40 C Almacenamiento 20 a 60 Humedad 10 a 9096 RH sin condensados a 40 C Vibraci n 10 a 40 Hz amplitud 0 07 mm 40 a 60 Hz acceleraci n 0 2 g INSTALACION DEL EQUIPO Este equipo debe ser montado en un panel para limitar al operador el acceso a los terminales traseros 274 Video Recorder User Manual Safety SAKERHETSFORESKRIFTER SW21 6063 F r att reducera riskerna av elektriska chocker som kan orsaka personskador f lj alla s kerhetsf reskrifter i denna dokumentation Denna symbol varnar anv ndaren f r risk f r elchock vid tillf llig tkomst av sp nningsf rande del Anslutning av skyddsjord Avsedd f r anslutning av e
247. nne 176 Figure 5 2 Single and Multi phase Profiles sees 177 Figure 5 3 Value Duration Ramp Type entente entree nete enne nennen 178 Figure 5 4 Time Ramp teeth enne teen aii a ii 179 Figure 5 5 Rate Ramp Type eene terrere eren tenere nets 180 Figure 5 6 External Ramp Type eene 181 Figure 5 7 Guaranteed Soak and Hysteresis sse nnns 182 Figure 5 8 Activating Events In Mid Segment sse 183 Figure 5 9 Example Of A Segment Loop sss 184 Fig re 5 10 Hot Statt sette ep ROG e am rp e pee HRS 186 Figure 5 11 Fast urere ee eee n A edere efe erre i ere PR 187 Figure 5 12 Shutdown nennen rene teen teen teneret entente ne teen tenente 188 Figure 5 13 Allowable and Non Allowable Program 192 Figure 5 t4 Buttons doute DDR UNI DERIT S 197 Figure 6 1 Changing Profile Batch 210 Figure 6 2 Horizontal and Vertical Trend Displays sese 211 Figure 6 3 Vertical Trend at 2X Zoom eene enne nre tnter tenere 213 Figure 6 4 Panel Display ee ttn entis a 214 Figure 6 5 Loop Displays hein pee Dr red 215 Figure 6 6 Example of Primary 1
248. nostic descriptions and possible causes Video Recorder User Manual 229 Online Operation Using Menus What happens during a diagnostic Aflashing blue diagnostic indicator will appear on the bottom of the screen The diagnostic message will be entered into the diagnostic summary which can be viewed at any time The summary contains each message and the date and time of occurrence f Data Storage is set up accordingly the diagnostic occurrence will also be logged on a summary list stored on floppy disk diagnostic summary can contain a maximum of 50 messages with the newest shown at the top of the list As new diagnostics occur beyond 50 the oldest will be dropped from the list Diagnostic messages are not automatically removed from the summary if the error condition is corrected The list must be deleted from the screen periodically by the operator as described under Delete All Diagnostics Acknowledging Diagnostic Messages When a diagnostic occurs it must be acknowledged by the operator to stop its indicator from flashing See Table 7 7 Acknowledging a diagnostic only stops its indicator from flashing it does not correct the cause of the diagnostic You are not required to acknowledge a diagnostic The flashing can also be stopped if all diagnostics are erased using the DELETE ALL DIAGNOSTICS menu selection Table 7 7 Diagnostic Acknowledgment Procedure Select ACCESS SUMMARIES from the main online menu S
249. nt If at the last segment the profiler advances to the first segment If itis a multiphase profile the profiler advances within the batch phase only Events assume their segment states To resume running the profiler select Start Profile resumes running from the new segment How to shut down a profiler Table 5 17 Profiler Shutdown Procedure Result Notes Place profiler in Hold b oy Profiler See Profiler Hold procedure i h Table 5 1 5 14 holding procedure Table 5 1 Press Decrement button to move cursor to Profiler advances to the shutdown phase Shutdown Press Enter To resume running the profiler select Start Profile resumes running from the beginning of the shutdown phase 204 Video Recorder User Manual Setpoint Profiler How to view event status Table 5 18 Event Viewing Procedure Perform steps 1 and 2 from Start procedure Profile menu is displayed Table 5 13 2 Press Decrement button to move cursor to Live On Off status of all 16 events are displayed Events Press Enter If Events change status they do so at the beginning of the segment and Hold the status during the entire segment EVENTS How to view profiler details Table 5 19 Details Viewing Procedure Perform steps 1 and 2 from Start procedure Profiler menu is displayed Table 5 13 2 Press Decrement button to move cursor to Shows Detail Press Enter Elapsed time since profile was started including time spent in Hold Seg
250. number is assigned automatically by the instrument when the batch is started by either method BATCH CONTROL or BATCH STATE Video Recorder User Manual 225 Online Operation Using Menus Checking Data Storage Status The Data Storage Status display is accessed from the Online data storage online menu It is also accessed by pressing any display button if the button has this display assigned to it Sge Figure 711 DATA STORAGE STATUS 13 5 Time remaining for each trend days REMAINING DDD HH MM hee hours minutes 135 14 52 Y LO 271 06 00 Y Number of remaining LO ROLL Y ALARM SAMPLES OFF Y avents Magnesite EVENT SAMPLES OFF Y ane DIAG SAMPLES OFF Y Status of system disk UNIT DATA SAMPLES OFF Y and Enable Storage SYSTEM NORMAL DISK NORMAL ENABLE STORAGE ENABLE Storage active Status of external enable Y Enabled Disabled Figure 7 1 Data Storage Status Display Replaying stored data Data stored on floppy disks can be retrieved and displayed online at any time whether data storage is active or not All data is stored as individual files and is retrieved by filename To retrieve a file from disk follow the procedure in Table 775 Table 7 5 Data Storage Replay Procedure Insert the disk containing the desired file into the instrument Select DATA STORAGE and then REPLAY FROM DISK A list of filenames of all the files
251. ny times EDIT PROFILE LOOPS LOOP 1 4 Define up to 4 loops per profile Note that the 2 repeat count is the number of loop repetitions FROM SEGMENT 1 63 not the number of loop executions See Loop TO SEGMENT 1 63 Segments on pag for details REPEAT COUNT 1 999 JUMP FROM The profile can be forced to jump from any SEGMENT segment to any other segment A jump within a loop will continue that loop A jump outside a loop will exhaust that loop A jump outside the batch phase will exhaust any auto cycling in effect At the completion of this segment the profiler will jump to the beginning of JUMP TO SEGMENT JUMP TO SEGMENT At the completion of JUMP FROM SEGMENT the profiler will jump to the beginning of this segment 194 Video Recorder User Manual Setpoint Profiler Table 5 5 Edit Profile Prompts continued TIME MULTIPLIER Number Time Multiplier determines the speed at which the profiler will run when in Fast Forward mode It is used for testing the profiler s execution See Fast Forward When FAST FORWARD is ON 1 the profiler will run at a speed determined by the TIME MULTIPLIER parameter Example The instrument is running at a 500msec scan rate The TIME MULTIPLIER is set to 60 Therefore the profiler will run in 00 x 60 or 30 second increments Running a profiler in FAST FORWARD is a way to check for proper functioning of the profiler s events and outputs without having to wait for the
252. o 16 characters to specify a The unit name appears on all Data Storage label for the instrument floppy disks coming from this instrument ENGINEERING Enter up to 4 characters to change You can change the 25 engineering units UNITS available engineering units from the available in Table 4 3 as UNITS defaults PSI DEGR GAL MA To reset the 25 engineering units to their BAR K LPH 96 defaults select RESET DEFAULTS MW MV LPM PH GPH V LPS KG GPM LITR GPS HZ DEGC LB DEGF FILENAMES Enter up to 6 characters to change These filenames will appear as choices on available filenames from these defaults other menus FILE CYCLE DRYER To reset the filenames to their defaults PROD RECORD TANK select RESET DEFAULTS UNIT LOOP REACTR CONFIG KILN VESSEL CALIB WCHEM PRESS FURNCE DEMIN CONTRL BATCH FERMTR LEHR LINE STRLZR OVEN ZONE 86 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 7 Program Analog Inputs To program Analog Inputs select PROGRAM ANALOG INPUTS on the Main Program Menu Select an Al to program Table 4 5 Analog Input Algorithm Selection INPUT ALGORITHM Standard or Custom This prompt appears only if CUSTOM INPUT is enabled under Enable Features in the Program Mode Menu Section 0 If CUSTOM INPUT is disabled you will see the Standard prompts Table 4 6 Standard lets you choose a thermocouple RTD EMF or pyrometer type The Standard prompts are shown in Table 4 6 Custom lets
253. o enter the changes Press Menu to leave the menu Adjust Analog Inputs If the Al point has been configured with a pyrometer range the Input Adjust is applied as a multiplier equal to the newly entered value divided by the actual measured valued at the time that the adjustment is entered In this case the Value Adjust is referred to as an emissivity adjustment If the Al point has been configured with any other range the value adjust is applied as a bias equal to the newly entered value minus the actual measured value at the time that the adjustment is entered All points on the display which are currently adjusted will have a Value Adjust Indicator beside the value To adjust a value select the desired Al and press Enter Press Enter to highlight the value then use the Up Arrow Down Arrow and Enter buttons to change the value on the display The value can be changed to any value within the programmed limits of the Al To remove the value adjustment set the value to OFF The Al will display its current value and the indicator will be removed Set Analog Outputs This menu item will appear if the optional analog outputs are installed It lets you adjust various analog output parameters Two output types are available current output CAT and time proportion duration adjusting DAT Failsafe Value Enter a value of 0 to 10096 or an analog parameter for the initial output This is the initial output on cold start
254. ode The outputs will remain frozen in their present state either On or Off Video Recorder User Manual 35 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 4 Menu Navigation 36 Moving between the Program Online and Maintenance modes of the instrument is accomplished through use of the instrument s Menu Up Arrow Down Arrow and Enter keys located on its front door Refer to Figure 3 1 054 00 62300 1266 00 104000 622 00 10 0 5 0 Display Menu Enter Display 2 Uuto Arrow Manual Figure 3 1 Video Recorder Front Door Buttons Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts A more detailed explanation of the function of each button appears in Section 3 5 To develop a feel for navigating between modes power up the instrument and perform the sequence of steps that follows Upon powering up the instrument for the very first time the logo display will initially appear Press the Menu button several times until the ON LINE PROGRAM or MAINTENANCE mode MAIN MENU is displayed Refer to Figure 3 2 Note Menus are shown with all possible options your menu may not have all options PRODUCT INFO SIN YXX XX XXXXXXXXXXX PART NUMB ER 46900052 001 VERSION X X Product Info Display MAIN MENU ONLINE ACCES
255. of affected configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file function block Invalid Tag Request Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the Verify programming of affected configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file function block Invalid Type in Point A class of block was detected that is invalid for the Verify programming of affected Spec product function block Lag or Delay Less than Al lag or delay is less than zero Change lag or delay to greater Zero than or equal to zero 256 Video Recorder User Manual Diagnostic and error messages Table 9 4 Error Messages continued mw Low Limit Outside of Al circuit low limit is lt voltage limit of 500 mV Change circuit low limit to 500 Circuit mV Low limit Outside of For thermocouple or RTD Range Low limit is the Change limit to within specified Table low limit for that type limits for that type Table 4 3 Low Output Limit less A current output CAT low limit is less than zero Change current output CAT low than Zero limit to greater than or equal to Zero Monthly Periods Must Be Periodic Timer CV period is monthly but no phase is Change Periodic Timer phase Phased defined No Room for Function System has used all allocated function blocks Verify programming of affected Block function block Number of Frames Out of Rolling Average CV of Samples is less than 1 or Change of Samples to 1 60 Range greater than 60 Out of E
256. offers no security Secures the following items MEMORY CLEAR SERVICES in Maintenance mode PROGRAM SECURITY in Program mode Changing out of Online Mode See SET MODE SET MODE Set to Yes to secure changing from Online mode to Program or Maintenance modes OPERATOR SEC 3 digit number Enter a non zero operator security code value a value of zero CODE offers no security Secures the following items if set to Yes AUTO MANUAL Set to Yes to secure Online changes between a loop s Auto and Manual modes SP1 SP2 Set to Yes to secure Online changes between a loop s SP1 and SP2 SETUP PARAMETERS Set to Yes to secure changes to e Online Data Entry menu items Alarm Set points Analog Input Adjust e Online Tune Loop menu REVIEW PROGRAM Set to Yes to secure Online access to Review Programming via REVIEW PROGRAMMING menu DATA STORAGE Set to Yes to secure access to any part of data storage via Online DATA STORAGE SETUP menu Does not affect access to Online DATA STORAGE STATUS display PROFILER Set to Yes to secure access to all Set point Profiler menus and displays 160 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 21 Serial Communications Serial Communications is an optional feature that lets the instrument exchange data with a host device a PC running Honeywell or other compatible software on an RS422 485 data link Using Modbus RTU protocol this link can be used to transfer configuration
257. og Outputs eeeeeeee 246 Discrete outputs e up 90 102 105 CAT Calibration eene 246 Discrete point status Checking current storage setup 224 displaying ois ere t ttt 230 Clock Display alarm 228 SOL 162 Display All 230 Cold Starts a catene ette 249 Display All 230 Communications serial Display button programin uice ete detenta 161 displays accessed 209 Constant Display Messages and Symbols 217 edibus cds Eu itt 232 Video Recorder User Manual 277 Index E Edit Alarm 232 Edit Constants reete 232 Editing profile segments 207 Electrical Units eet 89 Enable storage 166 Error messages diagnostics 251 Error Messages 255 Events middle of ramp 183 Exponential notation how to display eene 82 F First Godi acad 108 First Time Start eere 249 Floppy disk initialize usi
258. ogramming This item is visible only if enabled under Enable Features in the Program mode Select this item to see how the instrument is configured You can view all Program mode menus as if you were in Program mode but you cannot change anything 242 Video Recorder User Manual Maintenance 8 Maintenance 8 1 Overview This section includes information on maintenance through the Maintenance Mode menu using some off line utility programs and diagnostics procedures To avoid voiding the warranty contact your service provider before attempting any service or repair of this instrument Maintenance Mode is an off line mode for maintaining proper operation of the instrument and setting defaults Enter Maintenance Mode by selecting MAINTENANCE on the SET MODE line of the On Line or Program Main Menu Remember that this mode is an off line mode Table 8 4 Maintenance Mode Menu Wwewdeme RESET UNIT Resets instrument to recognize changes to Main Frequency or Scan Frequency PRODUCT INFORMATION Displays product information MAINS FREQUENCY Sets the power supply frequency 50 or 60 Hz DEMO Enables simulated input values For demonstration purposes only Video Recorder User Manual 243 Maintenance What s in this section The following topics are explained in this section Routine Maintenance 245 Set Mode 245 Calibrate Analog Inputs 245 AO Module Calibration 246 Off line Diagnostics 247 Database S
259. oid a potential shock hazard never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of protective grounding terminal FUSE To prevent a fire make sure to use the appropriate fuse current voltage type Before replacing the fuse turn off the power and disconnect the power source Do not use a differen fuse or short circuit the fuse holder DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of a electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard NEVER TOUCH THE INTERIOR OF THE INSTRUMENT Inside this instrument there are areas of high voltage therefore never touch the interior if thg power is connected This instrument has an internal changeable system however internal inspection and adjustments should be done by qualified personnel only If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired Do not replace any component or part not explicitly specified as replaceable by your supplier INSTALL INDOOR ONLY Video Recorder User Manual 13 Installation 2 2 Unpacking Examine the shipping container carefully If there are visible signs of damage notify the carrier and your local sales office immediately If there is no visible damage compare the contents with the packing list Notify your local sales office if there
260. old a profiler Table 5 14 Profiler Hold Procedure Perform steps 1 and 2 from Start procedure Profile menu is displayed Table 5 13 Press Decrement button to move cursor to The profiler is held at its present value and the Hold Press Enter segment s events are frozen Elapsed time continues Run time stops Events are held at their current states ATTENTION A profile can also be put on HOLD by pressing the F2 button but only if that profile s HOLD parameter was configured as SY1 F2 See Sectidn 5 4 How to reset a profiler Table 5 15 Profiler Reset Procedure Place profiler in Hold See Profiler Hold procedure inTable 5 14 Perform steps 1 and 2 from Start procedure Profile menu is displayed Table 5 13 Press Decrement button to move cursor to Profiler is reset to segment 1 All profiler timers Reset Press Enter are reset All events go OFF Profiler output goes to starting value of segment 1 ATTENTION A profile can also be RESET by pressing the button but only if that profiles RESET RUN parameter was configured as SY1 See Sectidn 5 4 Video Recorder User Manual 203 Setpoint Profiler How to advance a profiler to the next segment Table 5 16 Profiler Advance Procedure WX Place profiler in Hold See Profiler Hold procedure inTable 5 14 Press Decrement button to move cursor to Profiler advances to next segment Each press of Advance Press Enter Enter advances the profiler one segme
261. ompatible PC or with the FORMAT DISK command in the Data Storage menu DISK IS MISSING No disk is installed in the drive Checking current storage setup To see what is being stored and when select DATA STORAGE SETUP then select REVIEW CURRENT SCHEDULES 224 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operation Using Menus Starting and stopping storage Data Storage can be started and stopped three ways At the highest level the ENABLE STORAGE menu item enables or disables all data storage At the next highest level EXTERNAL ENABLE enables or disables storage for each file type Trends 1 3 Alarms Events Diagnostics Unit Data At the lowest level storage for each file type is started and stopped with one of two controls a menu item BATCH STATE or a discrete parameter BATCH CONTROL Table 744 describes each method of starting and stopping storage ENABLE STORAGE EXTERNAL ENABLE BATCH STATE BATCH CONTROL BATCH NUMBER Table 7 4 Storage Start Stop Controls Comments Acts as a master enable disable switch for all data storage Select this item from the DATA STORAGE menu Set to ENABLE to allow storage of the current schedule If this is set to DISABLE online data storage cannot take place even if storage for individual files is enabled with EXTERNAL ENABLE Acts as a enable high disable low switch for each storage file type trends alarms events diagnostics unit data Any storage file whose externa
262. on the disk will appear The filename extension identifies the type of data in the file Note Events can only be replayed with SDA data analysis software LNT Trend LNA Alarms LNE Events LND Diagnostics LNU Unit Data Select a start time within the first and last times Data replay will begin at this time For trends select horizontal or vertical replay format and screen size timebase Select Replay to view the data 226 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operation Using Menus ATTENTION If you are replaying data from a non current disk keep in mind that the instrument will continue acquiring data and holding it temporarily in its active memory RAM until you insert a proper disk for storage If you spend too much time replaying data the instrument could run out of active memory space If this occurs a storage full warning message will be displayed See Tables 6 6 and 6 7 for an explanation of the various warning messages Examining replay data For details on examining replay trend data see Section 6 2 Interacting With Primary Displays To examine replayed alarms events and diagnostics use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow keys Reading Data Storage Messages See Data Storage Messages in Table 6 6 for message descriptions Video Recorder User Manual 227 Online Operation Using Menus 7 3 Access Summaries Summaries are available for all points alarms and diagnostics in the instrument Display a
263. on zugelassenem erfahrenem Personal durchgef hrt werden e Die Erde mu vor allen anderen Kabeln angeschlossen und zuletzt abgeklemmt werden e Inder Nahe der Ausr stung mu ein Schalter in der Hauptstromversorgung vorhanden sein AUSR STUNGSDATEN Netzspannung 100 bis 240 VAC Frequenz 50 60 Hz Nennleistung 100 VA Sicherungswert 3 15 250 VAC UMGEBUNGSBEDINGUNGEN Betreiben Sie das Ger t nicht in Gegenwart entflammbarer Fl ssigkeiten oder Dampfe Der Betrieb elektrischer Ger te in solchen Umgebungen stellt ein Sicherheitsrisiko dar Temperatur Umgebung 5 bis 40 C Lager 20 bis 60 Feuchtigkeit 10 bis 90 RH ohne Kondensation 40 Vibration 10 bis 40 Hz Amplitude 0 07 mm 40 bis 60 Hz Beschleunigung 0 2 g ANBRINGUNG DER AUSR STUNGEN Der Regler in ein Pult eingebaut sein damit der Bediener nicht zu oft auf die hinteren Anschl sse zugreifen Video Recorder User Manual 269 Safety ATIAITHZEIZ AZOAAEIAZ I P21 6063 Mia Tnv Tou Kiv Uvou nAekrporrAn amp ag Trou 8a urropo oe va rrpoKaA osl TIPOOWTTIKO AKOAOUBEIOTE OAEG UTTOOEIEEIG AOMAAEIAG AUTWV TWV oonylwv To aur rrposi orroie TO YEFOTN NAEKTPIKO K vOuvo o TIEPITITWON pe erriK v uva HEPN TNG OUOKEUNC l ipoorareurik reppariK yeiwons Nap xetal yia oUVOEON pe TOV aywy TIPOOTOTEUTIKHS YEIWONS TOU OUOT ATO
264. onnections 25 DO Board Relay Contact Setting teens 26 RS232 wiring configuration eee beet Re Os 29 RS422 wiring confIg rallon oou ee eO e Otis 30 RS422 Interface Conriectioris eae reni cette de edes a 30 RS485 wiring configuration sse tenente nennen 32 Interface connector aoctor tete teet ice tei Pete ecce let ERE iet 32 Video Recorder Front Door Buttons essent nene nnne 36 Menu Navigation Guide Through ON LINE PROGRAM and MAINTENANCE mode MAIN MENUS 3 2 erected eed epe ett 37 ON LINE mode MAIN MENU 38 PROGRAM mode MAIN MENU sse 39 MAINTENANCE mode MAIN MENU sse enne 40 Connection of a keyboard or a barcode reader sese 47 Alarm 1 Function Block Components ssssssssseseeeeneenee enne 51 Example Input Parameter Connection sse 55 Function Block Connection Format ecccececcsssseceseeseseseseeceseecsececseeceseecsececaeeceaeeceeeecaeeesaeeeeees 56 Example Configuration eere dt iter hee pe prie pe rte tn 59 Control Of Furnace Zone Temperature With 4 20 mA CAT Control Signal 60 Basic Function Blocks Required For Control Configuration Of Figure 3 11 61 Labeling Each Function Block s Name And Major Inputs And
265. oor complete with LCD plastic window and latch 46193090 503 244 46193090 504 244 Door complete with LCD plastic window and lock Portable case 46193121 501 252 Spare case galvanised 46193120 501 253 Spare painted case 46193120 503 253 46180091 003 Kit of 2 keys for key lock LCD screen 46193062 501 Video Recorder User Manual 259 Parts 260 Video Recorder User Manual CPU board 46193304 501 Power supply 46190250 502 Portable case 46190112 501 Spare case galvanised 46190104 501 Spare painted case 46190104 503 Terminal block for alarm relays ac dc l Os 46190204 501 Terminal block for low voltage inputs 46190202 501 Relay output board with terminals 46190308 501 DC digital output board with terminals 46190341 501 m AC digital output board with terminals 46190344 501 Communication board Analog output board with terminals 46190314 501 Contact closure input board with terminals 4619031 1 501 Universal analog input board with terminals 46190305 501 Ps DC digital input board with terminals 46190347 501 AC digital input board with terminals 46190350 501 Door complete with LCD glass and latch 46193090 501 Door complete with LCD glass and lock 46193090 502 Door complete with LCD plastic window and latch 46193090 503 Door complete with LCD plastic window and lock 46193090 504 Noc N Disk L
266. op PID or ON OFF control with various outputs Setpoint Profiler Generates a time varying setpoint for a loop s Setpoint 2 System SY Outputs discrete status of alarms data storage and diagnostics outputs analog value of reference junction temperature This function block is not programmable its outputs are produced automatically Totalizer 48 Outputs accumulated total over time Depends on options ordered Why use function blocks Function blocks give you configuration flexibility For instance the instrument does not have a dedicated relay that is activated during an alarm instead you can program any of several Alarm function blocks to control any relay Also there is not a specific input for your process variable any of several Analog Input function blocks can be programmed to be your process variable In general function blocks let you connect the output parameter of any function block to the input parameter of any function block 50 Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts 3 10 Components of function blocks The three components of a function block are Input parameter s Function block parameter s Output parameter s Figure 3 7 shows the function block Alarm 1 s components Alarm 1 Function Block Function block parameter 8 ALARM ACTION Select High Low Dev LRate H Rate Output parameters Function block parameter ___g IN DECIMAL POS Select input decim
267. op s programming menu accessed under PROGRAM CONTROL LOOPS you will not find a SETPOINT 2 menu choice The ratio control loop function block operates with the formula WILD VARIABLE X RATIO SETPOINT RATIO BIAS assuming all the functionality of the ratio loop s second set point Pressing the SP key to switch the working set point of a live ratio control loop from SP2 to SP1 will essentially suspend any ratio control and cause the loop to behave like a standard PID controller This standard PID loop will have a local set point equal to the value programmed for SETPOINT 1 To control the process variable using a fixed set point that is independent of the loop s WILD VARIABLE input toggle the ratio control loop s working set point to SP1 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 9 Program Analog Outputs The analog outputs will be accessible if an analog output board is detected upon power up If the instrument will be used for control program the loops first See Program Control Loops in Section 4 8 Select an analog output to program Analog output type Select the output type from Table 4 11 Table 4 11 Analog Output Types Type as displaye Full name of output type CAT Current Adjusting Type Current output DAT Duration Adjusting Type Time proportioning output Table 4 12 shows the prompts for each type of Analog Output Table 4 12 Prompts For Analog Output Types Table 4 13 descr
268. or example a programmed constant retains its value and continues to function in calculations whether it is disabled or enabled Table 4 65 Enable Features Prompts EXPANDED INPUT ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes the LAG and SAMPLE HOLD functions from the Analog Input Programming menu PYROMETRY ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes all the Rayotube and Spectray ranges from the list of types on the Program Analog Input menu AI VALUE ADJUST ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes the ANALOG INPUT ADJUST from the Online Data Entry menu which disables the ability to apply adjust or emissivity corrections DI DO FORCING ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes the FORCE DI DO POINTS from the Online Data Entry menu which removes the ability to force any DI DO on or off ALARMS ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes access to the entire alarm system Any alarms already programmed will still operate giving message stripes and operating relays There will be no alarm summary or related displays CONSTANTS ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes the Constant entry display thus removing the ability to set or adjust CN values CNs previously programmed will continue to exist LABELING ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes the labeling prompts from the individual parameter programming submenus Labeling can still be entered from the ENTER LABELS item on the main Program menu REVIEW PROGRAM ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes the REVIEW PROGRAMMING function from the main Online menu D
269. or on bar displays INPUT HIGH LIMIT COMM CONSTANT Yes No When enabled any constant writes via modbus communication will only be written to the RAM copy of the configuration and not to the non volatile flash copy When the unit cold starts the constant values set up to be periodically written via communications will revert back to any value that was manually set via the local HMI The local HMI will always write the constant value to the RAM and non volatile flash which will be preserved across a power cycle Video Recorder User Manual 147 Programming Function Blocks and Features Destination defined To program Loops and Analog Outputs you select the Program Control Loops or Program Analog Outputs from the Program Mode Menu then program each menu item Some of these menu items such as proportional band or slew limits are function block parameters that is they can be programmed with numerical values only A Constant s DESTINATION overrides that numerical value with a live value variable provided by the Constant s VALUE For example suppose Loop1 s Gain 1 is programmed as the number 5 00 and Constant 1 s Value is CV 1 OV the output of Calculated Value 2 By programming Constant1 s Destination as LP1GN Loop1 s Gain 1 will no longer be 5 00 but will be continuously updated by the live value provided by CV 1 OV CN 1 LP 1 VALUE GAIN 1 5 00 DEST LP 1 GN CV 10V Figure 4 16 Example of Constant
270. order User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 56 Paper Chart Speed Equivalents to Time Base Selections Instrument Paper Chart Vertical Trend Paper Chart Horizontal Trend Time Screen cm hour inches hour cm hour inches hour Set Up Trend 2 3 4 See Table 4 55 for prompts For Point 1 Point 12 enter second group of up to 12 points that will be displayed as a horizontal or vertical trend Log scale trending This feature enables trending of logarithmic trending on the video chart This feature is enabled by the following rules 1 Programming the decimal point for trend point 1 as X XXEXX and then trend point 1 and any subsequent trend point that also has X XXEXX as the decimal point will be plotted logarithmically with the number of log divisions derived automatically from the low and high limit of point 1 2 Setting up the trend display limits decimal position to be X XXEXX and then any trend point that also has X XXEXX as its decimal position will be plotted logarithmically with the number of log divisions derived automatically from the low and high of the first trend point found with X XXEXX decimal position Video Recorder User Manual 153 Programming Function Blocks and Features Live Trend Buffer Size Table 4 57 1 trend group live buffer size 1 Trend Group Number of Number of Display length points in the pages in the 15min 30min 1hr 2hr 4hrs 8hrs 24hrs trend buffer
271. p switches to its default failsafe condition indicated by certain display symbols flashing To return the loop to its desired condition correct the failure Then if the loop s LATCHING is NO the loop will return to normal automatically If LATCHING is YES also perform the action needed to return the loop to normal Table 9 3 Abnormal Loop Conditions And Indicators Desired Conditio Abnormal Conditioi Default condition Flashir J Action needed al sate symbo 5 if LATCHING YE Auto amp SP2 SP2 Failure Working SP SP1 Manual amp SP2 SP2 Failure Working SP SP1 Auto amp SP2 SP2 amp PV Failure Working SP SP1 Select SP1 then SP2 Select Manual then Mode Suspend Auto Output Failsafe Manual amp SP2 SP2 amp PV Failure Working SP SP1 Select SP1 then SP2 Mode Manual Output Last value Auto amp SP1 SP2 PV Failure or Mode Suspend Auto Select Manual then Force Remote Manual Output Failsafe Failure or Output Tracking Failure or Feedforward Failure Manual amp SP1 SP2 PV Failure Mode Manual PV None required Output Last Value Auto amp SP1 SP2 See below Mode Suspend Auto AUTO None required Output Back Calc Value MAN Auto amp SP1 SP2 Force Remote Manual Mode Suspend Auto AUTO None required Output Tracking value Due to the abnormal condition the loop cannot be in Auto and therefore is in a temporary mode which forces the output as indicated If loop feedback is not connected to
272. p to 8 characters Profile Events Up to 16 events can be defined in each segment of a profile Each event s state is activated at the beginning of the segment and is held throughout the segment Video Recorder User Manual 3 Introduction Table 1 1 Specifications continued Universal Analog Inputs Number 4 per module up to 12 modules per video recorder Input Types mV V mA T C RTD pyrometers Signal source Thermocouple with cold junction compensation Line resistance up to 1000 ohms T C mV mA V RTD 3 wire connections 40 ohms balanced maximum Input Impedance 10 megohms for T C and mV inputs 1 megohm for volt inputs Input Isolation 400 point to point 1350 Vac RMS A D converter to logic Stray rejection Series mode gt 60 dB Common mode at 120 Vac gt 130 dB Burnout T C Pyrometry configurable to upscale downscale or none Linear types none except following ranges Volt 500 to 500 mV 1 to 1V 2 to 2V 5 to 5V 0 to 10V 10 to 10V inherent to zero volt RTD Inherent upscale Inherent downscale T C Break Detection Scan rate Fastest rate 250 ms up to 4 inputs 500 ms up to 12 inputs 750 ms up to 16 inputs 1s up to 24 inputs 1 5 s up to 28 inputs 2 s up to 44 inputs s up to 48 inputs A D Converter Resolution Better than 1 part in 50 000 at 50 Hz Better than 1 part in 41 667 at 60 Hz Analog Outputs Number 4 per module non isolated up to 2 modules per video recorder 8 o
273. placing LP2 in manual mode and then manipulating LP1 s output This will allow the generation of an LP2 set point that will induce a process upset when the secondary loop is placed back in automatic mode Only after LP2 has been tuned can LP1 be tuned When tuning LP1 LP2 will be kept in automatic mode throughout the entire time LP1 is exercised Since the tuning of LP2 will have already been established tuning LP1 may be approached by first mentally blocking out the secondary control loop s existence and visualizing LP1 s output as connected to a sort of virtual analog output function block In this light tuning the overall cascade control configuration becomes the considerably simpler matter of tuning a single control loop Video Recorder User Manual 69 Programming and Operating Concepts Set Point Profile Implementation 70 By definition set point profiles are essentially user specified plots of process values against time These plots are characterized by segments which are a series of intervals of varying time lengths that divide the plots into several segments Within each segment process values are typically drawn as straight lines that ramp up or down or stay constant at predetermined levels An example of a simple five segment set point profile is shown in Figure 3 23 Set point profiles with up to 63 segments can be specified using the instrument Note that when a segment depicts the process value as sloping up or down
274. ply with these instructions may result in product damage Video Recorder User Manual 15 Installation 2 3 3 Installing the video recorder To install the video recorder follow the figure below Step 1 Remove rear cover and wire access holes Step 2 Insert video recorder through the panel cutout Step 3 Attach mounting brackets to the sides of the video recorder Bracket position Step 4 Tighten the mounting screws Mounting brackets 16 Video Recorder User Manual Installation NOTE When installing the video recorder the following limits should be respected Mounting angle limits 2 4 Wiring the video recorder 2 4 1 Recommendations CAUTION All wiring must be in accordance with local electrical codes and should be carried out by authorized and experienced personnel The ground terminal must be connected before any other wiring and disconnected last A switch in the main supply is mandatory near the equipment If an external fuse is used to protect the electrical circuit to the video recorder the fuse should match the video recorder fuse rating fuse type as well as for the fuseholder Sensor wiring should be run as far as possible from power wiring motors contactors alarms etc To reduce stray pick up we recommend the use of a twisted pair sensor wiring EMI effects can be further reduced by the use of shielded cable sensor wiring The shield must be con
275. point Located above vertical trends right of horizontal trends along side of bar graph These symbols appear automatically if a displayed point is the input to one or more Alarm function blocks The first 4 low type alarm blocks using the displayed points are represented by these symbols High Alarm Setpoint Located above vertical trends right of horizontal trends or along side of bar graph These symbols appear automatically if a displayed point is the input to one or more Alarm function blocks The first 4 high type alarm blocks using the displayed points are represented by these symbols Flashing between Same as Bad Input Values Appears in place of the value on all displays and value data point Value is outside the programmed limits Caused by an upstream Al failure Al is open circuit and failsafe or is type linear and outside its programmed range by 10 or more Flashing between value Sameas Questionable Input Values Appears in place of the value on all and blank data point displays Value is clamped at its limit Flashing between value Same as Output Limits of Totalizer or Interval Timer Exceeded Appears in and blank data point place of the value on all displays Interval Timer s or Totalizer s value is outside its output limits Value is not clamped Video Recorder User Manual 219 Online Operations Using Primary Displays 220 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operation Using Menus
276. ppears on the bottom of all screens The alarm must be acknowledged to stop the flashing On displays where the alarm point appears the value is red and a red indicator appears e The alarm is entered into the active alarm summary which can be viewed at any time The alarm summary contains the point identification a description of the alarm the sense high low rate etc the time of occurrence and the current value of the point e When the alarm clears the time of occurrence and the time of clearing will both be entered into the Alarm History which is an ongoing record of the occurrence and clearing of all alarms e f so configured the alarm occurrence will also be logged on a summary list stored on floppy disk see Data Storage section 4 26 e f so configured the alarm triggers a discrete output relay The relay returns to normal state only when the alarm is cleared Acknowledging alarms When an alarm occurs it must be acknowledged by the operator to stop its indicator from flashing Acknowledging an alarm does not clear the alarm See Table 7 6for procedure Table 7 6 Alarm Acknowledgment Procedure Select ACCESS SUMMARIES from online menu Select DISPLAY ALARM SUMMARY to display a list of active alarms Up to 4 pages 14 alarms can be listed Unacknowledged alarms will be flashing Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons to view the various pages of the display as desired Display Alarm Summary can also be accessed by
277. process variable with respect to the input range from a balanced condition will result in a 1096 change in output when a gain of 1 0 is used Enter a starting value at initial configuration The value may be altered Online for final loop tuning If an indirect source is specified as in an adaptive gain configuration the value can only be altered at the source Gain and Proportional Band are interchangeable values Proportional Band 100 Gain For loops with dual tuning Gain 1 is the gain for the first set of tuning parameters Gain 2 is for the second set Video Recorder User Manual 235 Online Operation Using Menus Table 7 9 Tune Loop Prompts continued RESET 1 0 005 99 99 repeats minute Determines the period of time for a repeat of the proportional gain output Enter a starting value at initial configuration The value may be altered Online for final loop tuning For loops with dual tuning Reset 1 is the time for the first set of tuning parameters Reset 2 is for the second set Variable Reset1 is available by programming a constant s Destination with RS See Program Constants Section 4 16 A value of OFF may be entered to allow proportional only control When turned off the manual reset value determines the loop output at setpoint Bumpless manual to automatic transfer is canceled when proportional only control is selected RATE 1 0 02 10 00 minutes Modifies the loop output based on the rate of change of the p
278. profiler to execute at its normal speed See Figure 5 11 Video Recorder User Manual 195 Setpoint Profiler Editing Segments Use the following prompts to map out each segment s value time and events Up to 63 segments are programmable per profile Table 5 6 Edit Segments Prompts NEXT SEGMENT EE Select this to edit the next segment PREVIOUS SEGMENT Select this to edit the previous segment VALUE OFF or number This prompt is active for soak segments and value duration ramp types Enter the value of the segment AUX VALUE OFF or number This value is an auxiliary soak output of the profile The output is identified as SPn A1 and remains constant for the duration of the segment TIME OFF or Positive number The purpose of the number entered here depends on the ramp type of the profile See 4 types of ramp segments on page 178 for details GUAR SOAK 1 ON or OFF ON means the profiler will Hold during this segment if deviation between PV 1 and the profiler output exceeds the guaranteed soak limits if Table 5 OFF means the profiler will not Hold during this segment due to deviation See Guaranteed Soak on pagb 18 for details GUAR SOAK 2 ON or OFF ON means the profiler will Hold during this segment if deviation between PV 2 and the profiler output exceeds the guaranteed soak limits if Table 545 OFF means the profiler will not Hold during this segment due to deviation See Guaranteed Soak on pag 8 for detai
279. prompts These prompts appear only if CUSTOM INPUT is enabled under FEATURES See Section 0 Table 4 7 Custom Algorithm Prompts INPUT SIGNAL EMF TC or RTD Selects the input hardware RJ ENABLE Select YES for reference junction Reference junction compensation NO for no compensation compensation EMISSIVITY ENABLE Select YES for emissivity Emissivity compensation for compensation for emf input emf input You must input at least 2 coordinates Use these prompts to plot a X must increase by at least 0 00001 curve of up to 20 points where Y values are not limited except in the X4 is the incoming signal following 2 cases the electrical units selected and is its corresponding value in the temperature units selected Interpolation is straight line 1 If the incoming signal is from a thermocouple and reference junction compensation is on make sure that b and c are all true Y s are increasing or all are decreasing Y range includes 0 65 C Temperature units are F or R 2 If Online adjustment of the value is desired make sure that all Y s are increasing or all are decreasing ELECTRICAL UNITS MV OHMS VOLTS Units of the electrical signal 2 0 seconds or OFF LAG is a time constant applied to the input measurement value This provides digital filtering LAG to the measurement Lag appears on menu only if EXPANDED INPUT is enabled under Enable Features in the Program menu
280. r Input source to be totalized number OUTPUT LOW LIMIT LOW LIMIT OFF or number The range outside which the displayed output will flash unclamped Useful for warning operator of unusual HIGH LIMIT condition ACTION UP At each machine scan cycle an integration of the input is added to the running total When this total reaches or exceeds the preset value assumed to be in eng Units the discrete output of the totalizer goes high and remains high for 1 scan cycle The totalizer then resets and starts again The value resets to either zero or the residual total final total minus preset if one exists DOWN At each machine scan cycle an integration of the input is subtracted from the preset value When this result reaches or goes below zero the discrete output of the totalizer goes high and remains high for 1 scan cycle The totalizer then resets and starts again The value resets to either the preset or the residual total preset plus final total since final total is either zero or negative if one exists DEMAND On Demand Same as UP except executes only while the ON DEMAND INPUT discrete is ON 1 Input is ignored while ON DEMAND INPUT is OFF 0 CONTIN Continuous Same as UP except the total ignores the PRESET value and integrates forever continuously TIME UNITS SEC MIN HOUR DAY Time units of the totalizer ON DEMAND INPUT OFF discrete parameter 0 Appears for Functions as the On Demand input for the 1 DE
281. r o Te eR Res 140 Table 4 48 CEMS Block Average eec eet sera nen te Hire eret ogee 141 Table 4 49 CEMS Rolling Average Prompts cece essere nre ener tenn trennen trennen rennen 142 Table 4250 Alarm Prompts oreet eonim eio mero 143 Table 4 51 Fotalizer Prompts nente sette eter Doe etre pore 145 Table 4 52 Constant Prompts e eiie meDipsteitre D ed Tee itte eiie 147 Table 4 53 Copy Block Prompts neue e poene ehe REGIT tre RUE 149 Table 4 54 Display Setup Procedure eee ette Deere p T SER RUE Ee 152 Table 4 55 Set Up Trend 1 Prompts Doo RITIRO ER 152 Table 4 56 Paper Chart Speed Equivalents to Time Base Selections essere 153 Table 4 57 1 trend group live buffer size ieee rieo e neret eren enne ene 154 Table 4 58 2 trend group live buffer size sss eene nennen rennen tenente treten trees 154 Table 4 59 4 trend group live buffer size sess enne nnne nete tenete nenne 155 Table 4 60 Set Up Bar Graph 1 Prompts eene nennen 156 Table 4 61 Set Up Panel Display Prompts nennen eene entren rennen een nennen nenne 156 Table 4 62 Set Up Unit Data Display Prompts sess eene eene eterne tree 156 Table 4 63 Set Up Profile Display Prompts seen nennen nennen eene 156 Table 4 64 Assign D
282. r not applying them to a preselected tune set of the loop You can pretune a loop while another loop is pretuning See Pretune Loop on page 23b SET TIMEBASE 5 MIN 15 MIN 30 MIN Enter the timebase for the time axis of the tuning trend 1 HR 2 HR 4 HR display 236 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operation Using Menus Table 7 9 Tune Loop Prompts continued DISPLAY TUNING Select this to display the actual tuning trend with PV and TREND setpoint Figure 7 2 Data collection for this trend display will continue as long as the display shows either the trend or the Loop Tuning Menu Use this display to help find the optimal tuning parameters Note If you access this display through a loop display by Tabbing to and selecting the loop tag name at the top of any loop display the trend data is not buffered when you leave and return to this tuning trend display Therefore if you wish to adjust tuning parameters and then look at the trend to see the effects it is recommended you select Tune Loop through the Online menu not through a loop display APRO02 97 LP1 15 37 AUTO SP1 200 00 0 00 PV 60 00 SP 52 00 OUT 3 5 DEV 8 00 Figure 7 2 Control Loop Tuning Display Video Recorder User Manual 237 Online Operation Using Menus Pretune Loop Pretune calculates optimum values for a loop s Proportional Band Gain Reset and Rate by analyzing the reaction of the loop to step change
283. r to the right side of the display where the choices for INPUT SOURCE are Press Up Arrow until 1 or 0 is displayed Press ENTER to select The cursor moves to the left and the display indicates your choice of 1 or 0 has been made Video Recorder User Manual 57 Programming and Operating Concepts ATTENTION Note the difference between programming a discrete parameter with OFF and programming it with a 0 OFF means not connected 0 means off state 3 12 How to program function block parameters The second type of programmable parameter is a function block parameter function block parameter s data is contained within a function block and cannot be connected to another function block When you are programming a function block and are not given a choice of PARM you are programming a function block parameter Typical choices when programming a function block parameter are NONE OFF any numerical value or a list of options but not PARM Programming procedure Here is the procedure for programming a function block parameter It is an example using a specific function block parameter but the keystrokes used will apply when you are programming any function block parameter Continuing with the example from Figure 3 8 assume we want Analog Output 1 to default to its lowest value if the input source LP2 OV fails Therefore we must program Analog Output 1 s failsafe parameter with the appropriate selection The follo
284. raph 1 Table 4 60 Set Up Bar Graph 1 Prompts 1 OFF analog parameter Select up to 12 analog points each to be displayed as a POINT 12 numbers vertical or horizontal bar graph Set Up Bar Graph 2 3 4 See Table 4 60 for prompts For Point 1 Point 12 enter a second group of up to 12 points that will be displayed as horizontal or vertical bar graphs Set Up Panel Displays Table 4 61 describes the prompts for setting up a Panel Display and Panel Meter Display Table 4 61 Set Up Panel Display Prompts POINT 1 POINT 12 Analog or discrete Select up to 12 analog or discrete points On the Panel 4 parameters Display these points will be displayed four at a time at a specified rotation rate and can be seen from 15 feet b meters On a panel meter display these 12 points will be displayed all at once Set Up Unit Data Display Table 4 62 describes the prompts for setting up a Unit Data Display Table 4 62 Set Up Unit Data Display Prompts 1 Analog or discrete Select up to 12 analog or discrete points These points will POINT 12 parameters be displayed as a list Set Up Profile Displays Table 4 63 describes the prompts for setting up a Profile display Affects the Set point Profiler Trend displays only Table 4 63 Set Up Profile Display Prompts PROFILE 1 Select a profile display to set up PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 PROFILE 4 DISPLAY TIME Number Enter the time width of the profile trend
285. rce for the feedback In most cases the feedback source will be the back calculation output BC value of the analog output AO function block 90 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 8 Loop Characteristics continued Characteristic What to be aware of Split output programming A splitter output type Standard or Advanced calculated value is used to send requirements the Split loop output to 2 or 3 different analog output AO functions In this case program the control loop to receive a feedback from the back calculation output of the splitter calculated value In other words loop Feedback CVn BC where CVn is a Splitter type calculated value and BC is its output Program the splitter calculated value to accept the back calculation values BC of each analog output function block AO as its feedback source In other words CVn FB AOn BC Cascade primary loop Be sure to scale the cascade primary loop s output limits to match the process variable range of the secondary control loop Note Output scaling is only available on the cascade primary type of control loop The primary loop feedback should be connected to the back calculation value of the secondary control loop Miscellaneous loop Other parameters affecting loops are latching and reset limit These are characteristics described in the loop prompt table Programming Procedure To program Control Loops select PROGRAM C
286. rocess variable The output is modified by a value that assumes the rate of change of the process variable will continue for the time period specified Enter a starting value or OFF at the time of configuration The value may be altered Online for final loop tuning For loops with dual tuning Rate 1 is the rate for the first set of tuning parameters Rate 2 is for the second set Variable Rate1 is available by programming a constant s Destination with RT Program Constants Section 4 16 PROP BAND 2 See GAIN 1 See RESET 1 See RATE 1 RESET 2 RATE 2 MANUAL RESET 100 to 100 This feature functions only when OFF is configured for the loop s RESET parameter Enter a value equal to the desired loop output when the process variable is at setpoint This allows correction of output to account for load changes to bring the process variable up to setpoint SUPPRESS YES NO This parameter set to YES limits overshoot of the Setpoint OVERSHOOT SP by the Process Variable PV after a disturbance in the process such as a load or SP change Through fuzzy logic the working SP of the control loop is dynamically modified by the control algorithm to reduce or eliminate overshoot PRETUNE Pretune calculates optimum values for a loop s Proportional Band Gain Reset and Rate by analyzing the reaction of the loop to a step change in setpoint or output After these new tuning values have been calculated you have the option of applying installing o
287. rol Profiler eene nen nennen 185 Table5 3 Program Profiler Prompts tonc e RR ERU RSEN tua em ev oie t Iq 190 Table 5 4 Setpoimnt Profiles Prompts e Bester oiv tegit tte tue De eme Do pend 191 Table 5 5 Edit Profile Prompts o eere oio se atender do etie tees 193 Table 5 6 Edit Segments Prompts Rei i E m Rite D bet Oe e gu M oe UI de e 196 Table 5 7 How Profiles Are Stored In Memory sees eene emet nete trennen 198 Table 5 8 Procedure To Load A Program From Memory Using Online Menu sese 199 Table 5 9 Procedure To Load A Program From Memory Using Point Detail Menu esee 199 Table 5 10 How Profiles Are Stored On Disk essent eene enne ener trente 200 Table 5514 Disk Program Capacity o tete D teet sie uo tede tee e ove Re ER ees 200 Table 5 12 Procedure To Load A Program From Disk essere eene 201 Video Recorder User Manual ix Table 5 13 Profiler Starting Procedure esses nennen 202 Table 5 14 Profiler Hold enne trennen nr en eren rennen enne 203 Table 5 15 Profiler Reset Procedure niser 203 Table 5 16 Profiler Advance Procedure 204 Table 5 17 Profiler Shutdown
288. rol action see CONTROL ACTION Control action is opposite when the discrete value is ON or 1 CONTROL ACTION Reverse REV or Direct DIR When Reverse Acting Control is selected the loop output Acting Control will increase as the process variable becomes less than set point and will decrease as it becomes greater than the set point When Direct Acting Control is selected the output action is opposite DISCR VS KEY SEL OFF discrete parameter O 1 Discrete vs Keyboard select When this discrete is ON 1 the Auto Man and Set point buttons are disabled their functioning is transferred to the AUTO MAN SELECT and SETPOINT SELECT discretes See AUTO MAN SELECT and SETPOINT SELECT Status changes made by AUTO MAN SELECT and SETPOINT SELECT will remain when DISCR VS KEY SEL is OFF 0 DUAL TUNING SEL OFF discrete parameter 0 1 When ON 1 selects the second set of tuning constants 2 A bumpless transfer integral term adjusted calculation will be made on transition 94 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 10 Loop Prompts continued Im Select letter Units of measure for values of process variable or set point UNITS which will appear on Online loop displays FEEDBACK OFF analog parameter Provides verification to the loop that the loop output request number LP OV was achieved by the analog output module Feedback sources are typically pointed to the associated
289. rtable Case Painted Case Handles TABLE VI Factory Use Onl SOFTWARES AND SUPPORT PARTS SDA Data Analysis Software can be ordered separately if not selected in Table V 045501 SCF Configuration Software can be ordered separately if not selected in Table V 045502 SDI Disk Initialization Software Note 6 46193351 501 Kit of 4 resistors 250 Ohms for 4 20 mA input 46181080 503 RESTRICTIONS Restriction Letter Available With Not Available With Notes 1 The available algorithms include PID standard and advance Cascade Split Output and On Off The appropriate outputs from Table must be specified Current or Relays If Split Duplex output Control is required advance math must be selected Table 111 Standard Math includes 24 Calculated Values and the following pre packaged algorithms Free Form Math Logic Operators Flip Flop One Shot Periodic Timer Free Form Logic Math Operators Invertor Advance Math includes 64 Calculated Values and the following additional of pre package algorithms Signal Select Interval Timer Counter Compare Relative Humidity Scaling Signal Clamp Mass Flow Advanced Splitter Peak Picking Fo Calculation Continuous Emissions Monitoring Function Generator Multiple Input Average CEM Block Average Carbon Potential Single Point Average CEM Rolling Average Rolling Average Standard Splitter Customer must supply Input Actuation Type and Range for each input for inclusion in the free form sect
290. s Checking current storage setup ROG Starting and stopping storage 3 methods a Start stop all storage via ENABLE STORAGE menu b Start stop a particular storage file s storage via its external enable discrete C Start stop all storage batches via BATCH STATE menu item or via BATCH CONTROL discrete Checking storage status with DATA STORAGE STATUS display Replaying data stored on disk 8 Reading data storage messages Installing a disk The disk should be pre initialized Pre initializing may be done at a PC or in the instrument with DATA STORAGE menu item INITIALIZE DISK Maintaining a stock of several formatted disks is recommended to minimize maintenance time on the instrument Disks are inserted and removed from the front panel as described in Table 7 Table 7 2 Floppy Disk Insertion Removal Procedure Open the door Insert the disk into the slot until it catches in place To remove the disk press the rectangular button next to the slot Be sure to label the contents of each disk Close the door 222 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operation Using Menus How data is stored To provide continuity of storage when the disk is removed the data storage feature buffers data internally for a period of time based on the storage rate and amount of storage data Since storage files and Setpoint program files may not be stored on the same disk you can swap the storage disk with a configuration disk
291. s and data Set up the link as follows Table 4 67 describes the Serial Communications prompts Table 4 67 Serial Communications Prompts UNIT IE nl 1 254 Enter the unit s address Use a number once only so that each address on the link is unique BAUD RATE 1200 2400 4800 Enter the speed of data transfer All equipment on the link must 9600 19200 38400 be set to match the host setting 76800 DOWNLOAD YES NO Set to YES to prevent configurations from being downloaded from LOCKOUT a PC with SCF software BYTE ORDER FP B Big Endian This feature allows a user to select the byte order for a floating FP BB Big Endian point register with Byte swap FP L Little Endian FP LB Little Endian with Byte swap Example for 25 38 41CBOA3D CB413D0A SDOACB41 0A3D41CB Video Recorder User Manual 161 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 22 Set Clock To assure data alarms and events are properly time stamped the clock must be properly set The clock uses military time Select CLOCK from the main Program menu Enter the date and time with the following prompts Table 4 68 describes the Set Clock prompts Table 4 68 Set Clock Prompts Prompt Beo Enter the date and time FORMAT USA MMDDYY Select clock format INTL DDMMYY IMPORTANT Resetting the clock can affect the storage schedule of a unit in service If the clock is set back more than 5 minutes the following actions will ta
292. s are stored on a disk page 20 for details NUMBER OF PROFILES Select 1 4 Number of profiles 1 2 3 or 4 determines how many profiles will be stored starting with the Starting Profile 4 For example if Starting Profile is 1 and Number of profiles is 3 then Profiles 1 2 and 3 are stored See How programs are stored on a disk on pag 20 for details Select the filename and number Filename extension is LNS After you select the number and press Enter the profile s are stored to disk FILES ON DISK Lists all files on the disk STORE PROGRAM TO PROGRAM NUMBER Select 1 12 MEMORY There are up to 96 slots allotted for profile memory storage Depending on how many profiles your instrument has each program will contain a certain number of profiles See How programs are stored to memory on page 19B for details STORE PROGRAM TO MEMORY Select this to store program to memory Video Recorder User Manual 191 Setpoint Profiler Table 5 4 Setpoint Profiles Prompts continued LOAD PROGRAM Files with LNS extension FROM DISK LOAD PROGRAM FROM MEMORY PROGRAM NUMBER Select a program to load into the Setpoint Profiler function block Press Enter to load Existing profiles in the instrument will be replaced by the profiles in the program being loaded Example You are loading Program1 LNS which contains Profiles 1 2 and 3 These profiles will replace the profiles currently set up in
293. s calibration Online operation is also monitored to detect both process faults and internal electronic errors If a diagnostic error occurs a record of it can be stored to a single diagnostic file The second category of stored data is configuration storage which is a single file comprised of the instrument s programming and configuration Configuration storage includes the programming of the instrument s analog input characteristics the configuration of its control loops or perhaps the programming of any math or logic functions The third category of stored data is Setpoint Program storage which is a single file Ca setpoint program containing one to eight setpoint profiles depending on the instrument Recall that set point profiles are user specified plots of process values against time that are divided into ramp and soak segments of varying time lengths Setpoint programs may be stored to disk or to the instrument s memory The fourth category of stored data is calibration storage which is a file containing the instrument s analog input and output calibration This file may be used to restore calibration in the event that a full calibration using a calibration source and or meter cannot be performed Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts Performing Data Storage Configuring the instrument to store the first category Data Storage process and diagnostic data is done through an Online menu entitled
294. s fully interactive with all externally connected elements Maintenance mode Maintenance Mode is an off line mode for maintaining proper and complete functioning of the instrument Functions include calibration off line diagnostic testing and various setups for operation In Maintenance Mode all outputs are frozen ATTENTION Note Changing to ONLINE mode by pressing any of the Display buttons can cause incorrect values to be displayed The values will correct themselves in a few seconds To avoid this potential annoyance change to online mode through SET MODE instead of through the Display buttons Video Recorder User Manual 83 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 6 Enter Labels Overview Labeling lets you use the front panel buttons a QWERTY keyboard or barcode reader to assign custom text identifiers to most data and functions to make them easily recognized on displays Labeling items makes programming and operation easier but is not required You can assign all labels here or at each individual programming menu that is at Program Analog Inputs Program Alarms etc For the latter you must enable labeling under ENABLE FEATURES in the main Program menu Entering labels with the front panel buttons Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to select a character and the left arrow to move the cursor See Table 3 6 for these buttons functions If you are entering several labels this method can be tedious because you mus
295. s point with just a single input and output its primary purpose will be to generate a 4 to 20 mA signal that linearly corresponds to whatever value is applied at its input For example if AO1 s input is defined as some value that ranges from 0 to 10096 an input value of 0 will cause AO1 to generate a 4 mA signal at the instrument s AO1 output terminals A 12 mA signal will be generated in response to an input of 50 while 20 mA will result when a 100 input value is applied AO1 s input parameter is denoted IN with its output parameter labeled to identify it as the physical 4 to 20 mA signal detectable at the pair of instrument rear terminals dedicated to AO1 TYPE J THERMOCOUPLE 4 TO 20 mA Figure 3 13 Labeling Each Function Block s Name And Major Inputs And Outputs 4 Label function block parameters 62 Finally label each block s internal parameters Internal parameters may also be referred to as function block parameters As in the case of input and output parameters internal parameters associated with each block correspond to actual menu settings you program in the instrument While input and output parameters constitute either data exchanged between function blocks or physical signals exchanged between the instrument and the outside world internal parameters are settings that uniquely define the operation of the function block they are associated with Use of a function block s internal parameters is for the most part l
296. shes while unacknowledged When the followed by text operator acknowledges the alarm the flashing will stop The symbol description of alarm and text will remain until the alarm has cleared s A diagnostic error has been detected Flashes while followed by text unacknowledged The symbol and text will remain until the operator description of diagnostic acknowledges or deletes the diagnostic in the online Access Summaries menu Data Storage Messages Color Description shown low to high priority UPDATING DISK Yellow Instrument is flushing all buffered data to the disk CHECKING DISK Yellow Whenever the front panel has been opened and closed the instrument checks that a properly formatted disk is installed and ready to receive data INITIALIZING Yellow Initialization is in progress DS INIT FAILED Yellow Initialization failed Possible reasons disk has not been formatted is write protected or is defective STORAGE FULL Yellow Less than 5 minutes of space remains in the internal buffer Data is accumulating in the internal buffer temporary storage because it is unable to store the data on the floppy disk Possible reasons include Disk is full and storage is programmed as non rollover There is no disk in the drive The disk is write protected The operator is in the process of retrieving stored data from the disk The disk is not current see DSK NOT CURRENT below The front bezel is open The message will disappear
297. should be pre initialized on a PC With this prompt you can remove a disk inserted by mistake or deliberately re use an old disk containing useless information If you answer YES the current schedule will be established on the new disk buffered data will be stored to the disk and if any storage files are in batch mode the batch counter will be reset to zero 0 Initializing a disk using a new storage setup If you change any part of data storage schedule and you want the changed new schedule s data to be stored select the online DATA STORAGE SETUP menu select INITIALIZE DISK then select USE NEW SCHEDULES To shorten the initialization time the disk should be pre initialized on a PC All data that was buffered since the previous disk was removed is lost If you change the schedule but initialize using the current schedule the changed new schedule is not stored Video Recorder User Manual 223 Online Operation Using Menus Initialization errors If an initialization error occurs one of the following messages may appear BEZEL OPEN Disk use is not permitted while the front panel bezel is open The bezel must be closed and latched WRITE PROTECTED The write protect tab is set open on the floppy disk The tab must be closed to permit data storage DISK ERRORS The disk installed in the drive is faulty or is not a DOS formatted disk It must be formatted before it can be initialized Formatting can be performed on an IBM c
298. splay toggles loop between Manual Auto and Manual modes loop s Force Remote Manual discrete must be OFF In a loop display toggles loop between Remote Manual and Manual modes loop s Remote Manual discrete must be ON Does not function if loop s Discrete vs Key discrete is ON In this case the button s functioning has been transferred to the loop s Auto Manual Select discrete ATTENTION The following keys are like Digital Inputs on the keypad of the instrument They must be configured as part of the instrument s function blocks in order to be active When pressed this key raises the SY1 F1 signal for 1 machine scan cycle For instruments with the Setpoint Profiler user typically programs it to Profiler Start input or Totalizer Reset When pressed this key raises the SY1 F2 signal for 1 machine scan cycle User typically programs it to Profiler Hold input Use Edge Level input selection or to Totalizer Reset When pressed this key raises the SY1 F3 signal for 1 machine scan cycle User typically programs it to Profiler Reset input or Totalizer Reset When pressed this key raises the SY1 F4 signal for 1 machine cycle When pressed this key raises the SY1 F5 signal for 1 machine cycle 44 Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts 3 6 Text Entry From External Sources QWERTY keyboard To use a keyboard to enter text such as labels numbers and equations connect an AT Qwerty
299. starting pretune will abort the pretune causing an error message to appear Process Variable Adjust setpoint or output to bring the process variable to normal operation range Adjusting or switching setpoints or output after starting pretune will abort the pretune causing an error message to appear Gain Proportional Band Reset Use known good settings Or set Gain 1 0 PB 100 Reset 1 0 and place loop in Manual mode Rate Optional If OFF pretune will not calculate a Rate Suppress Overshoot Set to OFF Pretune may detect changes to the working setpoint and abort Turn this setting back on after pretune is complete After Starting Pretune After starting the pretune do not change adjust the loop mode loop output loop setpoint or operating mode If you do the pretune will abort See Pretune Abort Messages later in this section Pretune IDENTIFYING amp CALCULATING menus During IDENTIFYING and CALCULATING status a TUNE indicator appears on all primary displays not on menus for the loop being pretuned Table 7 12 Pretune IDENTIFYING amp CALCULATING Prompts mm atten STATUS Status Identifying or Calculating This is a read only prompt OUTPUT Current output value of the loop being tuned This is a read only prompt PV Current process variable value of the loop being tuned This is a read only prompt Video Recorder User Manual 239 Online Operation Using Menus Table 7 12 Pretune IDENTIFYING amp
300. t of the batch phase SEGMENT Segments after this segment are the shutdown phase A value of 0 indicates a single phase profile See Two types of profiles on page 177 for details continued Video Recorder User Manual 193 Setpoint Profiler Table 5 5 Edit Profile Prompts continued AUTO CYCLE OFF ON Select ON to have the profile or batch phase if defined repeat AUTO CYCLE COUNT times Automatically re runs the profile when ON The parameter AUTO CYCLE COUNT controls the number of additional cycles through the profile When AUTO CYCLE is ON and AUTO CYCLE COUNT is zero 0 the profile will cycle forever For a single phase profile the profiler must progress to the END state before cycling back to segment 1 Once the profiler is ENDed the automatic cycling function will change the profiler to the READY state for one machine cycle clearing the profiler s discrete outputs before proceeding to the RUN state The elapsed time of the profiler will continue due to re cycling For a multiphase profile the profiler must progress to the END state following segment BATCH LAST SEGMENT before cycling back to the BATCH FIRST SEGMENT Once the profiler is ENDed the automatic cycling function will change the profiler to the RUN state The elapsed time of the profiler will continue running during recycling AUTO CYCLE COUNT 0 254 0 the profile or batch will repeat forever 1 254 the profile or batch will repeat this ma
301. t scroll through A Z and 0 9 to pick each character Consider using a keyboard or barcode reader instead Entering labels with a QWERTY keyboard Using a QWERTY keyboard is easier and faster if you are entering many labels See Section 3 6 for keyboard connection procedure To enter label with the keyboard 1 Select Enter Labels Select the function block whose label you want to change Select the label you want to change Table 4 3 Press Enter to move cursor to the right side of the display a um Type in the new label with the keyboard The instrument accepts A Z a 2 0 9 6 Press Enter to accept the new label Entering labels with a barcode reader Using a barcode reader is easier and faster if you are entering many labels See Section 3 6 for barcode reader connection procedure To enter label with the barcode reader 1 Select Enter Labels Select the function block whose label you want to change Select the label you want to change Table 4 3 Press Enter to move cursor to the right side of the display Scan in the new label with the barcode reader Allowable characters 0 9 A Z wD Press Enter to accept the new label After selecting ENTER LABELS choose an item such as Analog Inputs to label Use the prompts in Table 4 3 All text and numeric keys may be used for labels no characters are prohibited To cancel an entry press the ESC key o
302. tation 100 240 Vca cc Fr quence 50 60 Hz Puissance ou courant 100 VA Fusible 3 15 A 250 Vca cc CONDITIONS AMBIANTES Ne jamais utiliser cet quipement en pr sence de liquides ou vapeurs inflammables L utilisation de tout instrument lectrique dans un tel environnement pourrait pr senter un risque pour la s curit Temp rature Ambiante 5 40 C Stockage 20 60 C Humidit 10 90 HR non condens a 40 C Vibration 10 40 Hz amplitude 0 07 mm 40 60 Hz acc l ration 0 2 g INSTALLATION DE L EQUIPEMENT Cet appareil doit tre mont dans un panneau pour limiter l acc s aux bornes arri res par l op rateur 268 Video Recorder User Manual Safety SICHERHEITSHINWEISE GE21 6063 Befolgen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise in diesen Unterlagen um das Risiko eines Stromschlags zu verringern der zu K rperverletzung f hren kann Dieses Symbol warnt den Benutzer vor eventueller Ber hrungsgefahr wo lebensgef hrliche Spannungen zuganglich sein k nnen Sch tzende Erdung F r den Anschlu der sch tzenden Erdung der Versorgungssystemleitung DE e Bei Benutzung der Ausr stungen auf nicht vom Hersteller angegebene Art und Weise kann der von der Ausr stung gewahrleistete Schutz beeintrachtigt werden e Ersetzen Sie keine Komponente oder Teil die das nicht ausdr cklich vom Lieferanten als ersetzbar angegeben ist e Die gesamte Verkabelung den rtlichen Normen entsprechen und v
303. te Note how AO1 s output range has been defined through use of the notation OUT LOW LIMIT 4 and OUT HIGH LIMIT 20 Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts TYPE J AH OV THERMOCOUPLE LP1 OV 4 TO 20 mA INPUT TYPE J RANGE LOW 0 RANGE HIGH 1000 TYPE STANDARD OUTPUT TYPE CAT SP1 500 IN LOW LIMIT 0 GAIN 10 IN HIGH LIMIT 100 RESET 1 OUT LOW LIMIT 4 RATE 0 OUT HIGH LIMIT 20 Figure 3 14 Labels For Internal Function Block Parameters Note that the internal parameters that we have specified in the function block diagram built up so far are based largely on what can be inferred from the elements of the control configuration depicted in Figure 3 11 These internal parameters will relate directly to settings found in instrument programming menus that exist for each particular function block As your experience and familiarity with programming the instrument increases you will become more familiar with some of the less intuitive parameters and you will include these in your diagrams 5 Connect the blocks The next step is to connect the function blocks in the diagram Refer to Figure 3 15 The interconnection lines drawn depict the flow of information between function blocks and represent how the blocks work together to support the complete control strategy As shown the furnace zone temperature measurement that Al1 generates will essentially be used as the process variable
304. ters associated with those segments such as segment loops events and guaranteed soak enables The setpoint produced by the profile is used by a control loop s Setpoint 2 A profile is also known as a curve or recipe A profile is analogous to a compact disc in that the profile is played by the profiler Your instrument contains 1 2 3 or 4 profiles depending on the option ordered A program is a set of one to four profiles depending on the instrument Programs in a single profile instrument contain 1 profile programs in a two profile instrument contain 2 profiles programs in a three profile instrument contain 3 profiles and programs in a four profile instrument contain 4 profiles Guaranteed soak is a set of parameters that hold the profiler when the deviation between the generated setpoint and either PV is larger than a configured limit Event outputs are discrete output parameters of the Setpoint Profiler function block They may be tied to other function blocks such as Discrete Outputs Profile features Each profile has the following features e A second PV is available Each PV is monitored for excessive deviation from the profile value in which case the profiler can be automatically put on Hold e Menu or discrete control of profile resetting starting holding advancing shutting down or fast forwarding through the profile e Discrete input for starting the profiler at the current value of the process variable Know
305. tes remaining on the disk After the instrument has been Online and actively performing Data Storage to disk a warning message will appear when the disk reaches the default 9096 capacity or a user specified capacity Once a disk has reached its programmed capacity a DISK FULL message will be displayed Data storage considerations In order to guarantee a proper operation of the instrument e g no sample lost there is a maximum load that the video recorder should not overcome This load can be theorically computed by considering the number of data storage trends live trends and live screens programmed and their associated sample rate 1 One live screen counts for one schedule per second At least one live screen is present in the instrument A live screen is a display that require any measurement information to be built 2 Each ENABLED Data Storage schedule has a user defined sample rate 3 Each ENABLED Live Trend has the following sample rates Screen Size Schedule Sample Rate 5 Min Screen 1 Second 15 Minute Screen 3 Seconds 30 Minute Screen 6 Seconds 1 Hour 12 Seconds 2 Hours 24 Seconds 4 Hours 47 Seconds 8 Hours 93 Seconds 1 55 Minutes 24 Hours 279 Seconds 4 65 Minutes 7 Days 1951 Seconds 32 5 Minutes 31 Days 8640 Seconds 2 4 Hours Therefore to guarantee a proper operation of the instrument the following inequation should allways be true Programmed trend
306. the instrument Profile 4 will not be replaced Select a program 1 96 to load into the Setpoint Profiler function block There are up to 96 slots allotted for program memory storage Depending on how many profiles your instrument has each program will contain a certain number of profiles See How programs are stored in memory on page 198 for details Program Memory I4 9 Function Profile Block Not allowed Figure 5 13 Allowable and Non Allowable Program Storage 192 Video Recorder User Manual Setpoint Profiler Table 5 5 Edit Profile Prompts I Ww TYPE VAL DUR TIME RATE See 4 types of ramp segments on pa 128 TIME UNITS SECS MINS HOURS Select the time units to be used by all segments of the profile GUAR SOAK LOLIM OFF or number The profiler will Hold if PV 1 or PV 2 deviates more than this much below the profiler output See Guaranteed Soak on pade for details GUAR SOAK HI LIM OFF or number The profiler will Hold if PV 1 or PV 2 deviates more than this much above the i rofiler output See Guaranteed Soak on page 182 for details HYSTERESIS OFF or number See Hysteresis on page 18 for details BATCH FIRST Specify the first segment of the batch phase SEGMENT Prior segments are the start up phase A value of 0 indicates a single phase profile See Two types of profiles on 177 for details BATCH LAST Specify the last segmen
307. the point at which an alarm clears A high alarm will clear when the input is less than the set point minus the hysteresis value A low alarm will clear when the input is greater than the set point plus the hysteresis value A deviation alarm will clear when the input is less than the set point minus the hysteresis value DELAY TIME OFF or number If the alarm condition clears before the delay time in seconds expires no alarm will be indicated Delay time must be in multiples of scan time SAMPLE HOLD OFF discrete When this parameter level 1 the alarm processing is disable and parameter 0 or 1 the output is held Video Recorder User Manual 143 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 14 Program Totalizers The optional totalizer integrates an analog value over time With the input being viewed as a flow rate the function outputs a running total TLn OV over time ATTENTION Totalizers which exceed the value 999 999 may only be displayed on the dedicated Totalizer Display If the value is programmed on other displays or stored to disk when it exceeds the programmed limits the value may be truncated and the value will flash Select a Totalizer to program Table 4 51 describes the Totalizer prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts 144 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 51 Totalizer Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition INPUT SOURCE OFF analog paramete
308. this discrete is ON 1 timer stops and resets to beginning of period When discrete is OFF 0 timer begins again START DAY MONDAY For Phase DAILY select the day of the week to start the TUESDAY SUNDAY timer For Phase MONTHLY select the day of the month to start the timer If this number exceeds the number of days in any given month then the discrete switches ON 1 the last day of that month START HOURS Hours of the Start time START MINUTES Minutes of the Start time START SECONDS Seconds of the Start time ATTENTION The Start Time s value cannot exceed the Period An error message is displayed if you enter a Start Time of 8 00 00 and a Period of 4 00 00 for example Video Recorder User Manual 127 Programming Function Blocks and Features Mass Flow By compensating for variations in fluid temperature and pressure Mass Flow is used to obtain a more precise fluid flow measurement from an orifice plate developing a differential pressure The output CVn OV is mass flow and is calculated from the following formula for U S Units Of Measurement MF FACTOR 1 x SQRT DP INPUT x PRESSURE INPUT 14 7 TEMPERATURE INPUT 459 where FACTOR 1 is calculated by user DP INPUT is differential pressure in inches of water PRESSURE INPUT is in PSIG TEMPERATURE INPUT is in F Or Mass flow is calculated from the following formula for International Units Of Measurement MF FACTOR 1 x 569 x SQRT DP INPUT x PRESSURE
309. tial notation Example 1 23E4 means 1 23 x 10 be used for all outputs of the function ON LABEL ON FILL DRAIN Select the discrete function s ON 1 DOWN EMPTY FULL state label STOP IN OUT HIGH OPEN CLOSED RUN HOLD ACTIVE FALSE READY ABORT RIGHT ALARM NORMAL INCRS AUTO MANUAL UNLOAD SP1 SP2 HEAT NO YES PAUSE OFF LABEL Same as ON LABEL selections Select the discrete function s OFF state label DESCR Enter up to 16 characters Usually appears as a header or title on some displays and reports For alarms this is the actual alarm message TAG Enter 7 characters maximum Identifies the point or function on most displays and reports Each tag must be unique UNITS Default choices Shows units of measure for analog PSI DEGR values on most displays and reports BAR K These 25 choices can be changed See Table 4 4 MW MV GPH V GPM GPS HZ Prompt does not appear if labeling is disabled under ENABLE FEATURES 82 Video Recorder User Manual Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 5 Set Mode Select this item to change the operating mode of the instrument to Online Program or Maintenance The top of the display will show which mode you have changed to Program mode Program mode is an off line mode for programming configuring the instrument In this mode all outputs are frozen Online mode Online Mode enables full use of the instrument with its inputs outputs and internal programming In this mode it i
310. tifying the function block Repeat steps 1 4 for all desired function blocks until the instrument is configured Example configuration Figure 3 10 shows a simplified configuration using typical function block connections Note that several parameters are left out to simplify the drawing and procedure Table 3 10 describes how to program these connections CN a AL 1 DO 1 ALOS I M input 00105 SETPOINT 500 00105 gt ACTION HIGH Anov 1 SETPOINT 1 J 1500 in INPUT EYRE Type sh TYPE CAT FEEDBACK A01BC KEY FUNCTION BLOCK TYPE INPUT PARAMETER FUNCTION BLOCK PARAMETER PARAMETER CODE Figure 3 10 Example Configuration Table 3 10 Example Configuration Procedure Function block type Full nami 2 Select this and program it 3 Select this and prograr as displayed in the Program input parameter with this output Function block it with this menu from the functior code See Sectior parameter from th choice See 1 Select this menu item from block s menu 3 11 for details function block s Section 3 12 the Program menu menu for details Al 1 ANALOG INPUT 1 TYPE TYPE J LP 1 LOOP 1 SETPOINT H1 1500 peu mo AL 1 ALARM 1 INPUT OV lie NEN MENU NE DO 1 DISCRETE OUTPUT 1 INPUT AL1 OS C 1 ANALOG OUTPUT 1 INPUT LP1 OV TYPE CAT Video Recorder User
311. ting Concepts 1 Diagram the function blocks To configure this application using the instrument your task is to build up a simple current control loop Note that this control loop must monitor and control the temperature of the furnace zone to a local set point of 500 F Using a 4 to 20 mA signal applied to a gas valve actuator the furnace zone s temperature will be controlled by regulating the flow of gas to the zones burner The instrument will measure temperature in a range between 0 and 1000 F by means of a Type J thermocouple To support this application a 4 to 20 mA control loop with a thermocouple process variable must be configured Three function blocks one for specifying a thermocouple analog input a second for a standard PID control loop and a third defining a 4 to 20 mA analog output are needed to produce this control strategy s function block diagram Each function block should first be arranged as in Figure 3 12 Analog input and output function blocks are represented by right pointed triangles Control loop function blocks are represented by right pointed parallelograms ANALOG INPUT CONTROL LOOP ANALOG OUTPUT Figure 3 12 Basic Function Blocks Required For Control Configuration Of Figure 3 11 2 Label input parameters Properly label each function block First assign to each function block a name that identifies it within the hardware and feature capacities of the instrument being worked with You may assign
312. tive unit Do not return your instrument without authorization from your Sales Office or until the replacement has been received ii Video Recorder User Manual Symbol Meanings Protective ground terminal Provided for connection of the protective earth green green or green yellow supply system conductor Functional ground terminal Used for non safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement hazard where voltages greater than 30 Vrms 42 4 Vpeak or 60 Vdc may be accessible A WARNING Risk of electric shock This symbol warns the user of a potential shock Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury CAUTION When this symbol appears on the product see the user manual for more information This symbol appears next to the required information in the manual Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage CE conformity This product conforms with the protection requirements of the following European Council Directives 89 336 EEC the EMC directive and 73 23 EEC the low voltage directive Do not assume this product conforms with any other CE Mark Directive s Attention The emission limits of EN 50081 2 are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference This equipment generates uses and can
313. to SP2 using the SP Set Point Select key while viewing the loop s ON LINE display Refer to Figure 4 1 SETPOINT SELECT OFF discrete parameter 0 When the DISCR VS KEY SEL discrete is ON 1 this 1 parameter takes the place of the On Line Tune Loop menu s Toggle Set point Source prompt SETPOINT SELECT ON 1 Set point2 SETPOINT SELECT OFF 0 Set point When DISCR VS KEY SEL is OFF 0 SETPOINT SELECT has no effect SETPOINT H1 amp Set point 1 can be a Set point 1 and 2 are independent set points Either may be SETPOINT 2 number only Set point 2 the active set point for the loop When viewing a live ON can be anumber an analog LINE mode control loop display a loop may be switched parameter or OFF between SETPOINT 1 and SETPOINT 2 by accessing the Tune Loop menu and selecting TOGGLE SETPOINT SOURCE Operation of the loop using SETPOINT 1 will be indicated by the presence of an SP1 symbol on the loop s display SP2 will be the symbol observed when the loop is operating using SETPOINT 2 While SETPOINT 2 may be programmed as a numerical value it may also be used as a remote set point input to the loop You may link SETPOINT 2 to any of several analog parameters that include the Output Values of analog input or calculated value function blocks If used as a remote set point input SETPOINT 2 s value may not be manually changed from within any live ON LINE mode control loop displays SOFT PI
314. to next segment in the loop Advance is activated by online operator menu or by a discrete input HOT START When HOT START is ON and the profiler is Level ON Profiler is in When started the profiler begins to run at the point Ready profiler in the profile where the current value of PV 1 changes first occurs Hot Start makes the profiler skip from Ready over unneeded segments to Run profiler Hot Start is activated by a discrete input jumps to the same Example value as If PV 1 is 100 and the profile contains the PV 1 value 100 in Segment 4 and Segment 6 HOT START forces the profiler to start running at Segment 4 at 100 not at Segment 1 or Segment 6 Sek Figure 5 10 Hat Stdrt If Hot Start ON Profile starts at first intersecting point between profile and PV 1 Profile starts here Figure 5 10 Hot Start 186 Video Recorder User Manual Setpoint Profiler Parameter nam gt Definition Triggere Conditions by present FAST FAST FORWARD is a way to test for proper Level ON When in FORWARD functioning of the profiler s events and Run mode outputs without having to wait for the profiler profiler to execute at its normal speed runs at Fast When FAST FORWARD is ON the profiler will Forward run at a speed determined by the TIME speed MULTIPLIER parameter The higher the time multiplier the faster the profiler will run Fast Forward Example is activated by a discret
315. tra cabelagem e desligado em ltimo lugar e Recomenda se um comutador na fonte de alimenta o principal pr ximo do equipamento ESPECIFICAC ES DO EQUIPAMENTO Voltagem 100 a 240 Vca cc Frequ ncia 50 60 Hz Pot ncia ou consumo de corrente 100 VA Fusiveis 3 15 A 250 Vca cc CONDICOES AMBIENTAIS operar o instrumento na presen a de l quidos ou vapores inflam veis A opera o de qualquer instrumento el ctrico em tal ambiente constitui um perigo para a seguran a Temperatura Ambiente 5 a 40 C Armazenamento 20 a 60 Humidade 10 a 90 RH nao condensado a 40 Vibrac o 10 a 40 Hz amplitude 0 07 mm 40 a 60 Hz acelera o 0 2 g INSTALACAO DO EQUIPAMENTO O Registrador deve ser montado num painel para limitar o acesso do operador aos terminais traseiros Video Recorder User Manual 273 Safety NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD SP21 6063 Para reducir el riesgo de choque el ctrico el cual podr a causar lesiones personales seguir todas las indicaciones de este documento Este s mbolo previene al usuario de un riesgo potencial de descarga cuando se puede acceder a corrientes de tensi n peligrosas Terminal de tierra de protecci n Proporcionado para la conexi n de la tierra de protecci n del conductor del sistema de alimentaci n eR e Si el equipo es utilizado de forma no especificada por el fabricante la protecci n suministrada con el mismo podr a resultar da ada e Noreemplazar
316. trend display will remain at the chosen point Press the Display button to restore the primary display and cancel DETAIL feature Video Recorder User Manual 211 Online Operations Using Primary Displays Table 6 2 Point Detail Menu Prompts continued Bem Lets you display the trend from a certain time A list of times will appear on the display as shown FIRST is the oldest time available in the trend LAST is the most recent time available FIRST JAN 1 1994 12 00 LAST JAN 5 1994 13 00 FIND 1 1994 12 00 Select month day year hour and minute To cancel the search press Display Menu Display1 Display2 or Display3 buttons When the data has been found the selected time date will appear in the center of the trend area The Point Detail menu will also appear ZOOM Lets you magnify zoom the displayed scale Press the Increment and Decrement buttons to select the amount of magnification shown in the lower right corner of the display Note that the size of the Zoom cursor changes accordingly See Figure 6 3 OFF uses point s trend display limits turns Zoom off 2X uses half of point s trend display limits 4X uses one fourth of point s trend display limits FULL uses point s programmed limits not its trend display limits Press the Tab key to select the point trace to be zoomed magnified Press Enter to display the magnified trend The Point Detail menu is displayed to allow further
317. tter S in the lower right hand corner of the instrument screen Pre initializing a ZIPdisk on a PC 76 Pre initializing a ZIP disk on the video recorder takes time there is a more efficient way to do it using theSDI tool The SDI tool is a very basic straightforward Win 95 98 NT program that can be used to quickly pre initialize a ZIP disk on a PC This tool is provided with the video recorder Install it on your PC as per instructions on the floppy disk label Here are the 3 steps to follow when running the SDI utility o Select the drive letter where the disk to initialize can be found Data Storage Utility Drive Letter Select the number of trend groups you want to initialize Trend Groups Status Exit Click on initialize Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts The next step to complete is to initialize the disk on the video recorder as you would have done normally as explained in the Initializing a zip disk section except that this time it will take just a few seconds Note it is recommended to dedicate a ZIP disk to storage of data only and store configurations of products on a separate disk Data Storage Status The prompt DATA STORAGE STATUS accessed from the Online DATA STORAGE menu item displays a calculation of how long a particular disk will last based on the configured data storage schedule Disk capacity is indicated in days hours and minu
318. ual 99 Programming Function Blocks and Features 2 BC UNITS FPS INPUT TYPE LINEAR DIRECT INDIRECT SQRT SQRT RANGE LOW 0 RANGE HIGH 40 CIRCUIT LOW 1 CIRCUIT HIGH 5 ELECTRICAL UNITS VOLTS FEEDBACK 4 TO 20 mA SIGNAL TO AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE ded OUTPUT TYPE CAT IN LOW LIMIT 0 IN HIGH LIMIT 100 OUT LOW LIMIT 4 RATIO RATIO Hc OUT HIGH LIMIT 20 UNITS FPS SETPOINT BIAS INPUT TYPE LINEAR DANCE E ERTASSIBT SQRT TYPE RATIO Working set point of loop when use of WILD 0 VARIABLE is desired to establish proper control Y of PV If ratio control using WILD VARIABLE CIRCUIT HIGH 5 RATIO SETPOINT 0 50 must be temporarily suspended loop s working ELECTRICAL UNITS VOLTS RAO BINS 0 75 set point may be switched ON LINE to SETPOINT RESET 1 1 via SP Set Point Select key oninstrument s BATE ES front door Figure 4 1 Function Block Configuration of a Typical Ratio Control Loop When the ratio control loop in Figure 4 1 is brought ON LINE its ON LINE display must be accessed to allow the instrument s SP Set Point Select key to be operational To make the working set point of the ratio control loop equal the equation WILD VARIABLE X RATIO SETPOINT RATIO BIAS then select the TUNE LOOP menu item TOGGLE SETPOINT SOURCE so that an SP2 is seen in the loop s ON LINE display Note that within the ratio control lo
319. ulse time or 3 seconds but since 3 seconds is less than the Min On Time output will not turn on Example 2 Impulse Time 150 Min On Time 3 seconds The output will not come on unless the input source is gt 2 For instance if input source 1 output would be on for 1 of impulse time or 1 5 seconds but since 1 5 seconds is less than the Min On Time output will not turn on MIN OFF TIME OFF or number The minimum off time in seconds for the output If the input source calls for the output to be off for less than this time the output will not turn off at all Example 1 Impulse Time 100 Min Off Time 5 seconds The output will not turn off unless the input source is lt 95 For instance if input source 98 output would be off for 2 of impulse time or 2 seconds but since 2 seconds is less than Min Off Time output will not turn off Example 2 Impulse Time 150 Min Off Time 3 seconds The output will not turn off unless the input source is lt 98 For instance if input source 99 output would be off for 1 of impulse time or 1 5 seconds but since 1 5 seconds is less than the Min Off Time output will not turn off OUTPUT RELAY Select discrete output This is the discrete output channel if using DAT output channel algorithm This discrete output will be unprogrammable under the PROGRAM DISCRETE OUTPUTS programming menu Only discrete outputs 1 though 5 will be programable on any of the installed discrete
320. ut AO Analog output DI Digital input DO Digital output relay Note Terminal blocks can be removed from the board for easier wiring and board replacement Video Recorder User Manual 19 Installation Removing the rear cover grants access to the terminals location Step A Turn off power Step B Loosen screws holding rear cover Step C Slide rear cover to the left 20 Video Recorder User Manual 2 5 2 Inserting and extracting inputs and outputs board Steps A and B show how to insert or extract a board from the video recorder To extract a board Step A then Step B To insert a board Step B then Step A 1 Press down on terminal block clips 2 Push in or pull out to insert or remove from board Step B Push in or pull out on the board to insert or remove from video recorder Video Recorder User Manual Installation 21 Installation 2 5 3 Analog input boards A universal Analog Input board accepts a variety of input signals from field devices Figure 2 1 illustrates the terminal block connections for the various inputs One Al board can be configured to accept multiple input types Table 2 1 Universal Analog Input Board Specifications Input Types mV V mA T C RTD and Ohms Number of Inputs 4 per board up to 12 boards per video recorder 48 inputs Signal Source Th
321. utputs Type Current output configurable within 0 to 20 mA Maximum load 400 ohms per output Voltage output configurable 0 to 5 V Isolation from ground 350 Vac Accuracy Factory configured accuracy 0 1 at reference conditions Field calibration accuracy 0 0596 Temperature Effects DIA Resolution Number 6 sink source per module up to 6 modules video recorder per video recorder input Voltage Range Peak Voltage AC Frequency isolation from ground Isolation between inputs ON Voltage Level OFF Voltage Level 3 5 Vdc maximum 4 Video recorder User Manual Introduction Table 1 1 Specifications continued Input Impedance 3 2 mA 24 Vdc Minimum ON Current Maximum OFF Current Base Power Required OFF to ON Response ON to OFF Response Number isolation from ground Switching Voltage Switching Current DC Outputs Number 6 per module up to 6 modules per video 6 current sinking per module up to 6 recorder Only 1 5 on each module can modules per video recorder Only 1 5 be configured as DAT outputs on each module can be configured as DAT outputs Operating Voltage 10 2 to 26 4 Vdc Output Type NPN open collector Peak Voltage 40 Vdc AC Frequency N A Isolation from ground 2300 Vac 1 min 1100 Vac 1 min Isolation between outputs 350 Vac 30 Vac ON Voltage Drop 1 5 Vac 250 14 1 5 Vdc maximum 3 0 Vac lt 0 1A Maximum Load Current 0 5A per point 0 3A per point Maximum Leakage Current 4 mA 264
322. uw veiligheid Temperatuur In bedrijf 5 tot 40 C Opslag 20 tot 60 C Vochtigheid 10 tot 90 RH niet condenserend 40 Trilling 10 tot 40 Hz amplitude 0 07 mm 40 tot 60 Hz versnelling 0 2 g MONTAGE VAN DE APPARATUUR De recorder moet worden gemonteerd in een paneel om de toegankelijkheid tot de achterste aansluitpunten te beperken 266 Video Recorder User Manual Safety TURVALLISUUSMAARAYKSET FI21 6063 N Noudata t m n ohjeen kaikkia turvaohjeita valttaaksesi s hk tapaturman vaaraa vaarallisia j nnitteit L Suojamaaliitin Kytke maadoitsjohdin t h n liittimeen e Jos laitetta k ytet n olosuhteissa joihin sit ei ole suunniteltu k ytt turvallisuus voi heikenty e Ala vaihda mit n komponettia tai osaa jota valmistaja ei ole m ritellyt k ytt j n vaihdettavaksi e Asennus ja johdotus on teht v paikallisten varmuusm r ysten mukaisesti valtuutetun s hk asentajan toimesta e Ensimm iseksi on kytkett v suojamaa liitin ja viimeiseksi irroittettava e Laitteen l heisyyteen suositellaan asennettavaksi verkkokytkin N T m merkki varoittaa k ytt j s hk iskun vaarasta paikassa miss voi koskettaa LAITTEEN VAATIMUKSET Sy tt j nnite 100 240 V AC DC Taajuus 50 60 Hz Teho 100 VA Sulakearvo 3 15 A 250 V AC DC K YTT OLOSUHTEET l k yt laitetta paikassa jossa on syttyvi nesteit tai kaasuja koska laitteen k ytt aiheuttaa r j
323. va oe yia va rrepiop Cerar Trp opaor rou xprjorn T OW 270 Video Recorder User Manual Safety NORME DI SICUREZZA IT21 6063 Per ridurre i rischi di scariche elettriche che potrebbero causare alle persone seguire tutte le precauzioni circa la sicurezza indicate in questa documentazione Questo simbolo avverte del pericolo di scossa elettrica nelle aree in cui sono accessibili conduttori sotto tensione Terminale di protezione verso terra Previsto per il collegamento del conduttore di protezione verso terra del sistema di alimentazione OAS e Selo strumento viene utilizzato in modo diverso dalla specifica del costruttore la protezione fornita dallo strumento pu essere diversa e sostituire alcun componente o parte non specificato esplicitamente come ricambio dal vostro fornitore e Tutti i cablaggi devono essere in accordo con i regolamenti locali e devono essere eseguiti da personale esperto ed autorizzato e I terminale di massa deve essere collegato prima di ogni altro filo e scollegato per ultimo necessario che sia presente un interruttore nell alimentazione principale accanto all apparecchio ALIMENTAZIONE APPARECCHIATURA Tensione di alimentazione Da 100 a 240 Vca cc Frequenza 50 60 Hz Potenza o corrente 100 VA Fusibile 3 15 250 Vca cc CONDIZIONI AMBIENTALI Non far funzionare l apparecchio in presenza di liquidi o gas i
324. wing procedure shows how Table 3 8 Example Function Block Parameter Selection Procedure In the Program Analog Output menu select ANALOG OUTPUT 1 2 Consult the Program Analog Output section of this manual to learn about the menu item you wish to change namely FAILSAFE Press the Down Arrow button to move the cursor down to FAILSAFE Press Enter to move the cursor to the right side of the display where the choices for FAILSAFE are Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until DOWN is displayed 6 Press Enter to select DOWN The cursor moves to the left and DOWN is selected 3 13 How to program a simple configuration This section describes how to program your instrument You should practice doing these procedures until you are familiar with the buttons and menus Table 3 9 Function Block Configuration Procedure Select the desired function block from the Program menu for this procedure 2 Program each of the function block s input parameters with OFF a number or an output code from another function block See section 3 11 for this procedure Program each function block parameter with a number selection NONE or OFF See section 3 11 Continued 58 Video Recorder User Manual Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 9 Function Block Configuration Procedure continued Program the function block s other items as desired Other items include decimal point positions descriptor tag and various labels for iden
325. with dual tuning Reset 1 is the time for the first set of tuning parameters Reset 2 is for the second set Variable Reset1 is available by programming a constant s Destination with RS See Program Constants Section 4 16 A value of OFF may be entered to allow proportional only control When turned off the manual reset value determines the loop output at set point Bumpless manual to automatic transfer is canceled when proportional only control is selected RESET LIMIT OFF or 100 to 200 This value restricts the calculated integral value of the loop during Cold Start or on a manual to automatic transfer RATIO BIAS Enter a bias value to be used in calculating the working set point of the ratio control loop This is essentially a value that will be added to the product that results when RATIO SETPOINT is multiplied by the ratio loop s wild variable input value For example in the fuel air ratio control scenario introduced in the RATIO SETPOINT section suppose fuel flow is the wild variable that measured to be 60 With the RATIO SETPOINT prompt set to 0 5 the result will be 30 when the RATIO SETPOINT is multiplied by the fuel flow If the RATIO BIAS prompt is then set to 10 the actual set point that the ratio loop will use to control air flow will be 30 10 40 To make a ratio control loop s working set point equal to RATIO SETPOINT x Wild Variable value RATIO BIAS the loop s working set point must be toggled to SP2 using the SP
326. zontally Interactive with 4 vertical bar graphs to the right BAR GRAPH 1 Trend Point 1 BAR GRAPH Trend Point 2 BAR GRAPHS Trend Point 3 BAR GRAPH4 Trend Point 4 LOOP_BAR Loop w Bar Graph Displays a loop s data as numbers and bar graphs Interactive Interactive Interactive Graphs Graphs Graphs SP TREND Setpoint Profile Trend Displays a Profile as a Trend TOTAL Displays 1 totale Video Recorder User Manual 209 Online Operations Using Primary Displays 6 2 Interacting With Primary Displays Interacting with Setpoint Trend Display When Setpoint Trend display is shown Figure 6 1 press the Tab key to display options for controlling the profilers execution See Section 5 5 for details SP1 PROFILOT _ 5 Z 1 0 00 0 00 00 SP 0 00 SEG1 9 READY 0 00 Figure 6 1 Changing Profile Batch Tag 210 Video Recorder User Manual Online Operations Using Primary Displays Interacting with Live or Replay Trends With a live vertical or horizontal trend on the display press Tab key to access the Point Detail menu When replaying stored trends this menu is always displayed From this menu you can press the Tab key again to advance the scoreboard at the top of the display to the next point in the trend Also you can press the Increment or Decrement buttons to scroll the trend forward or backward in time TEMP 7 2061 5 DEGF TEMP 7 1941 5 DEGF 2500 0 1500 0 250

Honeywell VRX180 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents